FILE NO. A07-003
Revised: Mar., 2008
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
SERVICE MANUAL
AIR-CONDITIONER
SPLIT TYPE
INDOOR UNIT
<DIGITAL INVERTER>
RAV-SM564UT-E
RAV-SM804UT-E
RAV-SM404SDT-E
RAV-SM454SDT-E
RAV-SM1104UT-E RAV-SM564SDT-E
RAV-SM1404UT-E
RAV-SM1604UT-E
OUTDOOR UNIT
<SUPER DIGITAL INVERTER>
RAV-SP404AT-E
RAV-SP454AT-E
RAV-SP404ATZ-E RAV-SP454ATZ-E
RAV-SP404ATZG-E RAV-SP454ATZG-E
RAV-SP1104AT-E
RAV-SP1404AT-E
RAV-SP1104ATZ-E RAV-SP1404ATZ-E
RAV-SP1104ATZG-E RAV-SP1404ATZG-E
R410A
PRINTED IN JAPAN, Jun., 2008 ToMo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. REFRIGERANT R410A ............................................................................ 46
7-1. Safety During Installation / Servicing ............................................................. 46
7-2. Refrigerant Piping Installation....................................................................... 46
7-3. Tools .................................................................................................................. 50
7-4. Recharging of Refrigerant................................................................................ 50
7-5. Brazing of Pipes................................................................................................ 51
7-6. Instructions for Re-use Piping of R22 or R407C ............................................ 53
8. INDOOR CONTROL CIRCUIT.................................................................. 58
8-1. Indoor Controller Block Diagram..................................................................... 58
8-2. Control Specifications...................................................................................... 61
8-3. Optional Connector Specifications of Indoor P.C. Board .............................. 74
8-4. Indoor Print Circuit Board ................................................................................ 75
9. CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION AND CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS ........... 76
9-1. Outdoor Controls .............................................................................................. 76
9-2. Outline of Main Controls .................................................................................. 78
10. TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................. 87
10-1. Summary ofTroubleshooting........................................................................... 87
10-2. Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 89
11. REPLACEMENT OF SERVICE P.C. BOARD.......................................... 141
11-1. Indoort Unit ..................................................................................................... 141
11-2. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 146
12. SETUP AT LOCAL SITE AND OTHERS ................................................ 147
12-1. Indoor Unit....................................................................................................... 147
12-2. Setup at Local Site / Others ........................................................................... 158
12-3. How to Set up Central Control Address Number ......................................... 160
12-4. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 166
13. ADDRESS SETUP.................................................................................. 173
13-1. Address Setup Procedure.............................................................................. 173
13-2. Address Setup & Group Control.................................................................... 174
13-3. Remote Controller Wiring............................................................................... 177
13-4. Address Setup (Manual setting from remote controller)............................. 178
13-5. Confirmation of Indoor Unit No. Position ..................................................... 179
14. DETACHMENTS ..................................................................................... 181
14-1. Indoor Unit...................................................................................................... 181
14-2. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 196
15. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST .................................................. 211
15-1. Indoor Unit....................................................................................................... 211
15-2. Outdoor Unit.................................................................................................... 219
– 3 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAFETY CAUTION
The important contents concerned to the safety are described on the product itself and on this Service Manual.
Please read this Service Manual after understanding the described items thoroughly in the following contents
(Indications/Illustrated marks), and keep them.
[Explanation of indications]
Indication
Explanation
Indicates contents assumed that an imminent danger causing a death or serious injury of
the repair engineers and the third parties when an incorrect work has been executed.
DANGER
Indicates possibilities assumed that a danger causing a death or serious injury of the
repair engineers, the third parties, and the users due to troubles of the product after work
when an incorrect work has been executed.
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates contents assumed that an injury or property damage (∗) may be caused on the
repair engineers, the third parties, and the users due to troubles of the product after work
when an incorrect work has been executed.
∗ Property damage : Enlarged damage concerned to property, furniture, and domestic animal/pet
[Explanation of illustrated marks]
Mark
Explanation
Indicates prohibited items (Forbidden items to do)
The sentences near an illustrated mark describe the concrete prohibited contents.
Indicates mandatory items (Compulsory items to do)
The sentences near an illustrated mark describe the concrete mandatory contents.
Indicates cautions (Including danger/warning)
The sentences or illustration near or in an illustrated mark describe the concrete cautious contents.
[Confirmation of warning label on the main unit]
Confirm that labels are indicated on the specified positions
(Refer to the Parts disassembly diagram (Outdoor unit).)
If removing the label during parts replace, stick it as the original.
DANGER
Turn “OFF” the breaker before removing the front panel and cabinet, otherwise an electric
shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.
During operation, a high voltage with 400V or higher of circuit (∗) at secondary circuit of the
high-voltage transformer is applied.
If touching a high voltage with the naked hands or body, an electric shock is caused even if using an
electric insulator.
Turn off breaker.
Execute discharge
∗ : For details, refer to the electric wiring diagram.
When removing the front panel or cabinet, execute short-circuit and discharge between
high-voltage capacitor terminals.
If discharge is not executed, an electric shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.
between terminals. After turning off the breaker, high voltage also keeps to apply to the high-voltage capacitor.
Do not turn on the breaker under condition that the front panel and cabinet are removed.
An electric shock is caused by high voltage resulted in a death or injury.
Prohibition
– 4 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
Before troubleshooting or repair work, check the earth wire is connected to the earth
terminals of the main unit, otherwise an electric shock is caused when a leak occurs.
If the earth wire is not correctly connected, contact an electric engineer for rework.
Check earth wires.
Prohibition of modification.
Use specified parts.
Do not modify the products.
Do not also disassemble or modify the parts. It may cause a fire, electric shock or injury.
For spare parts, use those specified (∗).
If unspecified parts are used, a fire or electric shock may be caused.
∗: For details, refer to the parts list.
Before troubleshooting or repair work, do not bring a third party (a child, etc.) except
the repair engineers close to the equipment.
It causes an injury with tools or disassembled parts.
Do not bring a child
close to the equipment.
Please inform the users so that the third party (a child, etc.) does not approach the equipment.
Connect the cut-off lead wires with crimp contact, etc, put the closed end side
upward and then apply a water-cut method, otherwise a leak or production of fire is
caused at the users’ side.
Insulating measures
When repairing the refrigerating cycle, take the following measures.
1) Be attentive to fire around the cycle. When using a gas stove, etc, be sure to put out fire
before work; otherwise the oil mixed with refrigerant gas may catch fire.
2) Do not use a welder in the closed room.
No fire
When using it without ventilation, carbon monoxide poisoning may be caused.
3) Do not bring inflammables close to the refrigerant cycle, otherwise fire of the welder may
catch the inflammables.
Check the used refrigerant name and use tools and materials of the parts which
match with it.
For the products which use R410A refrigerant, the refrigerant name is indicated at a
position on the outdoor unit where is easy to see. To prevent miss-charging, the route of the
service port is changed from one of the former R22.
For an air conditioner which uses R410A, never use other refrigerant than R410A.
For an air conditioner which uses other refrigerant (R22, etc.), never use R410A.
If different types of refrigerant are mixed, abnormal high pressure generates in the
refrigerating cycle and an injury due to breakage may be caused.
Do not charge refrigerant additionally.
If charging refrigerant additionally when refrigerant gas leaks, the refrigerant composition in
the refrigerating cycle changes resulted in change of air conditioner characteristics or
refrigerant over the specified standard amount is charged and an abnormal high pressure is
applied to the inside of the refrigerating cycle resulted in cause of breakage or injury.
Therefore if the refrigerant gas leaks, recover the refrigerant in the air conditioner, execute
vacuuming, and then newly recharge the specified amount of liquid refrigerant.
In this time, never charge the refrigerant over the specified amount.
Refrigerant
When recharging the refrigerant in the refrigerating cycle, do not mix the refrigerant
or air other than R410A into the specified refrigerant.
If air or others is mixed with the refrigerant, abnormal high pressure generates in the
refrigerating cycle resulted in cause of injury due to breakage.
After installation work, check the refrigerant gas does not leak.
If the refrigerant gas leaks in the room, poisonous gas generates when gas touches to fire
such as fan heater, stove or cocking stove though the refrigerant gas itself is innocuous.
Never recover the refrigerant into the outdoor unit.
When the equipment is moved or repaired, be sure to recover the refrigerant with
recovering device. The refrigerant cannot be recovered in the outdoor unit; otherwise a
serious accident such as breakage or injury is caused.
After repair work, surely assemble the disassembled parts, and connect and lead the
removed wires as before. Perform the work so that the cabinet or panel does not
catch the inner wires.
If incorrect assembly or incorrect wire connection was done, a disaster such as a leak or
fire is caused at user’s side.
Assembly/Cabling
– 5 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
WARNING
After the work has finished, be sure to use an insulation tester set (500V Megger) to
check the resistance is 2MΩ or more between the charge section and the non-charge
metal section (Earth position).
If the resistance value is low, a disaster such as a leak or electric shock is caused at user’s
side.
Insulator check
Ventilation
When the refrigerant gas leaks during work, execute ventilation.
If the refrigerant gas touches to a fire, poisonous gas generates.
A case of leakage of the refrigerant and the closed room full with gas is dangerous because
a shortage of oxygen occurs. Be sure to execute ventilation.
When checking the circuit inevitably under condition of the power-ON, use rubber
gloves and others not to touch to the charging section.
If touching to the charging section, an electric shock may be caused.
Be attentive to
electric shock
When the refrigerant gas leaks, find up the leaked position and repair it surely.
If the leaked position cannot be found up and the repair work is interrupted, pump-down
and tighten the service valve, otherwise the refrigerant gas may leak into the room.
The poisonous gas generates when gas touches to fire such as fan heater, stove or cocking
stove though the refrigerant gas itself is innocuous.
When installing equipment which includes a large amount of charged refrigerant
such as a multi air conditioner in a sub-room, it is necessary that the density does
not the limit even if the refrigerant leaks.
Compulsion
If the refrigerant leaks and exceeds the limit density, an accident of shortage of oxygen is
caused.
For the installation/moving/reinstallation work, follow to the Installation Manual.
If an incorrect installation is done, a trouble of the refrigerating cycle, water leak, electric
shock or fire is caused.
After repair work has finished, check there is no trouble.
If check is not executed, a fire, electric shock or injury may be caused.
For a check, turn off the power breaker.
Check after repair
After repair work (installation of front panel and cabinet) has finished, execute a test
run to check there is no generation of smoke or abnormal sound.
If check is not executed, a fire or an electric shock is caused.
Before test run, install the front panel and cabinet.
Check the following items after reinstallation.
Check after reinstallation
1) The earth wire is correctly connected.
2) The power cord is not caught in the product.
3) There is no inclination or unsteadiness and the installation is stable.
If check is not executed, a fire, an electric shock or an injury is caused.
CAUTION
Be sure to put on the gloves (∗) and a long sleeved shirt:
otherwise an injury may be caused with the parts, etc.
(∗) Heavy gloves such as work gloves
Put on gloves
Cooling check
When the power was turned on, start to work after the equipment has been
sufficiently cooled.
As temperature of the compressor pipes and others became high due to cooling/heating
operation, a burn may be caused.
– 6 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• New Refrigerant (R410A)
This air conditioner adopts a new HFC type refrigerant (R410A) which does not deplete the ozone layer.
1. Safety Caution Concerned to New Refrigerant
The pressure of R410A is high 1.6 times of that of the former refrigerant (R22).
Accompanied with change of refrigerant, the refrigerating oil has been also changed.
Therefore, be sure that water, dust, the former refrigerant or the former refrigerating oil is not mixed into the
refrigerating cycle of the air conditioner with new refrigerant during installation work or service work.
If an incorrect work or incorrect service is performed, there is a possibility to cause a serious accident.
Use the tools and materials exclusive to R410A to purpose a safe work.
2. Cautions on Installation/Service
1) Do not mix the other refrigerant or refrigerating oil.
For the tools exclusive to R410A, shapes of all the joints including the service port differ from those of
the former refrigerant in order to prevent mixture of them.
2) As the use pressure of the new refrigerant is high, use material thickness of the pipe and tools which are
specified for R410A.
3) In the installation time, use clean pipe materials and work with great attention so that water and others do
not mix in because pipes are affected by impurities such as water, oxide scales, oil, etc.
Use the clean pipes.
Be sure to brazing with flowing nitrogen gas. (Never use gas other than nitrogen gas.)
4) For the earth protection, use a vacuum pump for air purge.
5) R410A refrigerant is azeotropic mixture type refrigerant.
Therefore use liquid type to charge the refrigerant. (If using gas for charging, composition of the
refrigerant changes and then characteristics of the air conditioner change.)
3. Pipe Materials
For the refrigerant pipes, copper pipe and joints are mainly used.
It is necessary to select the most appropriate pipes to conform to the standard.
Use clean material in which impurities adhere inside of pipe or joint to a minimum.
1) Copper pipe
<Piping>
The pipe thickness, flare finishing size, flare nut and others differ according to a refrigerant type.
When using a long copper pipe for R410A, it is recommended to select “Copper or copper-base pipe
without seam” and one with bonded oil amount 40mg/10m or less.
Also do not use crushed, deformed, discolored (especially inside) pipes.
(Impurities cause clogging of expansion valves and capillary tubes.)
<Flare nut>
Use the flare nuts which are attached to the air conditioner unit.
2) Joint
The flare joint and socket joint are used for joints of the copper pipe.
The joints are rarely used for installation of the air conditioner. However clear impurities when using them.
– 7 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
4. Tools
1. Required Tools for R410A
Mixing of different types of oil may cause a trouble such as generation of sludge, clogging of capillary,
etc. Accordingly, the tools to be used are classified into the following three types.
1) Tools exclusive for R410A (Those which cannot be used for conventional refrigerant (R22))
2) Tools exclusive for R410A, but can be also used for conventional refrigerant (R22)
3) Tools commonly used for R410A and for conventional refrigerant (R22)
The table below shows the tools exclusive for R410A and their interchangeability.
Tools exclusive for R410A (The following tools for R410A are required.)
Tools whose specifications are changed for R410A and their interchangeability
R410A
air conditioner installation
Conventional air
conditioner installation
No.
Used tool
Usage
Existence of
new equipment
for R410A
Whether conven-
tional equipment
can be used
Whether conventional
equipment can be used
Flare tool
Pipe flaring
Yes
Yes
Ye s
*(Note)
*(Note)
N o
Ye s
*(Note)
No
‚
Copper pipe gauge for
adjusting projection margin flare tool
Flaring by conventional
Torque wrench
Tightening of flare nut
ƒ
„
ꢀ
†
Gauge manifold
Charge hose
Evacuating, refrigerant
charge, run check, etc.
Ye s
N o
No
Vacuum pump adapter
Vacuum evacuating
Refrigerant charge
Ye s
Ye s
N o
Ye s
Ye s
Electronic balance for
refrigerant charging
Ye s
‡
Refrigerant cylinder
Leakage detector
Refrigerant charge
Gas leakage check
Ye s
Ye s
N o
N o
No
ˆ
‰
Ye s
(Note) When flaring is carried out for R410A using the conventional flare tools, adjustment of projection
margin is necessary. For this adjustment, a copper pipe gauge, etc. are necessary.
General tools (Conventional tools can be used.)
In addition to the above exclusive tools, the following equipments which serve also for R22 are necessary
as the general tools.
1) Vacuum pump. Use vacuum pump by
attaching vacuum pump adapter.
2) Torque wrench
3) Pipe cutter
7) Screwdriver (+, –)
8) Spanner or Monkey wrench
9) Hole core drill
4) Reamer
10) Hexagon wrench (Opposite side 4mm)
11) Tape measure
5) Pipe bender
6) Level vial
12) Metal saw
Also prepare the following equipments for other installation method and run check.
1) Clamp meter
2) Thermometer
3) Insulation resistance tester (Megger)
4) Electroscope
– 8 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
1. SPECIFICATIONS
1-1. Indoor Unit
1-1-1. 4-Way Air Discharge CassetteType
<Single type>
Indoor unit
RAV-SM
564UT-E
804UT-E
1104UT-E
1404UT-E
Model
Outdoor unit
RAV-SP 562AT(Z)(ZG)-E 802AT(Z)(ZG)-E 1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E 1404AT(Z)(ZG)-E
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
Power supply
(kW)
(kW)
5.3
5.6
7.1
8.0
10.0
11.2
12.5
14.0
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
(A)
7.17 – 6.57
8.95 – 8.21
10.36 – 9.49
14.66 – 13.44
Power consumption (kW)
1.53
1.93
2.21
3.16
Power factor
EER
(%)
97
3.46
A
98
3.68
A
97
98
Cooling
4.52
3.96
Energy efficiency class ∗
A
A
Energy rating ∗∗
—
—
—
—
Electrical
characteristics
Running current
(A)
5.62 – 5.15
1.20
97
9.42 – 8.63
2.03
98
10.96 – 10.05
14.89 – 13.65
Power consumption (kW)
2.34
97
3.21
98
Power factor
COP
(%)
Heating
4.67
A
3.94
A
4.79
A
4.36
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
Energy rating ∗∗
(A)
—
—
—
—
Maximum current
Main unit
15.33
15.33
20.50
20.50
Zinc hot dipping steel plate
Appearance
Model
RBC-U31PG (W, WS)-E, RBC-U31PGS (W, WS)-E
Ceiling panel
(Sold separately)
Panel color
W: Moon-white (2.5GY 9.0/0.5), WS: Stripe-white (2.5GY 9.0/0.5, (Gray: 8B 3/0.3))
Height
Width
Depth
Height
Width
Depth
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
256
840
840
30
256
840
840
30
319
840
840
30
319
840
840
30
Main unit
Outer
dimension
Ceiling panel
(Sold separately)
950
950
20
950
950
20
950
950
24
950
950
24
Main unit
Total weight
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)
(kg)
4.2
4.2
4.2
4.2
Heat exchanger
Finned tube
Turbo fan
Fan
Fan unit
Air filter
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
17.5/14.5/13.0
14
20.5/16.0/13.5
20
33.5/24.0/19.5
68
35.0/24.0/20.5
72
Standard filter attached (Long life filter)
RBC-AMT32E, AMS41E, AS21E2, AX31U (W)-E
Controller (Sold separately)
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
32 / 29 / 28
47 / 44 / 43
12.7
35 / 31 / 28
50 / 46 / 43
15.9
43 / 38 / 33
58 / 53 / 48
15.9
44 / 38 / 34
59 / 53 / 49
15.9
H/M/L
Gas side
Liquid side
Drain port
Connecting pipe
6.4
9.5
9.5
9.5
VP25
∗ : IEC standard, ∗∗ : AS standard
– 9 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
<Single type>
Indoor unit
RAV- SM564UT-E SM804UT-E SM1104UT-E SM1404UT-E SM1604UT-E
Model
Outdoor unit
RAV- SM563AT-E
SM803AT-E SM1103AT-E SM1403AT-E SM1603AT-E
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
Power supply
(kW)
(kW)
5.3
5.6
6.7
8.0
10.0
11.2
12.0
14.0
14.0
16.0
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
9.97 – 9.12 14.61 – 13.40 17.62 – 16.14 21.48 – 19.69
Running current
(A) 7.89 – 7.24
Power consumption (kW)
1.65
95
2.09
95
3.11
97
3.74
96
4.49
95
Power factor
EER
(%)
Cooling
3.21
A
3.21
A
3.22
A
3.21
A
3.12
B
Energy efficiency class ∗
Energy rating ∗∗
—
—
—
—
—
Electrical
characteristics
Running current
(A) 6.89 – 6.32
10.83 – 9.90 13.38 – 12.38 17.88 – 15.87 21.20 – 19.43
Power consumption (kW)
1.44
95
2.21
93
2.93
99
3.80
98
4.43
95
Power factor
COP
(%)
Heating
3.89
A
3.62
A
3.82
A
3.68
A
3.61
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
Energy rating ∗∗
—
—
—
—
—
Maximum current
Main unit
(A)
15.33
15.33
20.50
20.50
32.0
Zinc hot dipping steel plate
Model
RBC-U31PG (W, WS)-E, RBC-U31PGS (W, WS)-E
Appearance
Ceiling panel
W: Moon-white (2.5GY 9.0/0.5),
WS: Stripe-white (2.5GY 9.0/0.5, (Gray: 8B 3/0.3))
(Sold separately)
Panel color
Height
Width
Depth
Height
Width
Depth
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
256
840
840
30
256
840
840
30
319
840
319
840
840
30
319
840
840
30
Main unit
840
Outer
dimension
30
Ceiling panel
(Sold separately)
950
950
20
950
950
20
950
950
950
24
950
950
24
950
Main unit
24
Total weight
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)
(kg)
4.2
4.2
4.2
4.2
4.2
Heat exchanger
Finned tube
Turbo fan
Fan
Fan unit
Air filter
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.) 17.5/14.5/13.0 20.5/16.0/13.5 33.5/24.0/19.5 35.0/24.0/20.5 35.5/25.0/21.0
(W)
14
20
68
72
72
Standard filter attached (Long life filter)
Controller (Sold separately)
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
RBC-AMT32E, AMS41E, AS21E2, AX31U (W)-E
H/M/L
(dB•A) 32 / 29 / 28
(dB•A) 47 / 44 / 43
35 / 31 / 28
50 / 46 / 43
15.9
43 / 38 / 33
58 / 53 / 48
15.9
44 / 38 / 34
59 / 53 / 49
15.9
45 / 40 / 36
60 / 55 / 51
15.9
H/M/L
Gas side
Liquid side
Drain port
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
12.7
6.4
Connecting pipe
9.5
9.5
9.5
9.5
VP25
∗ : IEC standard, ∗∗ : AS standard
– 10 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
<Twin type>
Indoor unit 1
Indoor unit 2
Outdoor unit
RAV-
RAV-
SM564UT-E
SM564UT-E
SP1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E
10.0
SM804UT-E
SM804UT-E
SP1404AT(Z)(ZG)-E
12.5
Model
RAV-
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
(kW)
(kW)
11.2
14.0
Indoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
EER
(A)
(kW)
(%)
10.36 – 9.49
14.66 – 13.44
2.21
3.16
Cooling
97
98
4.52
3.96
Energy efficiency class ∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
A
A
Electrical
characteristics
(A)
(kW)
(%)
10.96 – 10.05
14.89 – 13.65
2.34
97
3.21
98
Heating
Fan
COP
4.79
A
4.36
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
Turbo fan
Fan unit
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
17.5 / 14.5 / 13.0
14
20.5 / 16.0 / 13.5
20
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
H/M/L
H/M/L
(dB•A)
32 / 29 / 28
47 / 44 / 43
35 / 31 / 28
50 / 46 / 43
(dB•A)
Outdoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Standard length
(m)
(m)
(m)
7.5
3
7.5
3
Min. length
Max. total length
50
50
Refrigerant
pipe
Refrigerant charging amount
(Charge-less up to 30m)
40g/m (31m to 50m)
Propeller fan
Outdoor lower
Outdoor higher
(m)
(m)
30
30
30
30
Height
difference
Fan
Fan unit
Standard air flow volume
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
101
100 + 100
15.9
103
100 + 100
15.9
Main
(mm)
Gas side
Sub
(mm)
12.7
15.9
Connecting
pipe
Main
(mm)
9.5
9.5
Liquid side
Sub
(mm)
6.4
9.5
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
Cooling/Heating
Cooling/Heating
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
49 / 50
66 / 67
51 / 52
68 / 69
∗ : IEC standard
– 11 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
<Twin type>
Indoor unit 1
Indoor unit 2
Outdoor unit
RAV-
RAV-
SM564UT-E
SM564UT-E
SM1103AT-E
10.0
SM804UT-E
SM804UT-E
SM804UT-E
SM804UT-E
Model
RAV-
SM1403AT-E
12.5
SM1603AT-E
14.0
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
(kW)
(kW)
11.2
14.0
16.0
Indoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
EER
(A)
(kW)
(%)
14.59 – 13.38
19.17 – 17.57
21.48 – 19.69
3.11
4.09
4.49
Cooling
98
97
3.06
95
3.12
3.22
Energy efficiency class ∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
A
(B)
(B)
Electrical
characteristics
(A)
(kW)
(%)
13.36 – 12.36
18.74 – 17.18
4.00
21.20 – 19.43
4.43
2.93
99
Heating
Fan
97
95
COP
3.82
A
3.50
3.61
Energy efficiency class ∗
(B)
(A)
Turbo fan
20.5 / 16.0 / 13.5
20
Fan unit
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
17.5 / 14.5 / 13.0
14
20.5 / 16.0 / 13.5
20
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
H/M/L
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
32 / 29 / 28
47 / 44 / 43
35 / 31 / 28
50 / 46 / 43
35 / 31 / 28
50 / 46 / 43
Outdoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Standard length
(m)
(m)
(m)
7.5
5
7.5
5
7.5
5
Min. length
Max. total length
50
50
50
Refrigerant
pipe
Refrigerant charging amount
(Charge-less up to 30m)
40g/m (31m to 50m)
Outdoor lower
Outdoor higher
(m)
(m)
30
30
30
30
30
Height
difference
30
Fan
Propeller fan
75
Fan unit
Standard air flow volume
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
75
63
103
100
15.9
100 + 100
15.9
Main
(mm)
15.9
12.7
9.5
Gas side
Sub
(mm)
15.9
15.9
Connecting
pipe
Main
(mm)
9.5
9.5
Liquid side
Sub
(mm)
6.4
9.5
9.5
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
Cooling/Heating
Cooling/Heating
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
53 / 54
70 / 71
54 / 54
71 / 71
51 / 53
68 / 70
∗ : IEC standard
– 12 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
1-1-2. Concealed DuctType
<Single type>
Indoor unit
Model
RAV-SM
562BT-E
802BT-E
1102BT-E
1402BT-E
Outdoor unit
RAV-SP 562AT(Z)(ZG)-E 802AT(Z)(ZG)-E 1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E 1404AT(Z)(ZG)-E
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
Power supply
(kW)
(kW)
5.0
5.6
7.1
8.0
10.0
11.2
12.5
14.0
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
(A)
6.51 – 5.97
9.74 – 8.93
13.78 – 12.63
17.76 – 16.28
Power consumption (kW)
1.39
2.10
2.94
3.83
Power factor
EER
(%)
97
3.60
A
98
3.38
A
97
98
Cooling
3.40
3.26
Energy efficiency class ∗
A
A
Energy rating ∗∗
—
—
—
—
Electrical
characteristics
Running current
(A)
7.26 – 6.66
1.55
97
9.74 – 8.93
2.41
94
12.98 – 11.90
15.82 – 14.50
Power consumption (kW)
2.77
97
3.41
98
Power factor
COP
(%)
Heating
3.61
A
3.32
A
4.04
A
4.11
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
Energy rating ∗∗
(A)
—
—
—
—
Maximum current
Main unit
15.86
16.30
21.73
22.13
Zinc hot dipping steel plate
Appearance
Model
—
—
Ceiling panel
(Sold separately)
Panel color
Height
Width
Depth
Height
Width
Depth
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
320
700
800
—
320
1000
800
—
320
1350
800
—
320
1350
800
—
Main unit
Outer
dimension
Ceiling panel
(Sold separately)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Main unit
30
39
54
54
Total weight
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)
(kg)
—
—
—
—
Heat exchanger
Finned tube
Centrifugal
Fan
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
13.0/11.9/9.8
120
19.0/16.2/13.3
120
27.0/23.0/18.9
120
33.0/28.0/23.1
120
Fan unit
Standard
(Pa)
(Pa)
40
(at shipment)
External
static pressure
Set up
20/40/70/100
20/40/65/90
for tap exchange
UFM11BFCE
UFM31BE
UFM51BFCE
UFM71BE
UFM21BFCE
UFM21BE
UFM61BE
UFM41BE
UFM61BFCE
UFM81BE
Air filter (Sold separately)
TCB-
Controller (Sold separately)
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
RBC-AMT31E, AMS41E, AS21E2, AX21U(W)-E2
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
40 / 37 / 33
55 / 52 / 48
12.7
40 / 37 / 34
55 / 52 / 49
15.9
42 / 39 / 36
57 / 54 / 51
15.9
44 / 41 / 38
59 / 56 / 53
15.9
H/M/L
Gas side
Liquid side
Drain port
Connecting pipe
6.4
9.5
9.5
9.5
VP25
∗ : IEC standard, ∗∗ : AS standard
– 13 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
<Twin type>
Indoor unit 1
Indoor unit 2
Outdoor unit
RAV-
RAV-
SM562BT-E
SM562BT-E
SP1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E
10.0
SM802BT-E
SM802BT-E
SP1404AT(Z)(ZG)-E
12.5
Model
RAV-
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
(kW)
(kW)
11.2
14.0
Indoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
EER
(A)
(kW)
(%)
13.78 – 12.63
17.76 – 16.28
2.94
3.83
Cooling
97
98
3.4
3.26
Energy efficiency class ∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
A
A
Electrical
characteristics
(A)
(kW)
(%)
12.98 – 11.90
15.82 – 14.50
2.77
97
3.41
98
Heating
Fan
COP
4.04
A
4.11
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
Centrifugal
Fan unit
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
13.0 / 11.9 / 9.8
120
19.0 / 16.2 / 13.3
120
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
H/M/L
H/M/L
(dB•A)
40 / 37 / 33
55 / 52 / 48
40 / 37 / 34
55 / 52 / 49
(dB•A)
Outdoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Standard length
(m)
(m)
(m)
7.5
3
7.5
3
Min. length
Max. total length
50
50
Refrigerant
pipe
Refrigerant charging amount
(Charge-less up to 30m)
40g/m (31m to 50m)
Propeller fan
Outdoor lower
Outdoor higher
(m)
(m)
30
30
30
30
Height
difference
Fan
Fan unit
Standard air flow volume
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
101
100 + 100
15.9
103
100 + 100
15.9
Main
(mm)
Gas side
Sub
(mm)
12.7
15.9
Connecting
pipe
Main
(mm)
9.5
9.5
Liquid side
Sub
(mm)
6.4
9.5
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
Cooling/Heating
Cooling/Heating
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
49 / 50
66 / 67
51 / 52
68 / 69
∗ : IEC standard
– 14 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
1-1-3. Under CeilingType
<Single type>
Indoor unit
Model
RAV-SM
562CT-E
802CT-E
1102CT-E
1402CT-E
Outdoor unit
RAV-SP 562AT(Z)(ZG)-E 802AT(Z)(ZG)-E 1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E 1404AT(Z)(ZG)-E
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
Power supply
(kW)
(kW)
5.0
5.6
7.1
8.0
10.0
11.2
12.5
14.0
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
(A)
6.61 – 6.06
9.47 – 8.93
12.51 – 11.47
17.30 – 15.86
Power consumption (kW)
1.41
2.1
2.67
3.73
Power factor
EER
(%)
97
3.55
A
98
97
98
Cooling
3.38
3.75
3.35
Energy efficiency class ∗
A
A
A
Energy rating ∗∗
—
—
—
—
Electrical
characteristics
Running current
(A)
7.03 – 6.44
1.50
97
10.20 – 9.35
12.28 – 11.25
16.93 – 15.52
Power consumption (kW)
2.20
98
2.62
97
3.65
98
Power factor
COP
(%)
Heating
3.73
A
3.64
A
4.27
A
3.84
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
Energy rating ∗∗
(A)
—
—
—
—
Maximum current
Main unit
15.48
15.90
21.35
21.35
Shine white
Appearance
Ceiling panel
Model
—
—
(Sold separately)
Panel color
Height
Width
Depth
Height
Width
Depth
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
210
910
680
—
210
1180
680
—
210
1595
680
—
210
1595
680
—
Main unit
Outer
dimension
Ceiling panel
(Sold separately)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Main unit
21
25
33
33
Total weight
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)
(kg)
—
—
—
—
Heat exchanger
Fan unit
Finned tube
Centrifugal
Fan
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
13.0/11.2/10.0
60
18.5/16.7/14.6
60
27.5/24.0/21.2
120
30.0/26.0/23.1
120
Air filter
Attached main unit
RBC-AMT31E, AMS41E, AS21E2, TCB-SC642TLE2, AX21UCE2
Controller (Sold separately)
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
36 / 33 / 30
51 / 48 / 45
12.7
38 / 36 / 33
53 / 51 / 48
15.9
41 / 38 / 36
56 / 53 / 50
15.9
43 / 40 / 37
58 / 55 / 52
15.9
H/M/L
Gas side
Liquid side
Drain port
Connecting pipe
6.4
9.5
9.5
9.5
VP25
∗ : IEC standard, ∗∗ : AS standard
– 15 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
<Twin type>
Indoor unit 1
Indoor unit 2
Outdoor unit
RAV-
RAV-
SM562CT-E
SM562CT-E
SP1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E
10.0
SM802CT-E
SM802CT-E
SP1404A(Z)(ZG)-E
12.5
Model
RAV-
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
(kW)
(kW)
11.2
14.0
Indoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
EER
(A)
(kW)
(%)
12.51 – 11.47
17.30 – 15.86
2.67
3.73
Cooling
97
98
3.75
3.35
Energy efficiency class ∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
A
A
Electrical
characteristics
(A)
(kW)
(%)
12.28 – 11.25
16.93 – 15.52
2.62
97
3.65
98
Heating
Fan
COP
4.27
A
3.84
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
Centrifugal
Fan unit
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
13.0 / 11.2 / 10.0
60
18.5 / 16.7 / 14.6
60
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
H/M/L
H/M/L
(dB•A)
36 / 33 / 30
51 / 48 / 45
38 / 36 / 33
53 / 51 / 48
(dB•A)
Outdoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Standard length
(m)
(m)
(m)
7.5
3
7.5
3
Min. length
Max. total length
50
50
Refrigerant
pipe
Refrigerant charging amount
(Charge-less up to 30m)
40g/m
(31m to 50m)
Outdoor lower
Outdoor higher
(m)
(m)
30
30
30
30
Height
difference
Fan
Propeller fan
Fan unit
Standard air flow volume
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
101
100 + 100
15.9
103
100 + 100
15.9
Main
(mm)
Gas side
Sub
(mm)
12.7
15.9
Connecting
pipe
Main
Liquid side
(mm)
9.5
9.5
Sub
(mm)
6.4
9.5
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
Cooling/Heating
Cooling/Heating
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
49 / 50
66 / 67
51 / 52
68 / 69
∗ : IEC standard
– 16 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
1-1-4. High WallType
<Single type>
Indoor unit
Model
RAV-
RAV-
(kW)
(kW)
SM562KRT-E
SM802KRT-E
Outdoor unit
SP562AT(Z)(ZG)-E
SP802AT(Z)(ZG)-E
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
Power supply
5.0
5.6
6.9
8.0
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
(A)
(kW)
(%)
8.33 – 7.63
13.15 – 12.05
1.39
2.4
95
3.60
A
94
Cooling
EER
2.88
Energy efficiency class ∗
Energy rating ∗∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
C
—
—
Electrical
characteristics
(A)
(kW)
(%)
8.14 – 7.46
1.55
95
12.91 – 11.84
2.4
94
Heating
COP
3.61
A
3.33
C
Energy efficiency class ∗
Energy rating ∗∗
—
—
Maximum current
Main unit
(A)
15.34
15.47
Pure white
Appearance
Ceiling panel
Model
Panel color
Height
Width
—
—
(Sold separately)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
298
998
221
—
298
998
221
—
Main unit
Depth
Outer
dimension
Height
Width
Ceiling panel
(Sold separately)
—
—
Depth
—
—
Main unit
12
12
Total weight
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)
(kg)
—
—
Heat exchanger
Fan unit
Finned tube
Fan
Cross flow fan
14.0 / 12.5 / 10.7
30
Cross flow fan
18.5 / 14.6 / 12.2
30
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
Air filter
Attached main unit
RBC-AMT31E, AMS41E, AS21E2, TCB-SC642TLE2, AX21UCE2
(FCU comes with WH-H2UE)
Controller (Sold separately)
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
39 / 36 / 33
54 / 51 / 48
12.7
45 / 41 / 36
60 / 56 / 51
15.9
H/M/L
Gas side
Liquid side
Drain port
Connecting pipe
6.4
9.5
VP16
∗ : IEC standard, ∗∗ : AS standard
– 17 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
<Twin type>
Indoor unit 1
Indoor unit 2
Outdoor unit
RAV-
RAV-
SM562KRT-E
SM562KRT-E
SP1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E
10.0
SM802KRT-E
SM802KRT-E
SP1404AT(Z)(ZG)-E
12.3
Model
RAV-
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
(kW)
(kW)
11.2
14.0
Indoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
EER
(A)
(kW)
(%)
12.98 – 11.90
18.00 – 16.50
2.77
3.88
Cooling
97
98
3.61
3.17
Energy efficiency class ∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
A
13.12 – 12.03
2.80
B
Electrical
characteristics
(A)
(kW)
(%)
17.76 – 16.28
3.83
98
Heating
Fan
97
COP
4.00
3.66
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
A
Cross flow fan
14.0 / 12.5 / 10.7
30
Fan unit
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
18.5 / 14.6 / 12.2
30
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
H/M/L
H/M/L
(dB•A)
39 / 36 / 33
54 / 51 / 48
45 / 41 / 36
60 / 56 / 51
(dB•A)
Outdoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Standard length
(m)
(m)
(m)
7.5
3
7.5
3
Min. length
Max. total length
50
50
Refrigerant
pipe
Refrigerant charging amount
(Charge-less up to 30m)
40g/m
(31m to 50m)
Outdoor lower
Outdoor higher
(m)
(m)
30
30
30
30
Height
difference
Fan
Propeller fan
101
Fan unit
Standard air flow volume
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
103
100 + 100
15.9
100 + 100
15.9
Main
(mm)
Gas side
Sub
(mm)
12.7
15.9
Connecting
pipe
Main
(mm)
9.5
9.5
Liquid side
Sub
(mm)
6.4
9.5
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
Cooling/Heating
Cooling/Heating
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
49 / 50
66 / 67
51 / 52
68 / 69
∗ : IEC standard
– 18 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-1-5. Compact 4-Way Cassette (600 × 600)Type
<Single type>
Indoor unit
RAV-SM562MUT-E
Model
Outdoor unit
RAV-SP562AT(Z)(ZG)-E
Cooling capacity
(kW)
(kW)
5.0
Heating capacity
5.6
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
(A)
(kW)
(%)
6.6 – 7.15
Power consumption
1.53
Power factor
Cooling
97
EER
3.27
Energy efficiency class
Energy rating
A
4.5
Electrical characteristics
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
(A)
(kW)
(%)
6.62 – 7.21
1.54
97
Heating
COP
3.64
Energy efficiency class
Energy rating
A
4.5
Maximum current
Main unit
(A)
15.53
Zinc hot dipping steel plate
Appearance
Model
Panel color
Height
Width
RBC-UM11PG(W)-E
Ceiling panel
(Sold separately)
Moon-white (Muncel 2.5GY 9.0 / 0.5)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
268
Main unit
575
Depth
575
Outer dimension
Height
Width
27
Ceiling panel
700
(Sold separately)
Depth
700
Main unit
17
3
Total weight
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)
(kg)
Heat exchanger
Finned tube
Turbo fan
13.3 / 11.2 / 9.1
60
Fan
Fan unit
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
Air filter
—
Controller (Sold separately)
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
As per enclosure
43 / 39 / 34
58 / 54 / 49
12.7
H/M/L
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(mm)
Gas side
Connecting pipe
Liquid side
(mm)
6.4
Drain port
(mm)
VP25
– 19 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
<Twin type>
Indoor unit 1
Indoor unit 2
Outdoor unit
RAV-
RAV-
RAV-
(kW)
(kW)
SM562MUT-E
Model
SM562MUT-E
SP1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E
10.0
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
11.2
Indoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
EER
(A)
(kW)
(%)
12.51 – 11.47
2.67
Cooling
97
3.75
Energy efficiency class ∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
A
12.51 – 11.47
2.67
Electrical
characteristics
(A)
(kW)
(%)
Heating
Fan
97
COP
4.19
Energy efficiency class ∗
A
Turbo fan
13.3 / 11.2 / 9.1
60
Fan unit
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
H/M/L
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
43 / 39 / 34
58 / 54 / 49
Outdoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Standard length
(m)
(m)
(m)
7.5
Min. length
3
Max. total length
50
Refrigerant pipe
Refrigerant charging amount (Charge-less up to 30m)
40g/m (31m to 50m)
Outdoor lower
(m)
(m)
30
30
Height difference
Outdoor higher
Fan
Propeller fan
101
Fan unit
Standard air flow volume
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
100 + 100
15.9
Main
(mm)
Gas side
Sub
(mm)
12.7
Connecting pipe
Main
(mm)
9.5
Liquid side
Sub
(mm)
6.4
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
Cooling/Heating
Cooling/Heating
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
49 / 50
66 / 67
∗ : IEC standard
– 20 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
1-1-6. Slim DuctType
<Single type>
Indoor unit
RAV-SM
RAV-SP
(kW)
404SDT-E
454SDT-E
564SDT-E
Model
Outdoor unit
404AT(Z)(ZG)-E
454AT(Z)(ZG)-E
562AT(Z)(ZG)-E
Cooling capacity
3.6
4.0
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.6
Heating capacity
(kW)
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
(A)
(kW)
(%)
5.20 – 4.77
5.87 – 5.38
7.26 – 6.66
1.03
90
1.20
1.55
97
93
Cooling
EER
3.50
A
3.33
3.23
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
Energy rating ∗∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
A
5.0
4.5
4.0
Electrical
characteristics
(A)
(kW)
(%)
4.94 – 4.53
1.00
92
5.62 – 5.15
6.75 – 6.19
1.44
97
1.15
93
Heating
COP
4.00
A
3.91
3.89
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
Energy rating ∗∗
A
5.5
5.0
5.0
Maximum current
Main unit
(A)
15.00
15.00
15.00
Zinc hot dipping steel plate
Appearance
Ceiling panel
Model
Panel color
Height
Width
—
(Sold separately)
—
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
210
845
645
—
210
210
845
645
—
Main unit
845
Depth
645
Outer
dimension
Height
Width
—
Ceiling panel
(Sold separately)
—
—
—
Depth
—
—
—
Main unit
22
22
—
22
Total weight
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)
(kg)
—
—
Heat exchanger
Finned tube
Centrifugal
11.5 / 10.0 / 8.7
60
Fan
Standard air flow
Motor
H/M/L
(m³/min.)
(W)
11.5 / 10.0 / 8.7
60
13.0 / 11.3 / 9.7
60
Fan unit
Standard (at shipment)
Set up for tap exchange
(Pa)
10
External
static pressure
(Pa)
10 / 20 / 35 / 50
Air filter
Standard filter attached (Long life filter)
RBC-AMT32E, AMS41E, AS21E2
Controller (Sold separately)
Under air inlet
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(mm)
39 / 36 / 33
39 / 36 / 33
30 / 28 / 26
54 / 51 / 48
45 / 43 / 41
12.7
45 / 40 / 36
Sound
pressure level
Back air inlet
Under air inlet
Back air inlet
H/M/L
30 / 28 / 26
54 / 51 / 48
45 / 43 / 41
12.7
33 / 31 / 28
60 / 55 / 51
48 / 46 / 43
12.7
H/M/L
Sound
power level
H/M/L
Gas side
Liquid side
Drain port
Connecting pipe
(mm)
6.4
6.4
6.4
(mm)
VP25
∗ : IEC standard, ∗∗ : AS standard
– 21 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
<Single type>
Indoor unit
RAV-SM
RAV-SM
(kW)
564SDT-E
Model
Outdoor unit
563AT-E
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
Power supply
5.0
(kW)
5.6
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
(A)
(kW)
(%)
7.94 – 7.28
1.66
95
Cooling
EER
3.01
Energy efficiency class ∗
Energy rating ∗∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
B
3.5
Electrical
characteristics
(A)
(kW)
(%)
7.61 – 6.97
1.59
95
Heating
COP
3.52
Energy efficiency class ∗
Energy rating ∗∗
B
4.0
Maximum current
Main unit
(A)
15.00
Zinc hot dipping steel plate
Appearance
Model
Panel color
Height
Width
—
Ceiling panel
(Sold separately)
—
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
(kg)
210
Main unit
845
Depth
645
Outer
dimension
Height
Width
—
Ceiling panel
(Sold separately)
—
Depth
—
Main unit
22
Total weight
Ceiling panel (Sold separately)
(kg)
—
Heat exchanger
Finned tube
Fan
Centrifugal
Standard air flow
Motor
H/M/L
(m³/min.)
(W)
13.0 / 11.3 / 9.7
Fan unit
Air filter
60
Standard (at shipment)
Set up for tap exchange
(Pa)
10
External
static pressure
(Pa)
10 / 20 / 35 / 50
Standard filter attached (Long life filter)
Controller (Sold separately)
RBC-AMT32E, AMS41E, AS21E2
Under air inlet
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(mm)
45 / 40 / 36
33 / 31 / 28
60 / 55 / 51
48 / 46 / 43
12.7
Sound
pressure level
Back air inlet
Under air inlet
Back air inlet
H/M/L
H/M/L
Sound
power level
H/M/L
Gas side
Liquid side
Drain port
Connecting pipe
(mm)
6.4
(mm)
VP25
∗ : IEC standard, ∗∗ : AS standard
– 22 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
<Twin type>
Indoor unit 1
Indoor unit 2
Outdoor unit
RAV-SM
RAV-SM
RAV-SP
(kW)
564SDT-E
564SDT-E
1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E
10.0
564SDT-E
564SDT-E
1102AT(Z)(ZG)-E
10.0
Model
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
(kW)
11.2
11.2
Indoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
(A)
(kW)
(%)
12.98 –11.90
11.72 – 10.74
Power consumption
Power factor
2.77
2.50
Cooling
97
97
EER
3.61
4.00
Energy efficiency class ∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
A
A
Electrical
characteristics
(A)
(kW)
(%)
12.51 – 11.47
11.95 – 10.95
2.67
97
2.55
97
Heating
Fan
COP
4.19
A
4.39
A
Energy efficiency class ∗
Centrifugal
Fan unit
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
13.0 / 11.3 / 9.7
60
13.0 / 11.3 / 9.7
60
Under air inlet
Back air inlet
Under air inlet
Back air inlet
H/M/L
H/M/L
H/M/L
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
45 / 40 / 36
33 / 31 / 28
60 / 55 / 51
48 / 46 / 43
45 / 40 / 36
33 / 31 / 28
60 / 55 / 51
48 / 46 / 43
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
Outdoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Standard length
Min. length
(m)
(m)
(m)
7.5
3
7.5
5
Max. total length
50
50
Refrigerant pipe
Refrigerant charging amount (Charge-less up to 30m)
40g/m (31m to 50m)
Propeller fan
Outdoor lower
(m)
(m)
30
30
30
30
Height difference
Outdoor higher
Fan
Fan unit
Standard air flow volume
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
101
125
63 + 63
15.9
100 + 100
15.9
Main
(mm)
Gas side
Sub
(mm)
12.7
12.7
Connecting pipe
Main
(mm)
9.5
9.5
Liquid side
Sub
(mm)
6.4
6.4
Sound pressure level Cooling/Heating
Sound power level Cooling/Heating
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
49 / 50
66 / 67
49 / 51
66 / 68
∗ : IEC standard
– 23 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<Twin type>
Indoor unit 1
Indoor unit 2
Outdoor unit
RAV-SM
RAV-SM
RAV-SM
(kW)
564SDT-E
564SDT-E
1103AT-E
10.0
Model
Cooling capacity
Heating capacity
(kW)
11.2
Indoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Running current
(A)
(kW)
(%)
16.47 – 15.09
3.55
Power consumption
Power factor
Cooling
98
EER
2.82
Energy efficiency class ∗
Running current
Power consumption
Power factor
C
Electrical
characteristics
(A)
(kW)
(%)
14.56 – 13.35
3.14
Heating
Fan
98
COP
3.57
Energy efficiency class ∗
B
Centrifugal
13.0 / 11.3 / 9.7
60
Fan unit
Standard air flow H/M/L
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
Under air inlet
Back air inlet
Under air inlet
Back air inlet
H/M/L
H/M/L
H/M/L
H/M/L
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
45 / 40 / 36
33 / 31 / 28
60 / 55 / 51
48 / 46 / 43
Sound pressure level
Sound power level
Outdoor unit
Power supply
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Standard length
Min. length
(m)
(m)
(m)
7.5
5
Max. total length
50
Outer dimension
40g/m
(31m to 50m)
Over 30m
Outdoor lower
Outdoor higher
(m)
(m)
30
30
Height difference
Fan
Propeller fan
75
Fan unit
Standard air flow volume
Motor
(m³/min.)
(W)
100
Main
(mm)
15.9
Gas side
Sub
(mm)
12.7
Connecting pipe
Main
(mm)
9.5
Liquid side
Sub
(mm)
6.4
Sound pressure level Cooling/Heating
Sound power level Cooling/Heating
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
53 / 54
70 / 71
∗ : IEC standard
– 24 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
1-2. Outdoor Unit
<Super Digital Inverter>
Model name
Outdoor unit
RAV-SP 562AT(Z)(ZG)-E 802AT(Z)(ZG)-E 1104AT(Z)(ZG)-E 1404AT(Z)(ZG)-E
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
(Power exclusive to outdoor is required.)
Power supply
Type
Motor
Pole
Hermetic compressor
Compressor
(kW)
(kg)
2
4
2
4
3.75
4
3.75
4
Refrigerant charged
Refrigerant control
1.5
2.1
3.1
3.1
Pulse motor valve
Standard length
Max. total length
(m)
(m)
7.5
50
7.5
50
7.5
75
7.5
75
Inter
connecting pipe
Additional refrigerant charge
under long piping connector
20g/m
(21m to 50m)
40g/m
(31m to 50m)
40g/m
(31m to 75m)
40g/m
(31m to 75m)
Outdoor lower
Height
(m)
(m)
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
difference
Outdoor higher
Height
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
795
900
320
795
900
320
1340
900
320
1340
900
320
Outer dimension Width
Depth
Appearance
Total weight
Heat exchanger
Fan
Silky shade (Muncel 1Y8.5/0.5)
(kg)
55
62
93
93
Finned tube
Propeller fan
Fan unit
Standard air flow
(m³/min.)
(W)
57
63
57
63
101
103
100 + 100
15.9
Motor
100 + 100
15.9
Gas side
Liquid side
(mm)
(mm)
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(°C)
12.7
6.4
15.9
9.5
Connecting pipe
9.5
9.5
Sound pressure level
Cooling/Heating
Cooling/Heating
46 / 47
63 / 64
47 / 49
64 / 66
49 / 50
66 / 67
51 / 52
68 / 69
Sound power level
Outside air temperature, Cooling
Outside air temperature, Heating
43 to –15°C
(°C)
15 to –15°C
15 to –20°C
– 25 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model name
Outdoor unit
RAV-SP
404AT(Z)(ZG)-E
454AT(Z)(ZG)-E
1 phase 230V (220 – 240V) 50Hz
Power supply
(Power exclusive to outdoor is required.)
Hermetic compressor
Type
Motor
Pole
Compressor
(kW)
(kg)
1.1
4
1.1
4
Refrigerant charged
Refrigerant control
1.0
1.0
Pulse motor valve
Standard length
Max. total length
(m)
(m)
7.5
30
7.5
30
Inter
connecting pipe
Additional refrigerant charge
under long piping connector
20g/m (21m to 30m)
Outdoor lower
Height
(m)
(m)
30
30
30
30
difference
Outdoor higher
Height
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
550
780
290
550
780
290
Outer dimension Width
Depth
Appearance
Total weight
Heat exchanger
Fan
Silky shade (Muncel 1Y8.5/0.5)
(kg)
40
40
Finned tube
Propeller fan
Fan unit
Standard air flow
(m³/min.)
(W)
40
43
40
43
Motor
Gas side
Liquid side
(mm)
(mm)
(dB•A)
(dB•A)
(°C)
12.7
6.4
12.7
6.4
Connecting pipe
Sound pressure level
Cooling/Heating
Cooling/Heating
45 / 47
62 / 64
45 / 47
62 / 64
Sound power level
Outside air temperature, Cooling
Outside air temperature, Heating
43 to –15°C
15 to –15°C
(°C)
– 26 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-3. Operation Characteristic Curve
• Operation characteristic curve <Super Digital Inverter>
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, RAV-SP1104ATZG-E
RAV-SP1404AT-E, RAV-SP1404ATZ-E, RAV-SP1404ATZG-E
<Cooling>
<Heating>
22
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
SP110
SP140
SP140
SP110
6
6
• Conditions
• Conditions
4
4
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C
Outdoor : DB35˚C
Air flow : High
Indoor : DB20˚C
Outdoor : DB7˚C/WB6˚C
Air flow : High
2
2
Pipe length : 7.5m
230V
Pipe length : 7.5m
230V
0
0
0
0
20
40
60
80
20
40
60
80
Compressor speed (rps)
Compressor speed (rps)
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E
<Cooling>
<Heating>
14
16
14
12
10
8
12
10
8
SP45
SP45
SP40
6
6
SP40
4
4
• Conditions
• Conditions
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C
Outdoor : DB35˚C
Air flow : High
Pipe length : 7.5m
230V
Indoor : DB20˚C
Outdoor : DB7˚C/WB6˚C
2
2
Air flow : High
Pipe length : 7.5m
230V
0
0
0
0
20
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
20
40
60
80 90 100
120
Compressor speed (rps)
Compressor speed (rps)
– 27 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Capacity variation ratio according to temperature
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, RAV-SP1104ATZG-E
RAV-SP1404AT-E, RAV-SP1404ATZ-E, RAV-SP1404ATZG-E
<Cooling>
<Heating>
105
100
95
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
• Conditions
• Conditions
Indoor : DB20˚C
Indoor air flow : High
Pipe length : 7.5m
Indoor : DB27˚C/WB19˚C
Indoor air flow : High
Pipe length : 7.5m
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
-20 -18 -16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2
0
2
4
6
8 10
Outdoor temp. (˚C)
Outdoor temp. (˚C)
– 28 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. CONSTRUCTION VIEWS (EXTERNAL VIEWS)
2-1. Indoor Unit
RAV-SM564UT-E
1000 or more
860 to 910 Ceiling open dimension
An obstacle
1000 or more
The space that is necessary
for equipping and service
300
Take-in port of wiring
Bottom face of ceiling
30
Indoor unit
Bottom face of ceiling
Refrigerant pipe connecting port
Ø6.4 (Liquid side)
Drain upstanding size
Drain pipe
Refrigerant pipe connecting port
Ø12.7 (Gas side)
connecting port
(Meterial : PP)
397.5
263
106.5 72 241.5
105
337.5
157
Bottom face of ceiling
129
For branch duct knockout square hole Ø150
Hanging bolt M10 or Ø3/8(procured by locally)
256
Electric parts box
77 10 5 74
950 Panel external dimension
780 Hanging bolt pitch
323
132
Ø162
74
129
77
For branch duct
knockout square
hole Ø150
105
45˚
Ceiling panel
(sold separately)
105
Bottom face
of ceiling
269
Ø162
29
64
57
For branch duct knockout
square hole Ø150
(2 positions)
840 Unit external dimension
32
61
28.5
362.5
105
372.5
Knockout for simple
0A for Ø100
For branch duct knockout
square hole Ø150
Bottom face of ceiling
155
187
Z view
Indoor unit
Bottom face of ceiling
Bottom face of ceiling
5
Unit : mm
– 29 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RAV-SM804UT-E
1000 or more
860 to 910 Ceiling open dimension
An obstacle
1000 or more
The space that is necessary
for equipping and service
300
Take-in port of wiring
Bottom face of ceiling
30
Indoor unit
Bottom face of ceiling
Drain upstanding size
Refrigerant pipe connecting port
Ø9.5 (Liquid side)
Drain pipe
connecting port
(Meterial : PP)
397.5
263
106.5 72 241.5
105
337.5
Refrigerant pipe connecting port
Ø15.9 (Gas side)
157
For branch duct knockout square hole Ø150
Bottom face of ceiling
129
Electric parts box
Hanging bolt M10 or Ø3/8 (procured by locally)
77 10 5 74
950 Panel external dimension
780 Hanging bolt pitch
323
256
132
Ø162
74
129
For branch duct
knockout square
105
77
hole Ø150
45
Ceiling panel
(sold separately)
˚
105
Bottom face
of ceiling
269
Ø162
29
64
Z
57
For branch duct knockout
square hole Ø150
(2 positions)
840 Unit external dimension
32
61
28.5
362.5
105
372.5
For branch duct knockout
square hole Ø150
Knockout for simple 0A for Ø100
155
187
Bottom face of ceiling
Z view
Bottom face of ceiling
5
Indoor unit
Bottom face of ceiling
Unit : mm
– 30 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
RAV-SM1104UT-E, RAV-SM1404UT-E, RAV-SM1604UT-E
1000 or more
860 to 910 Ceiling open dimension
An obstacle
1000 or more
The space that is necessary
for equipping and service
300
Take-in port of wiring
30
Bottom face of ceiling
Indoor unit
Bottom face of ceiling
Refrigerant pipe connecting port
Drain pipe
Drain upstanding size
Ø9.5 (Liquid side)
connecting port
(Meterial : PP)
Refrigerant pipe connecting port
Ø15.9 (Gas side)
397.5
263
106.5 72 241.5
105
337.5
157
For branch duct knockout square hole Ø150
Hanging bolt M10 or Ø3/8 (procured by locally)
319
Bottom face of ceiling
129
Electric parts box
77 10 5 137
950 Panel external dimension
780 Hanging bolt pitch
323
132
Ø162
137
129
77
For branch duct
knockout square
hole Ø150
105
45
Ceiling panel
(sold separately)
˚
105
Bottom face
of ceiling
269
29
Ø162
64
Z
57
840 Unit external dimension
32
For branch duct
362.5
105
372.5
61
28.5
knockout square hole Ø150
(2 positions)
For branch duct knockout
square hole Ø150
Knockout for simple 0A for Ø100
155
187
Bottom face of ceiling
Bottom face of ceiling
Z view
5
Indoor unit
Bottom face of ceiling
Unit : mm
– 31 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E, RAV-SM564SDT-E
845
21
803 (inside)
21
Refrigerant piping
103
Air filter
31
805
910
59
80
33
163
Fresh air inlet
(knock-out hole)
Drain-up port
Hung-up plate
– 32 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
380
200
60
Drain hole (Ø25)
Air inlet
port
B legs
Name
Note
Mounting bolt hole
(Ø12 × 17 long hole)
Air inlet port
Refrigerant piping hole
Indoor/Outdoor unit
connecting wire inlet hole
——
1
2
12
75
Power supply inlet hole
Ø38 Kockout hole
Air outlet
port
A legs
Mounting bolt hole
(Ø12 × 17 U-shape hole)
383
70
39
96
Details of A legs Details of B legs
320
150
600
Drain hole (Ø28 × 88)
900
52
550
Refrigerant pipe
connecting port
(Ø9.5 flare at liquid side)
Refrigerant pipe
connecting port
(Ø15.9 flare at gas side)
30
2
1
2
1
1
60
68
178
327
178
518
178
80 18
135
18
80
151
12 64
83
7
400
Z
Unit : mm
Knockout for downward piping
Z views
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RAVSP404AT(Z)(ZG)-E, RAV-SP454AT(Z)(ZG)-E
Drain hole
(2-Ø20 × 88 long hole)
Drain hole (Ø25)
600
90
54
2-Ø11-14 U-shape hole
(For Ø8-Ø10 anchor bolts)
A legs
108 125
Connecting pipe port
(Gas flare side: Ø12.7)
Connecting pipe port
(Liquid flare side: Ø6.4)
30
8-Ø6 hole
(For fixing outdoor unit)
B legs
2-Ø11 × L14 long hole
(For Ø8-Ø10 anchor bolts)
483
108
257
157
79
69.5
147
145
143
25
22
31
32
500
71
342
780
Earth
terminal
Charge port
Discharge guard
Discharge guide mounting hole
(4-Ø4.5 embossing)
Space required for service
600
2-Ø11 × 14 U-shape holes
(For Ø8–Ø10 anchor bolt)
Suction port
300
or more
150
or more
Discharge
port
(Minimum
distance up to wall)
500
or more
Discharge
port
2-Ø11 × 14 long hole
(For Ø8–Ø10 anchor bolt)
600
Ø11 × 14 U-shape holes
54
38
2-Ø6 hole
Product
external
line
R15
2-Ø6 hole
R15
600
38
54
Product
external line
Ø11 × 14 U-shape hole
Details of A legs
Details of B legs
– 34 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RAV-TWP30E2, RAV-TWP50E2 (SimultaneousTwin)
Inner diameter Ø C
Inner
diameter Ø D
Inner
diameter Ø D
A
Model (RBC-)
Liquid side
A
B
C
D
36
43
34
44
14
23
14
21
Ø9.5
Ø6.4
TWP30E2
Gas side
Liquid side
Gas side
Ø15.9 Ø12.7
Ø9.5 Ø9.5
Ø15.9 Ø15.9
TWP50E2
– 35 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
3. SYSTEMATIC REFRIGERATING CYCLE DIAGRAM
3-1. Indoor Unit
• Single type (Combination of 1 indoor unit and 1 outdoor unit)
(Indoor unit)
Distributor
(Strainer incorporated)
TCJ sensor
Strainer
Air heat
exchanger
TC sensor
Heating
Cooling
Refrigerant pipe
at liquid side
(Outer dia : ØB)
Refrigerant pipe
at gas side
(Outer dia : ØA)
Capillary tube specifications
To outdoor unit
To outdoor unit
Model
RAV-SM∗∗∗UT
Inner dia. × Length × Q’ty
Ø2 × 250 × 2, Ø2 × 350 × 1
Ø2 × 700 × 1
SM56 type
SM80 type
Ø2 × 250 × 3, Ø2 × 500 × 1
Dimension table
SM110, 140 , 160
type
Ø2 × 200 × 1, Ø2 × 300 × 2
Ø2 × 350 × 2, Ø2 × 700 × 1
Outer diameter of refrigerant pipe
Indoor unit
Gas side ØA
Liquid side ØB
Model
RAV-SM∗∗∗SDT
Inner dia. × Length × Q’ty
SM80, 110, 140, 160
type
15.9
9.5
SM40, 45, 56 type
Ø2 × 200 × 2, Ø2 × 350 × 1
• Twin type (Combination of 2 indoor units and 1 outdoor unit)
Heating
Cooling
(Indoor unit A)
(Indoor unit B)
Distributor
Distributor
(Strainer incorporated)
(Strainer incorporated)
TCJ sensor
TCJ sensor
Strainer
Strainer
Air heat
exchanger
Air heat
exchanger
TC sensor
TC sensor
Refrigerant pipe
at liquid side
(Outer dia : ØA)
Refrigerant pipe
at gas side
(Outer dia : ØB)
Refrigerant pipe
at liquid side
(Outer dia : ØA)
Refrigerant pipe
at gas side
(Outer dia : ØB)
Branch pipe
Branch pipe
Refrigerant pipe
at liquid side
(Outer dia : ØD)
Refrigerant pipe
at liquid side
(Outer dia : ØC)
To outdoor unit
To outdoor unit
Indoor unit
SM56 × 2
SM80 × 2
Branch pipe RBC-
TWP30E2
A
B
C
D
6.4
9.5
12.7
15.9
9.5
9.5
15.9
15.9
TWP50E2
– 36 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2. Outdoor Unit
RAV-SP1104AT-E, SP1104ATZ-E, SP1104ATZG-E, RAV-SP1404AT-E, SP1404ATZ-E, SP1404ATZG-E
TO sensor
TS sensor
PMV
TL sensor
Strainer
TE sensor
Check joint
Capillary
Ø4 ×Ø3 (6 pcs.)
Cooling: High pressure
Heating: Low pressure
Heat exchanger
Ø8, 2 rows, 52 stages
FP1.45, flat fin
Distributor
Refrigerant pipe
at liquid side Ø9.5
Packed valve
TD sensor
In cooling operation
In heating operation
Refrigerant pipe
at gas side Ø15.9
Ball valve
Strainer
Muffler
Cooling: Low pressure
Heating: High pressure
Ø25 × L180
Ø25 × L210
Accumulator Rotary compressor
(2500cc) (DA422A3F-25M)
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, RAV-SP1104ATZG-E
Pressure
(MPa) (kg/cm²g)
Pd Ps Pd Ps
Pipe surface temperature (°C)
Indoor/Outdoor
temp. conditions
(DB/WB) (°C)
Compressor
drive revolution Indoor
frequency
(rps)
Indoor heat
exchanger
Outdoor heat
exchanger
Discharge
Suction
fan
(TD)
66
(TS)
14
9
(TC)
12
13
5
(TL) (TE)
Indoor Outdoor
Standard
Cooling Overload
Low load
2.57 0.99 26.2 10.1
3.30 1.09 33.7 11.1
44
49
32
2
38
43
25
3
38
53
21
43
26
71
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
27/19
32/24
18/15.5
20/–
35/–
43/–
–5/–
7/6
78
1.74 0.75 17.8
2.32 0.73 23.7
7.7
7.4
46
7
Standard
65
3
39
54
38
Heating Overload
Low load
3.22 1.17 32.9 11.9
2.17 0.30 22.1 3.1
73
19
–15
14
–14
15
–13
30/–
24/18
–15/–
87
15/–
This compressor has 4-pole motor. The value when compressor frequency (Hz) is measured by a clamp
meter becomes 2 times of No. of compressor revolutions (rps).
*
RAV-SP1404AT-E, RAV-SP1404ATZ-E, RAV-SP1404ATZG-E
Pressure
(MPa) (kg/cm²g)
Pipe surface temperature (°C)
Indoor/Outdoor
temp. conditions
(DB/WB) (°C)
Compressor
drive revolution Indoor
frequency
Indoor heat
exchanger
Outdoor heat
exchanger
Discharge
Suction
fan
(rps)
Pd
Ps
Pd
Ps
(TD)
73
(TS)
12
9
(TC)
10
13
6
(TL) (TE)
Indoor Outdoor
Standard
Cooling Overload
Low load
2.72 0.90 27.8
9.2
46
51
33
2
38
45
25
2
51
55
21
53
26
90
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
27/19
32/24
18/15.5
20/–
35/–
43/–
–5/–
7/6
3.34 1.07 34.1 10.9
80
1.75 0.76 17.9
2.59 0.69 26.4
7.8
7.0
47
8
Standard
75
3
43
53
42
Heating Overload
Low load
3.13 1.05 31.9 10.7
2.40 0.21 24.5 2.1
72
16
–22
12
–19
13
–18
30/–
24/18
–15/–
97
15/–
This compressor has 4-pole motor. The value when compressor frequency (Hz) is measured by a clamp
meter becomes two times of No. of compressor revolutions (rps).
*
– 37 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E
Packed valve
Packed valve
Outer dia. ØA
Outer dia. ØB
PMV
(Pulse Motor Valve)
(CAM-B30YGTF-2)
TS sensor
TO sensor
2-step muffler
Ø19.05 × 200L
TD sensor
Strainer
4-way valve
(STF-0108Z)
TE
sensor
Heat exchanger
Ø8 ripple, 2 rows,
14 steps
Muffler
Ø19 × L160
Distributor
FP1.3 flat fin
Rotary compressor
(DA150A1F-20F)
R410A 1.0 kg
Cooling
Heating
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E
Pressure
(MPa) (kg/cm²g)
Pipe surface temperature (°C)
Indoor/Outdoor
temp. conditions
(DB/WB) (°C)
Compressor
Indoor heat Outdoor heat drive revolution Indoor
Discharge
Suction
exchanger
exchanger
frequency
fan
(rps)
Pd
Ps
Pd
Ps
(TD)
61
(TS)
12
14
4
(TC)
11
15
2
(TE)
43
50
8
Indoor Outdoor
Standard
Cooling Overload
Low load
2.68 0.94 27.3
9.6
47
50
44
49
49
90
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
27/19
32/24
18/15.5
20/–
35/–
43/–
–5/–
7/6
3.23 1.16 32.9 11.8
77
1.34 0.70 13.7
2.38 0.70 24.3
7.1
7.1
36
Standard
65
7
39
54
32
4
Heating Overload
Low load
3.39 1.03 34.6 10.5
1.95 0.26 19.9 2.7
83
20
–17
16
–19
30/–
24/18
–15/–
90
15/–
This compressor has 4-pole motor. The value when compressor frequency (Hz) is measured by a clamp
meter becomes 2 times of No. of compressor revolutions (rps).
*
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E
Pressure
(MPa) (kg/cm²g)
Pipe surface temperature (°C)
Indoor/Outdoor
temp. conditions
(DB/WB) (°C)
Compressor
Indoor heat Outdoor heat drive revolution Indoor
Discharge
Suction
exchanger
exchanger
frequency
fan
(rps)
Pd
Ps
Pd
Ps
(TD)
68
(TS)
11
14
4
(TC)
10
15
2
(TE)
41
51
8
Indoor Outdoor
Standard
Cooling Overload
Low load
2.81 0.89 28.7
9.1
53
53
44
56
49
98
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
27/19
32/24
18/15.5
20/–
35/–
43/–
–5/–
7/6
3.24 1.16 33.0 11.8
78
1.34 0.70 13.7
2.53 0.68 25.8
7.1
6.9
36
Standard
70
7
41
54
33
4
Heating Overload
Low load
3.39 1.03 34.6 10.5
2.00 0.25 20.4 2.6
83
20
–17
16
–19
30/–
24/18
–15/–
92
15/–
This compressor has 4-pole motor. The value when compressor frequency (Hz) is measured by a clamp
meter becomes two times of No. of compressor revolutions (rps).
*
– 38 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. FAN CHARACTERISTICS
4-1. Slim Duct (Filter Attached)
RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E
Standard air volume : 690m³/h
60
50
40
30
20
High (50Pa)
Upper limit of external
static pressure(50Pa)
High
(35Pa)
Lower limit of
external static
Upper limit of
external static
pressure(35Pa)
pressure (50Pa)
Lower limit of
external static
pressure (35Pa)
Low (50Pa)
Upper limit of
external static
pressure
(20Pa)
High
(20Pa)
Low (35Pa)
Low (20Pa)
Lower limit of
external static
pressure (20Pa)
Upper limit of
external static
pressure(10Pa)
High
(10Pa)
10
0
Low (10Pa)
Standard filte
pressure loss
400
500
600
700
800
Air volume (m³/h)
RAV-SM564SDT-E
Standard air volume : 780m³/h
60
50
40
30
20
High (50Pa)
Upper limit of external
static pressure(50Pa)
Lower limit of
external static
pressure (50Pa)
High
(35Pa)
Upper limit of
external static
pressure(35Pa)
Lower limit of
external static
pressure (35Pa)
Low (50Pa)
High
(20Pa)
Upper limit of
external static
pressure
(20Pa)
Low (35Pa)
Lower limit of
external static
pressure (20Pa)
Upper limit of
external static
pressure(10Pa)
High
(10Pa)
10
0
Low (20Pa)
Low (10Pa)
Standard filte
pressure loss
400
500
600
700
800
900
Air volume (m³/h)
– 39 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
5. WIRING DIAGRAM
5-1. Indoor Unit
5-1-1. 4-Way Air Discharge CassetteType
RAV-SM564UT-E, RAV-SM804UT-E, RAV-SM1104UT-E, RAV-SM1404UT-E, RAV-SM1604UT-E
LM1
LM3
LM2
LM4
1
1
2
3
4
5
5
1
1
2
3
4
5
5
1
1
2
3
4
5
5
1
1
2
3
4
5
5
FM
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
DM
FS
CN333
(WHI)
1
1
3
3
5
5
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
CN510
(WHI)
CN504 CN34
(WHI) (RED)
Motor drive
circuit
1
2
1
2
CN104
(YEL)
TA
TCJ
TC
3
2
1
3
2
1
CN334
(WHI)
1
2
1
2
CN102
(RED)
1
2
1
2
CN101
(BLK)
Fuse, F01
T6.3A, 250V~
Fuse, F02
T3.15A, 250V~
+
~
~
RED
WHI
BLK
1
2
3
4
DC20V
DC15V
DC12V
DC7V
1
3
5
1
3
5
CN519
(WHI)
Power
supply
circuit
–
CN67
(BLK)
1
2
CN508
(RED)
Control P.C. Board
for Indoor Unit
MCC-1570
1
2
3
CN80
P01
BLK
(GRN)
1
2
CN73
(RED)
(EXCT)
1
2
CN66
(WHI)
1
2
CN70
(WHI)
CN41
(BLU)
CN309
(YEL)
CN61 CN32
(YEL) (WHI)
CN60
(WHI)
CN50
(WHI)
CN20
(BLU)
1
1
2
3
3
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
1
2
3
4
5
2
(T10)
(Fan drive)
Indoor unit
earth screw
CN51
(RED)
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
BLK
BLK
1 2 3
1 2 3
A B
P.C. board
MCC-1440
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
A
B
Terminal
CN001
(WHI)
U3 U4
for central
Serial
signal
remote controller
Wired
Adapter for
Connection interface
(Option)
remote controller wireless remote controller
L N
Signal phase
220–240V~, 50Hz
Color
Identification
Symbol
FM
Parts name
Outdoor unit
Fan Motor
BLK : BLACK
BLU : BLUE
RED : RED
GRN : GREEN
WHI : WHITE
TA
Indoor temp. sensor
Temp. sensor
TC, TCJ
LM1, LM2, LM3, LM4
Louver motor
Outdoor unit
earth screw
DM
FS
Drain pump Motor
Float Switch
YEL : YELLOW
– 40 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1-2. Slim DuctType
RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E, RAV-SM564SDT-E
FM
DM
FS
CN333
(WHI)
1
1
3
3
5
5
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
CN510
(WHI)
CN504 CN34
(WHI) (RED)
Motor drive
circuit
1
2
1
2
CN104
(YEL)
TA
TCJ
TC
3
2
1
3
2
1
CN334
(WHI)
1
2
1
2
CN102
(RED)
1
2
1
2
CN101
(BLK)
Fuse, F01
T6.3A, 250V~
Fuse, F02
T3.15A, 250V~
+
~
~
RED
WHI
BLK
1
2
3
4
DC20V
CN519
1
3
5
1
3
5
Power
supply
circuit
DC15V
(WHI)
DC12V
DC7V
–
CN67
(BLK)
1
2
CN508
(RED)
Control P.C. Board
for Indoor Unit
MCC-1570
1
2
3
CN80
P01
BLK
(GRN)
1
2
CN73
(RED)
(EXCT)
1
2
CN66
(WHI)
1
2
CN70
(WHI)
CN41
(BLU)
CN309
(YEL)
CN61 CN32
(YEL) (WHI)
CN60
(WHI)
CN50
(WHI)
CN20
(BLU)
1
1
2
3
3
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
1
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
1
2
3
4
5
2
(T10)
(Fan drive)
Indoor unit
earth screw
CN51
(RED)
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
BLK
BLK
1 2 3
1 2 3
A B
P.C. board
MCC-1440
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
A
B
Terminal
CN001
(WHI)
U3 U4
for central
Serial
signal
remote controller
Wired
Adapter for
Connection interface
(Option)
remote controller wireless remote controller
L N
Signal phase
220–240V~, 50Hz
Color
Identification
Outdoor unit
Symbol
FM
Parts name
BLK : BLACK
BLU : BLUE
RED : RED
GRN : GREEN
WHI : WHITE
Fan Motor
TA
Indoor temp. sensor
Temp. sensor
TC, TCJ
DM
Outdoor unit
earth screw
Drain pump Motor
Float Switch
YEL : YELLOW
FS
– 41 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2. Outdoor Unit
RAV-SP1104AT-E, SP1104ATZ-E, 1104ATZG-E
RAV-SP1404AT-E, SP1404ATZ-E, 1404ATZG-E
CM
Reactor
Reactor
(RED) (WHI) (BLK)
(GRY)
(GRY) (WHI)
(WHI)
U
V
W
P04 P05
P06 P07
CN200 CN201 CN202
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN400
(WHI)
FM01
FM02
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN300
(WHI)
49C
SW804 SW801 SW800
1
2
1
2
CN609
(BLU)
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN610
(YEL)
Control P.C. Board
MCC-1570
SW803
1
2
1
2
CN604
(WHI)
TL
L/F
1
3
1
2
3
CN603
(WHI)
TD
Fuse, F01
T25A, 250V~
1
2
1
2
CN602
(YEL)
(BLK)
TO
TE
P09
SW802
Fuse, F03
T10A, 250V~
1
2
1
2
CN601
(WHI)
RY704
1
3
1
2
3
CN600
(WHI)
TS
CN704
(BLU)
CN701
(WHI)
CN04
(WHI)
P01
P02
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
6
6
1
3
1
1
4
4
1
1
3
3
5
5
7
7
CN710
(WHI)
(RED)
(WHI)
PMW
20SF
Earth
screw
Earth
screw
Symbol
CM
Parts name
Compressor
1 2 3
1 2 3
L
N
FM01, 02
PMV
TD
TS
TE
TL
TO
20SF
49C
RY
Fan Motor
Pulse Motor Valve
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Discharge pipe temp. sensor
Suction pipe temp. sensor
Heat exchanger temp. sensor 1
Heat exchanger temp. sensor 2
Outside temp. sensor
4-way valve coil
Power supply
220–240V~, 50Hz
Earth
screw
Color
Identification
Compressor case thermostat
Relay
L/F
Line Filter
BLK
BLU
RED : RED
GRY : GRAY
WHI
YEL
: BLACK
: BLUE
1.
indicates the terminal block.
Alphanumeric characters in the cycle indicate the terminal No.
2. The two-dot chain line indicates the wiring procured locally.
3. indicates the P.C. board.
: WHITE
: YELLOW
4. For the indoor unit circuit, refer to the wiring diagram of the indoor unit.
– 42 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
49C
ORN
ORN
2 2
1 1
CN500
CN300
Compressor
RED
WHI
BLK
P04
P05
P06
BLK
WHI
RED
1 1
2 2
3 3
3 3
2 2
1 1
Q200~205
IGBT
Q300~305
MOS-FET
CM
FM
P.C. Board
(MCC-5009)
R221
R321
Fan motor
P25
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
YEL
R220
R219
R320
R319
P24
P23
PMV
YEL
BRN
YEL
CN700
P22
P21
Pulse motor valve
F03
CAUTION : HIGH VOLTAGE
P20
P35
Varistor
L03
C13
Fuse
L01
3 3
2
T3.15A
AC250V
The high voltage circuit is
incorporated.
P34
DB01
CN603 1 1
Be careful to do the check service,
as the electric shock may be
caused in case of touching
parts on the
TS
(Suction pipe
temp. sensor)
Surge
absorber
2 2
C12 C14
CN602 1 1
P.C. board by hand
Power
relay
TO
(Outdoor
temp. sensor)
Varistor
P19
3 3
2
CN601 1 1
DB02
The 4-way valve coil is turned on
while the cooling operation
CT
ORN
F01
Fuse
T25A
AC250V
P18
P11
TD
Relay
(Discharge pipe
temp. sensor)
2 2
1 1
2 2
CN600 1 1
P08
Reactor
TE
Q404
P02
WHI CN806
P03 P10
ORN BLK
(Condenser pipe
temp. sensor)
P33
P32
CN701
P30
P7
1 2 3
1 2 3
1
1
3
3
1 2 3 4 5
For optional P.C. Board
CN605
BLK
P31
BLK
2 1
2 1
PUR
Coil for
4-WAY
VALVE
Reactor
1 2 3
1 2 3
NOTE
CM : Compressor
PMV : Pulse Motor Valve
FM : Fan Motor
SW802
GRN/YEL
Fuse 250V~
T6.3A
Reactor
MCC-1530
RED
TE : Heat Exchanger Temp. Sensor
TD : Discharge Temp. Sensor
TO : Outdoor Temp. Sensor
TS : Suction Temp. Sensor
IGBT : Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
DB : Rectifier
Sub P.C. Board
1 2 3 L N
Color Identification
BLK : BLACK
BLU : BLUE
RED : RED
GRY : GRAY
PNK : PINK
WHI : WHITE
BRN : BROWN
ORN : ORANGE
YEL : YELLOW
PUR : PURPLE
CT : Curreut Transformer
49C : Compressor Case Thermostat
To indoor
Power supply
220-240V~ 50Hz
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
6. SPECIFICATIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS
6-1. Indoor Unit
RAV-SM564UT-E, RAV-SM804UT-E
No.
1
Parts name
Fan motor (for indoor)
Type
Specifications
SWF-230-60-2R
328 mm
Output (Rated) 60 W
2
Thermo. sensor (TA-sensor)
Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ-sensor)
Heat exchanger sensor (TC-sensor)
Float switch
10 kΩ at 25°C
10 kΩ at 25°C
10 kΩ at 25°C
3
Ø6 mm, 1000 mm
Ø6 mm, 950 mm
FS-0218-102
MDP-1401
4
5
—
6
Drain pump motor
—
RAV-SM1104UT-E, RAV-SM1404UT-E, RAV-SM1604UT-E
No.
1
Parts name
Type
Specifications
Output (Rated) 90 W
10 kΩ at 25°C
10 kΩ at 25°C
10 kΩ at 25°C
—
Fan motor
ICF-280-150-1
328 mm
2
Thermo. sensor (TA-sensor)
Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ-sensor)
Heat exchanger sensor (TC-sensor)
Float switch
3
Ø6 mm, 1000 mm
Ø6 mm, 950 mm
FS-0218-102
MDP-1401
4
5
6
Drain pump motor
—
RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E, RAV-SM564SDT-E
No.
1
Parts name
Fan motor
Type
SWF-280-60-3
Specifications
—
—
2
Drain pump motor
Float switch
TA sensor
MDP-1401
3
FS-0218-102
—
4
Lead wire length : 328mm
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Black)
Ø6 size lead wire length : 1200mm Vinyl tube (Red)
10 kΩ at 25°C
10 kΩ at 25°C
10 kΩ at 25°C
5
TC sensor
6
TCJ sensor
– 44 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
6-2. Outdoor Unit (Parts Ratings)
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, RAV-SP1104ATZG-E
RAV-SP1404AT-E, RAV-SP1404ATZ-E, RAV-SP1404ATZG-E
No.
1
Parts name
Type
Specifications
Compressor
DA422A3F-25M
—
2
Outdoor fan motor
ICF-280-A100-1
Output 100W
3
Reactor
CH-62
5.7mH, 18.5A
AC240V
4
4-way valve coil
VHV-01AP552B1
5
PMV coil
UKV-A038
DC12V
6
P.C. board
MCC-1571
AC220 – 240V
AC250V, 25A
AC250V, 10A
AC250V, 3.15A
10 kΩ at 25°C
10 kΩ at 25°C
50 kΩ at 25°C
10 kΩ at 25°C
OFF: 125 ± 4°C, ON: 90 ± 5°C
7
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board)
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board)
Fuse (Mounted on P.C. board)
Outdoor temp. sensor (TO sensor)
Heat exchanger sensor (Te sensor)
Discharge temp. sensor (Td sensor)
Heat exchanger mid. Temp sensor (TL sensor)
Compressor thermo. (Protection)
—
—
8
9
—
10
11
12
13
14
—
—
—
—
US-622
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E
No.
1
Parts name
Type
Specifications
Output (Rated) 43W
3 phase, 4P, 1100W
10mH, 16A
Fan motor
Compressor
Reactor
ICF-140-43-4R
2
DA150A1F-20F
3
CH-57
4
Outdoor temp. sensor (To sensor)
Heat exchanger sensor (Te sensor)
Suction temp. sensor (Ts sensor)
Discharge temp. sensor (Td sensor)
Fuse (Switching power (Protect))
Fuse (Inverter, input (Current protect))
4-way valve solenoid coil
—
10 kΩ at 25°C
10 kΩ at 25°C
10 kΩ at 25°C
50 kΩ at 25°C
T3.15A, AC 250V
AC240V
5
—
6
—
7
—
—
8
9
—
10
11
12
STF-01AJ502E1
US-622
—
Compressor thermo. (Protection)
Coil (Pulse Motor Valve)
OFF: 125 ± 4°C, ON: 90 ± 5°C
—
CAM-MD12TF-6
6-3. Accessory Separate Sold Parts
RBC-U31PG (W,WS)-E (Ceiling panel), RBC-U31PGS (W,WS)-E (Ceiling panel)
RAV-SM564UT-E, RAV-SM804UT-E, RAV-SM1104UT-E, RAV-SM1404UT-E, RAV-SM1604UT-E
No.
1
Parts name
Type
Specifications
Motor-louver
MP24ZN3N
DC 12 V
2
– 45 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. REFRIGERANT R410A
This air conditioner adopts the new refrigerant HFC
(R410A) which does not damage the ozone layer.
6. When an air conditioning system charged with a
large volume of refrigerant is installed in a small
room, it is necessary to exercise care so that,
even when refrigerant leaks, its concentration
does not exceed the marginal level.
The working pressure of the new refrigerant R410A
is 1.6 times higher than conventional refrigerant
(R22). The refrigerating oil is also changed in
accordance with change of refrigerant, so be careful
that water, dust, and existing refrigerant or
refrigerating oil are not entered in the refrigerant
cycle of the air conditioner using the new refrigerant
during installation work or servicing time.
If the refrigerant gas leakage occurs and its
concentration exceeds the marginal level, an
oxygen starvation accident may result.
7. Be sure to carry out installation or removal
according to the installation manual.
The next section describes the precautions for air
conditioner using the new refrigerant.
Improper installation may cause refrigeration
trouble, water leakage, electric shock, fire, etc.
Conforming to contents of the next section together
with the general cautions included in this manual,
perform the correct and safe work.
8. Unauthorized modifications to the air conditioner
may be dangerous. If a breakdown occurs
please call a qualified air conditioner technician
or electrician.
Improper repair may result in water leakage,
electric shock and fire, etc.
7-1. Safety During Installation/Servicing
As R410A’s pressure is about 1.6 times higher than
that of R22, improper installation/servicing may
cause a serious trouble. By using tools and
materials exclusive for R410A, it is necessary to
carry out installation/servicing safely while taking
the following precautions into consideration.
7-2. Refrigerant Piping Installation
7-2-1. Piping Materials and Joints Used
For the refrigerant piping installation, copper pipes
and joints are mainly used.
1. Never use refrigerant other than R410A in an air
conditioner which is designed to operate with
R410A.
Copper pipes and joints suitable for the refrigerant
must be chosen and installed.
Furthermore, it is necessary to use clean copper
pipes and joints whose interior surfaces are less
affected by contaminants.
If other refrigerant than R410A is mixed,
pressure in the refrigeration cycle becomes
abnormally high, and it may cause personal
injury, etc. by a rupture.
1. Copper Pipes
2. Confirm the used refrigerant name, and use
tools and materials exclusive for the refrigerant
R410A.
It is necessary to use seamless copper pipes
which are made of either copper or copper alloy
and it is desirable that the amount of residual oil
is less than 40 mg/10 m.
The refrigerant name R410A is indicated on the
visible place of the outdoor unit of the air
conditioner using R410A as refrigerant.
Do not use copper pipes having a collapsed,
deformed or discolored portion (especially on
the interior surface).
To prevent mischarging, the diameter of the
service port differs from that of R22.
Otherwise, the expansion valve or capillary tube
may become blocked with contaminants.
3. If a refrigeration gas leakage occurs during
installation/servicing, be sure to ventilate fully.
As an air conditioner using R410A incurs pres-
sure higher than when using R22, it is necessary
to choose adequate materials.
If the refrigerant gas comes into contact with fire,
a poisonous gas may occur.
Thicknesses of copper pipes used with R410A
are as shown in Table 7-2-1. Never use copper
pipes thinner than 0.8mm even when it is avail-
able on the market.
4. When installing or removing an air conditioner,
do not allow air or moisture to remain in the
refrigeration cycle.
Otherwise, pressure in the refrigeration cycle
may become abnormally high so that a rupture
or personal injury may be caused.
NOTE:
5. After completion of installation work, check to
make sure that there is no refrigeration gas
leakage.
Refer to the “7-6. Instructions for Re-use Piping
of R22 or R407C”.
If the refrigerant gas leaks into the room, coming
into contact with fire in the fan-driven heater,
space heater, etc., a poisonous gas may occur.
– 46 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 7-2-1 Thicknesses of annealed copper pipes
Thickness (mm)
Nominal diameter
Outer diameter (mm)
R410A
0.80
R22
0.80
0.80
0.80
1.00
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
6.4
9.5
0.80
12.7
15.9
0.80
1.00
1. Joints
For copper pipes, flare joints or socket joints are used. Prior to use, be sure to remove all contaminants.
a) Flare Joints
Flare joints used to connect the copper pipes cannot be used for pipings whose outer diameter exceeds
20 mm. In such a case, socket joints can be used.
Sizes of flare pipe ends, flare joint ends and flare nuts are as shown in Tables 7-2-3 to 7-2-5 below.
b) Socket Joints
Socket joints are such that they are brazed for connections, and used mainly for thick pipings whose
diameter is larger than 20 mm. Thicknesses of socket joints are as shown in Table 7-2-2.
Table 7-2-2 Minimum thicknesses of socket joints
Reference outer diameter of
copper pipe jointed (mm)
Minimum joint thickness
(mm)
Nominal diameter
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
6.4
9.5
0.50
0.60
0.70
0.80
12.7
15.9
7-2-2. Processing of Piping Materials
When performing the refrigerant piping installation, care should be taken to ensure that water or dust does not
enter the pipe interior, that no other oil other than lubricating oils used in the installed air conditioner is used,
and that refrigerant does not leak. When using lubricating oils in the piping processing, use such lubricating
oils whose water content has been removed. When stored, be sure to seal the container with an airtight cap or
any other cover.
1. Flare Processing Procedures and Precautions
a) Cutting the Pipe
By means of a pipe cutter, slowly cut the pipe so that it is not deformed.
b) Removing Burrs and Chips
If the flared section has chips or burrs, refrigerant leakage may occur.
Carefully remove all burrs and clean the cut surface before installation.
– 47 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
c) Insertion of Flare Nut
d) Flare Processing
Make certain that a clamp bar and copper pipe have been cleaned.
By means of the clamp bar, perform the flare processing correctly.
Use either a flare tool for R410A or conventional flare tool.
ØD
A
Flare processing dimensions differ according
to the type of flare tool.
When using a conventional flare tool, be sure
to secure “dimension A” by using a gauge for
size adjustment.
Fig. 7-2-1 Flare processing dimensions
Table 7-2-3 Dimensions related to flare processing for R410A / R22
A (mm)
Outer
diameter
(mm)
Nominal
diameter
Thickness
(mm)
Conventional flare tool
(R410A)
Conventional flare tool
(R22)
Flare tool for
R410A, R22
clutch type
Clutch type Wing nut type Clutch type Wing nut type
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
6.4
9.5
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
0 to 0.5
0 to 0.5
0 to 0.5
0 to 0.5
1.0 to 1.5
1.0 to 1.5
1.0 to 1.5
1.0 to 1.5
1.5 to 2.0
1.5 to 2.0
2.0 to 2.5
2.0 to 2.5
0.5 to 1.0
0.5 to 1.0
0.5 to 1.0
0.5 to 1.0
1.0 to 1.5
1.0 to 1.5
1.5 to 2.0
1.5 to 2.0
12.7
15.9
Table 7-2-4 Flare and flare nut dimensions for R410A
Dimension (mm)
Nominal
diameter
Outer diameter
Thickness
(mm)
Flare nut width
(mm)
(mm)
A
B
C
D
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
6.4
9.5
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
9.1
9.2
6.5
13
20
23
25
17
22
26
29
13.2
16.6
19.7
13.5
16.0
19.0
9.7
12.7
15.9
12.9
16.0
Table 7-2-5 Flare and flare nut dimensions for R22
Dimension (mm)
Nominal
diameter
Outer diameter
Thickness
(mm)
Flare nut width
(mm)
(mm)
A
B
C
D
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
6.4
9.5
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.0
9.1
9.2
6.5
13
20
20
23
34
17
22
24
27
36
13.0
16.2
19.4
23.3
13.5
16.0
19.0
24.0
9.7
12.7
15.9
19.0
12.9
16.0
19.2
– 48 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D
B
A
C
Fig. 7-2-2 Relations between flare nut and flare seal surface
2. Flare Connecting Procedures and Precautions
a) Make sure that the flare and union portions do not have any scar or dust, etc.
b) Correctly align the processed flare surface with the union axis.
c) Tighten the flare with designated torque by means of a torque wrench.
The tightening torque for R410A is the same as that for conventional R22.
Incidentally, when the torque is weak, the gas leakage may occur.
When it is strong, the flare nut may crack and may be made non-removable.
When choosing the tightening torque, comply with values designated by manufacturers.
Table 7-2-6 shows reference values.
NOTE:
When applying oil to the flare surface, be sure to use oil designated by the manufacturer.
If any other oil is used, the lubricating oils may deteriorate and cause the compressor to burn out.
Table 7-2-6 Tightening torque of flare for R410A [Reference values]
Tightening torque of torque
wrenches available on the market
N•m (kgf•m)
Nominal
diameter
Outer diameter
(mm)
Tightening torque
N•m (kgf•m)
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
6.4
9.5
14 to 18 (1.4 to 1.8)
33 to 42 (3.3 to 4.2)
50 to 62 (5.0 to 6.2)
63 to 77 (6.3 to 7.7)
16 (1.6), 18 (1.8)
42 (4.2)
12.7
15.9
55 (5.5)
65 (6.5)
– 49 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-3. Tools
7-3-1. RequiredTools
Refer to the “4.Tools” (Page 8)
7-4. Recharging of Refrigerant
When it is necessary to recharge refrigerant, charge the specified amount of new refrigerant according to the
following steps.
Recover the refrigerant, and check no refrigerant
remains in the equipment.
When the compound gauge’s pointer has indicated
–0.1 Mpa (–76 cmHg), place the handle Low in the
fully closed position, and turn off the vacuum pump’s
power switch.
Connect the charge hose to packed valve service
port at the outdoor unit’s gas side.
Keep the status as it is for 1 to 2 minutes, and ensure
that the compound gauge’s pointer does not return.
Connect the charge hose of the vacuum pump
adapter.
Set the refrigerant cylinder to the electronic balance,
connect the connecting hose to the cylinder and the
connecting port of the electronic balance, and charge
liquid refrigerant.
Open fully both packed valves at liquid and gas
sides.
Place the handle of the gauge manifold Low in the
fully opened position, and turn on the vacuum pump’s
power switch. Then, evacuating the refrigerant in the
cycle.
(For refrigerant charging, see the figure below.)
1) Never charge refrigerant exceeding the specified amount.
2) If the specified amount of refrigerant cannot be charged, charge refrigerant bit by bit in COOL mode.
3) Do not carry out additional charging.
When additional charging is carried out if refrigerant leaks, the refrigerant composition changes in the
refrigeration cycle, that is characteristics of the air conditioner changes, refrigerant exceeding the
specified amount is charged, and working pressure in the refrigeration cycle becomes abnormally high
pressure, and may cause a rupture or personal injury.
(INDOOR unit)
(Liquid side)
(OUTDOOR unit)
Opened
Closed
(Gas side)
Refrigerant cylinder
(With siphon pipe)
Check valve
Open/Close valve
for charging
Service port
Electronic balance for refrigerant charging
Fig. 7-4-1 Configuration of refrigerant charging
– 50 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1) Be sure to make setting so that liquid can be charged.
2) When using a cylinder equipped with a siphon, liquid can be charged without turning it upside down.
It is necessary for charging refrigerant under condition of liquid because R410A is mixed type of refrigerant.
Accordingly, when charging refrigerant from the refrigerant cylinder to the equipment, charge it turning the
cylinder upside down if cylinder is not equipped with siphon.
[ Cylinder with siphon ]
[ Cylinder without siphon ]
Gauge manifold
Gauge manifold
OUTDOOR unit
OUTDOOR unit
c y l i n d e r
a n t i g e r R e f r
Refrigerant
cylinder
Electronic
balance
Electronic
balance
Siphon
R410A refrigerant is HFC mixed refrigerant.
Therefore, if it is charged with gas, the
composition of the charged refrigerant changes
and the characteristics of the equipment varies.
Fig. 7-4-2
7-5. Brazing of Pipes
7-5-1. Materials for Brazing
1. Silver brazing filler
1) Phosphor bronze brazing filler tends to react
with sulfur and produce a fragile compound
water solution, which may cause a gas
leakage. Therefore, use any other type of
brazing filler at a hot spring resort, etc., and
coat the surface with a paint.
Silver brazing filler is an alloy mainly composed
of silver and copper.
It is used to join iron, copper or copper alloy, and
is relatively expensive though it excels in solder-
ability.
2) When performing brazing again at time of
servicing, use the same type of brazing filler.
2. Phosphor bronze brazing filler
7-5-2. Flux
Phosphor bronze brazing filler is generally used
to join copper or copper alloy.
1. Reason why flux is necessary
• By removing the oxide film and any foreign
matter on the metal surface, it assists the flow
of brazing filler.
3. Low temperature brazing filler
Low temperature brazing filler is generally called
solder, and is an alloy of tin and lead.
• In the brazing process, it prevents the metal
surface from being oxidized.
Since it is weak in adhesive strength, do not use
it for refrigerant pipes.
• By reducing the brazing filler's surface tension,
the brazing filler adheres better to the treated
metal.
– 51 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Characteristics required for flux
7-5-3. Brazing
• Activated temperature of flux coincides with
the brazing temperature.
As brazing work requires sophisticated techniques,
experiences based upon a theoretical knowledge, it
must be performed by a person qualified.
• Due to a wide effective temperature range, flux
is hard to carbonize.
In order to prevent the oxide film from occurring in
the pipe interior during brazing, it is effective to
proceed with brazing while letting dry Nitrogen gas
flow.
• It is easy to remove slag after brazing.
• The corrosive action to the treated metal and
brazing filler is minimum.
• It excels in coating performance and is
harmless to the human body.
Never use gas other than Nitrogen gas.
1. Brazing method to prevent oxidation
As the flux works in a complicated manner as
described above, it is necessary to select an
adequate type of flux according to the type and
shape of treated metal, type of brazing filler and
brazing method, etc.
1) Attach a reducing valve and a flow-meter to
the Nitrogen gas cylinder.
2) Use a copper pipe to direct the piping
material, and attach a flow-meter to the
cylinder.
3. Types of flux
• Noncorrosive flux
3) Apply a seal onto the clearance between the
piping material and inserted copper pipe for
Nitrogen in order to prevent backflow of the
Nitrogen gas.
Generally, it is a compound of borax and boric
acid.
It is effective in case where the brazing
temperature is higher than 800°C.
4) When the Nitrogen gas is flowing, be sure to
keep the piping end open.
• Activated flux
Most of fluxes generally used for silver brazing
are this type.
5) Adjust the flow rate of Nitrogen gas so that it
is lower than 0.05 m³/Hr or 0.02 MPa
It features an increased oxide film removing
capability due to the addition of compounds
such as potassium fluoride, potassium chloride
and sodium fluoride to the borax-boric acid
compound.
(0.2kgf/cm²) by means of the reducing valve.
6) After performing the steps above, keep the
Nitrogen gas flowing until the pipe cools down
to a certain extent (temperature at which
pipes are touchable with hands).
7) Remove the flux completely after brazing.
4. Piping materials for brazing and used
brazing filler/flux
Piping
material
Used brazing
filler
Used
flux
M
Flow meter
Copper - Copper Phosphor copper Do not use
Copper - Iron
Iron - Iron
Silver
Silver
Paste flux
Vapor flux
Stop valve
Nitrogen gas
cylinder
From Nitrogen cylinder
1) Do not enter flux into the refrigeration cycle.
2) When chlorine contained in the flux remains
within the pipe, the lubricating oil deteriorates.
Pipe
Nitrogen
gas
Therefore, use a flux which does not contain
chlorine.
Rubber plug
3) When adding water to the flux, use water
which does not contain chlorine
(e.g. distilled water or ion-exchange water).
4) Remove the flux after brazing.
Fig. 7-5-1 Prevention of oxidation during brazing
– 52 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-6. Instructions for Re-use Piping of R22 or R407C
6. Check the oil when the existing air conditioner was
Instruction of Works:
removed after refrigerant had been recovered.
In this case, if the oil is judged as clearly different
compared with normal oil
The existing R22 and R407C piping can be
reused for our digital inverter R410A products
installations.
• The refrigerator oil is copper rust green :
There is possibility that moisture is mixed with the
oil and rust generates inside of the pipe.
NOTE)
Confirmation of existence of scratch or dent of the
former pipes to be applied and also confirmation of
reliability of the pipe strength are conventionally
referred to the local site.
• There is discolored oil, a large quantity of the
remains, or bad smell.
• A large quantity of sparkle remained wear-out
powder is observed in the refrigerator oil.
If the definite conditions can be cleared,
it is possible to update the existing R22 and
R407C pipes to those for R410A models.
7. The air conditioner which compressor was ex-
changed due to a faulty compressor.
When the discolored oil, a large quantity of the
remains, mixture of foreign matter, or a large
quantity of sparkle remained wear-out powder is
observed, the cause of trouble will occur.
7-6-1. Basic Conditions Needed to Reuse the
Existing Pipe
Check and observe three conditions of the refrigerant
piping works.
8. Installation and removal of the air conditioner are
repeated with temporary installation by lease and
etc.
1. Dry
(There is no moisture inside of the pipes.)
2. Clean (There is no dust inside of the pipes.)
3. Tight (There is no refrigerant leak.)
9. In case that type of the refrigerator oil of the
existing air conditioner is other than the following oil
(Mineral oil), Suniso, Freol-S, MS (Synthetic oil),
alkyl benzene (HAB, Barrel-freeze), ester series,
PVE only of ether series.
7-6-2. Restricted Items to Use the Existing Pipes
In the following cases, the existing pipes cannot be
reused as they are. Clean the existing pipes or
exchange them with new pipes.
• Winding-insulation of the compressor may
become inferior.
1. When a scratch or dent is heavy, be sure to use the
new pipes for the works.
NOTE)
The above descriptions are results of confirmation by
our company and they are views on our air
conditioners, but they do not guarantee the use of the
existing pipes of the air conditioner that adopted
R410A in other companies.
2. When the thickness of the existing pipe is thinner
than the specified “Pipe diameter and thickness” be
sure to use the new pipes for the works.
• The operating pressure of R410A is high
(1.6 times of R22 and R407C). If there is a scratch
or dent on the pipe or thinner pipe is used, the
pressure strength is poor and may cause break-
age of the pipe at the worst.
7-6-3. Branching Pipe for Simultaneous
Operation System
• In the concurrent twin system, when TOSHIBA-
specified branching pipe is used, it can be reused.
Branching pipe model name:
RBC-TWP30E-2, RBC-TWP50E-2
On the existing air conditioner for simultaneous
operation system (twin system), there is a case of
using branch pipe that has insufficient compressive
strength.
∗ Pipe diameter and thickness (mm)
Pipe outer diameter Ø6.4 Ø9.5 Ø12.7 Ø15.9 Ø19.0
R410A
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.0
Thickness
R22
(R407C)
In this case please change it to the branch pipe for
R410A.
• In case that the pipe diameter is Ø12.7 mm or less
and the thickness is less than 0.7 mm, be sure to use
the new pipes for works.
7-6-4. Curing of Pipes
When removing and opening the indoor unit or outdoor
unit for a long time, cure the pipes as follows:
3. The pipes are left as coming out or gas leaks.
(Poor refrigerant)
• There is possibility that rain water or air including
moisture enters in the pipe.
• Otherwise rust may generate when moisture or
foreign matter due to dewing enters in the pipes.
4. Refrigerant recovery is impossible.
(Refrigerant recovery by the pump-down operation
on the existing air conditioner)
• The rust cannot be removed by cleaning, and a new
piping work is necessary.
• There is possibility that a large quantity of poor
oil or moisture remains inside of the pipe.
Place position
Outdoors
Term
Curing manner
1 month or more
Less than 1 month
Every time
Pinching
5. A dryer on the market is attached to the existing
pipes.
Pinching or taping
• There is possibility that copper green rust
generated.
Indoors
– 53 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
7-6-5. Final Installation Checks
Is there no scratch or dent on the existing pipes?
Existing pipe: NO * Use a new pipes.
NO
Is it possible to operate the existing air conditioner?
YES
∗ After the existing air conditioner operated in cooling mode
for approx. 30 minutes or longer*, recover the refrigerant.
∗ For cooling the pipes and recovering of oil
• Refrigerant recovery: Pump down method
Nitrogen gas pressure 0.5 Mpa
∗ Remove the existing air conditioner from the piping and
carry out flashing (nitrogen pressure 0.5 Mpa) to remove
the remains inside of the pipe.
Note] In case of twin, also be sure to flash the
branching pipe.
(If there is discharge of remains,
it is judged that there is a large quantity of remains.)
Was not largely discolored oil or
a large quantity of remains discharged?
(When the oil deteriorates, the color of the
oil changes to muddy and black color.)
NO
Clean the pipes or use the new pipes.
If you are in trouble of
pipe cleaning, please contact us.
YES
ꢀ Connect the indoor/outdoor units to the existing pipe.
• Use a flare nut attached to the main unit for the
indoor/outdoor units.
(Do not use the flare nut of the existing pipe.)
• Re-machine the flare machining size to size for R410A.
Piping necessary to change the flare nut/
machining size due to pipe compression.
ꢀ In case that the gas pipe Ø19 mm is used for the
outdoor unit of SM803 (3 HP) or higher:
(Gas pipe size of our R410A model 3 to 6 HP is Ø15.9 mm)
1) Flare nut width: H
(mm)
Ø12.7 Ø15.9 Ø19.0
→ Turn the existing pipe switch on the cycle control
Copper pipe
outer dia.
Ø6.4
Ø9.5
P.C board of the outdoor unit to ON side.
At shipment from factory OFF → ON for existing pipe
(Refer to the table below.) (Be sure to set the contents
in the table below in order to restrict the refrigerating
cycle pressure of the equipment in the pipe standard.)
17
22
26
24
29
27
36
For R410A
H
Same
For R22
Same as above
as above
Existing pipe SW
Switch
2) Flare machining size: A
(mm)
Copper pipe
outer dia.
Ø6.4
Ø9.5
13.2
13.0
Ø12.7 Ø15.9 Ø19.0
1.5, 1.7, 3 HP
4, 5 HP
Bit 3 of SW801 → ON
Bit 3 of SW802 → ON
Bit 5 of SW801 → ON
A
9.1
9.0
16.6
16.2
19.7
19.4
24.0
23.3
For R410A
For R22
6 HP
Becomes large a little for R410A
Do not apply the refrigerator oil to the flare surface.
∗ (Airtight test), Vacuum dry, Refrigerant charge,
Gas leak check
Trial run
– 54 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1404AT-E
7-6-6. Handling of Existing Pipe
• To use an existing Ø19.1 mm pipe, set bit 3 of
SW802 (switch for existing pipe) on the P.C. board
of the outdoor unit to ON.
When using the existing pipe, carefully check it for
the following:
• Wall thickness (within the specified range)
• Scratches and dents
In this case, the heating performance may be
reduced depending on the outside air temperature
and room temperature.
• Water, oil, dirt, or dust in the pipe
• Flare looseness and leakage from welds
• Deterioration of copper pipe and heat insulator
SW802
When shipped from factory When using existing pipe
Cautions for using existing pipe
• Do not reuse the flare to prevent gas leak.
Replace it with the supplied flare nut and then
process it to a flare.
• Blow nitrogen gas or use an appropriate means to
keep the inside of the pipe clean.
If discolored oil or much residue is discharged,
wash the pipe.
RAV-SM1603AT-E
• Check welds, if any, on the pipe for gas leak.
• To use an existing Ø19.1 mm pipe, set bit 5 of
SW801 (switch for existing pipe) on the P.C. board
of the outdoor unit to ON.
When the pipe corresponds to any of the following,
do not use it. Install a new pipe instead.
• The pipe has been open (disconnected from
indoor unit or outdoor unit) for a long period.
In this case, the heating performance may be
reduced depending on the outside air temperature
and room temperature.
• The pipe has been connected to an outdoor unit
that does not use refrigerant R22, R410A or
R407C.
SW801 No.5
• The existing pipe must have a wall thickness equal
to or larger than the following thickness.
ON
ON
Reference outside diameter
(mm)
Wall thickness
(mm)
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
Ø9.5
Ø15.9
Ø19.1
0.8
1.0
1.0
• Never use any pipe with a wall thickness less than
these thicknesses due to insufficient pressure
capacity.
– 55 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
7-6-7. Recovery Method of Refrigerant
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1404AT-E
RAV-SM1603AT-E
• Use the refrigerant recovery switch SW801 on the
P.C. board of the outdoor unit to recover refriger-
ant when the indoor unit or outdoor unit is moved.
• Use the refrigerant recovery switch SW802 on the
P.C. board of the outdoor unit to recover refriger-
ant when the indoor unit or outdoor unit is moved.
Procedure
Procedure
1. Turn on the power of the air conditioner.
1. Turn on the power of the air conditioner.
2. Select the FAN mode for indoor unit operation
with the remote controller.
2. Select the FAN mode for indoor unit operation
with the remote controller.
3. Set SW804 on the P.C. board of the outdoor unit
to all OFF, and then push SW801 for one second
or more.
3. Push the refrigerant recovery switch SW802 on
the P.C. board of the outdoor unit to drive the air
conditioner into the forced cooling mode for up to
10 minutes.
The air conditioner enters the forced cooling
mode for up to 10 minutes.
Open the valve to start refrigerant recovery.
Operation or handling the valve to recover
refrigerant during this time period.
4. Upon completion of refrigerant recovery, close
the valve and push SW802 for at least one
second to stop operation.
4. Upon completion of refrigerant recovery, close
the valve and push SW801 for at least one
second to stop operation.
5. Turn off the power.
5. Turn off the power.
Outdoor unit P.C. board
P.C. board
Refrigerant recovery
switch SW801
SW802 for
refrigerant recovery
Optional connector
CN610
SW801 for
existing pipes
Special operation
select switch SW804
Existing pipe switch
SW802
DANGER
Take care for an electric shock because the P.C.
board is electrified.
– 56 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-6-8. Recovery method of refrigerant for
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E
• When recovering refrigerant in case of reinstalla-
tion of the indoor or outdoor unit, etc., use the
refrigerant recovery switch on the terminal block
of the outdoor unit.
Refrigerant
recovery switch
ON
1
2
3
Procedure
1. Set FAN operation to the indoor unit.
2. Push the refrigerant recovery switch (SW802) of
the outdoor unit
Sub switch SW801
(Keep pushing it for approx. 2 seconds.).
The cooling operation starts.
(This operation continues for 10 minutes.)
1
2
3
L
N
3. After operation for 3 minutes or more, close the
valve at liquid side.
4. After finish of the refrigerant recovery, close the
valve at gas side.
SUB SW P.C. board
5. When keeping pushed the refrigerant recovery
SW again for approx. 2 seconds, the outdoor unit
stops.
SW802
Refrigerant recovery
SW
6. Stop the indoor unit and then turn off the power
supply.
ON
SW801
DANGER
Cooling-only
select
Existing
piping
Take care for an electric shock because the control
P.C. board is electrified.
Power save
– 57 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. INDOOR CONTROL CIRCUIT
8-1. Indoor Controller Block Diagram
8-1-1. Connection of Main (Sub) Remote Controller
Main (sub) master remote controller (Max. 2 units)
Weekly timer
Display LCD
Display LED
Function setup
Key switch
Display LCD
LCD driver
MCU
Function setup
Key switch
CN2
CN1
MCU
DC5V
DC5V
Remote controller
communication circuit
Power circuit
∗3
Power
circuit
Secondary
battery
Indoor unit
#1 (Master)
#2
(Follower)
A
#3
A
B
(Follower)
B
A
B
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1570)
DC20V
Remote controller
EEPROM
TA sensor
TC sensor
TCJ sensor
Float input
HA
communication circuit
DC5V
DC12V
× 4
Humidifier output
Same as left
Same as left
Louver
motor
∗2
∗2
Driver
MCU
Drain
pump
Auto grille
panel
Outside
output
Indoor
MCU
fan motor
Serial send/
receive circuit
Run
Warning
Defrost
Thermo. ON
COOL
1
2
3
1
2
3
AC
Fan motor
control circuit
synchronous
signal input circuit
HEAT
FAN
Power circuit
DC280V
1
1
2
2
3
3
Outdoor unit
Up to 8 units are connectable. ∗1
∗1 However Max.7 units are connectable in
case of mounting network adapter when two
main (sub) remote controllers are connected.
Outdoor unit
* Case of TCC-LINK adapter
Case of TCC-LINK adapter
(Option)
∗2 The network adapter is mounted to only 1 unit.
TCC-LINK adapter is mounted to the master unit.
TCC-LINK
adapter P.C. board
(MCC-1440)
∗3 Connection of the weekly timer to the sub
remote controller is unavailable.
TCC-LINK
Central controller
(Option)
U3
U4
TCC-LINK
communication circuit
Outdoor unit
– 58 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-1-2. Connection of Wireless Remote Controller Kit
Indoor unit
#1 (Master)
Wireless remote controller kit
Receiver P.C. board (MCC-1504)
Display LED
Receive circuit
Buzzer
Function setup SW
Grille up/down SW
MCU
DC5V
Power
circuit
Remote controller
communication circuit
Temporary
operation SW
#2
(Follower)
A
#3
(Follower)
A
A
B
B
B
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1570)
DC20V
Remote controller
EEPROM
TA sensor
TC sensor
TCJ sensor
Float input
HA
communication circuit
DC5V
DC12V
× 4
Humidifier output
Same as left
Same as left
Louver
motor
∗2
∗2
Driver
MCU
Drain
pump
Auto grille
panel
Outside
output
Indoor
MCU
fan motor
Serial send/
receive circuit
Run
Warning
Defrost
Thermo. ON
COOL
1
2
3
1
2
3
AC
Fan motor
control circuit
synchronous
signal input circuit
HEAT
FAN
Power circuit
DC280V
1
1
2
2
3
3
Outdoor unit
Up to 8 units are connectable. ∗1
∗1 However Max.7 units are connectable in
case of mounting network adapter when two
main (sub) remote controllers are connected.
Outdoor unit
* Case of TCC-LINK adapter
Case of TCC-LINK adapter
(Option)
∗2 The network adapter is mounted to only 1 unit.
TCC-LINK adapter is mounted to the master unit.
TCC-LINK
adapter P.C. board
(MCC-1440)
TCC-LINK
Central controller
(Option)
U3
U4
TCC-LINK
communication circuit
Outdoor unit
– 59 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-1-3. Connection of Both Main (Sub) Remote Controller and Wireless Remote Controller Kit
Indoor unit
#1 (Master)
Main (sub) master remote controller
Wireless remote controller kit
(Max. 2 units)
Weekly timer
Receiver P.C. board
(MCC-1504)
Display LED
Display
LCD
Function
setup
Display
LCD
LCD
driver
Receive
circuit
Function setup SW
Grille up/down SW
Display
LED
Key
MCU
switch
Function
setup
MCU
CN2
CN1
Buzzer
MCU
Key
switch
DC5V
Remote controller
communication circuit
Power
circuit
DC5V
DC5V
∗3
Power
circuit
Remote controller
communication circuit
Temporary
operation SW
Power
circuit
Secondary
battery
A
B
A
B
#2
(Follower)
A
#3
(Follower)
A
A
B
B
B
Indoor control P.C. board (MCC-1570)
DC20V
Remote controller
communication circuit
EEPROM
TA sensor
TC sensor
DC5V
DC12V
× 4
Humidifier output
Same as left
Same as left
TCJ sensor
Float input
HA
Louver
∗2
∗2
Driver
motor
MCU
Drain
pump
Auto grille
panel
Outside
output
Indoor
MCU
fan motor
Serial send/
receive circuit
Run
Warning
Defrost
Thermo. ON
COOL
1
2
3
1
2
3
AC
Fan motor
control circuit
synchronous
signal input circuit
HEAT
FAN
Power circuit
DC280V
1
1
2
2
3
3
Outdoor unit
Up to 8 units are connectable. ∗1
Outdoor unit
* Case of TCC-LINK adapter
∗1 However Max.7 units are connectable in case of
mounting network adapter.
Case of TCC-LINK adapter
(Option)
∗2 The network adapter is mounted to only 1 unit.
TCC-LINK adapter is mounted to the master unit.
TCC-LINK
adapter P.C. board
(MCC-1440)
∗3 Connection of the weekly timer to the sub remote
controller is unavailable.
∗4 In the left system, set the wireless remote
controller side as the follower remote controller
when using the main (sub) wired remote controller
as the master remote controller.
TCC-LINK
Central controller
(Option)
U3
U4
TCC-LINK
communication circuit
Outdoor unit
– 60 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-2. Control Specifications
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
1) Distinction of outdoor unit
Remarks
1
When power
supply is reset
When the power supply is reset, the outdoors are distin-
guished and the control is selected according to the
distinguished result.
2) Setting of indoor fan speed and existence of air direction
adjustment
Based on EEPROM data, select setting of the indoor fan
speed and the existence of air direction adjustment.
Air speed (rpm)/
Air direction adjustment
2
Operation
mode selection
1) Based on the operation mode selecting command from the
remote controller, the operation mode is selected.
Remote controller
Control outline
command
STOP
FAN
Air conditioner stops.
Fan operation
COOL
DRY
Cooling operation
Dry operation
HEAT
AUTO
Heating operation
Ta: Room temp.
Ts: Setup temp.
To: Outside temp.
• COOL/HEAT operation mode is
automatically selected by Ta, Ts
and To for operation.
• The operation is performed as
shown in the following figure
according to Ta value at the first
time only. (In the range of Ts +
α –1 < Ta < Ts + α + 1, Cooling
thermo. OFF (Fan)/Setup air
volume operation continues.)
Cooling
operation
+1.0
Cooling thermo. OFF (Fan)
• Setup air volume
Ta
(˚C)
Ts + α
-1.0
Heating
operation
• α is corrected according to the outside temperature.
Outside temp.
No To
Correction value (α)
0K
–1K
0K
k = deg
To ≥ 24°C
24 > To ≥ 18°C
To < 18°C
To error
+1K
0K
3
Room temp.
control
1) Adjustment range: Remote controller setup temperature (°C)
COOL/DRY
18 to 29
HEAT
AUTO
18 to 29
17 to 27
Wired type
18 to 29
16 to 30
Wireless type
18 to 30
– 61 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
Shift of suction
temperature in heating
operation
3
Room temp.
control
(Continued)
2) Using the Item code 06, the setup temperature in heating
operation can be corrected.
Setup data
0
2
4
6
Setup temp. correction
+0°C
+2°C
+4°C
+6°C
Setting at shipment
Setup data
2
4
Automatic
capacity control
1) Based on the difference between Ta and Ts, the operation
frequency is instructed to the outdoor unit.
2) Cooling operation
(GA control)
Every 90 seconds, the room temperature difference
between temperature detected by Ta and Ts and the
varied room temperature value are calculated to obtain
the correction value of the frequency command and then
the present frequency command is corrected.
Ta (n) – Ts (n) : Room temp. difference
n
: Counts of detection
Ta (n-1) – Ts (n) : Varied room temp. value
n – 1 Counts of detection of 90 seconds before
3) Heating operation
:
Every 1 minute (60 sec.), the room temperature differ-
ence between temperature detected by Ta and Ts and the
varied room temperature value are calculated to obtain
the correction value of the frequency command and then
the present frequency command is corrected.
Ts (n) – Ta (n)
n
: Room temp. difference
: Counts of detection
Ta (n) – Ta (n – 1): Varied room temp. value
n – 1
: Counts of detection of 1 minute before
4) Dry operation
The frequency correction control is same as those of the
cooling operation.
However the maximum frequency is limited to approxi-
mately “S6”.
Note) When LOW is set up, the maximum frequency is
limited to approximately “SB”.
5
Automatic
cooling/heating
control
1) The judgment of selecting COOL/HEAT is carried out as
shown below. When +1.5 exceeds against Tsh 10 minutes
and after thermo.-OFF, heating operation (Thermo. OFF)
exchanges to cooling operation. Description in the
Tsc: Setup temp. in
cooling operation
Tsh: Setup temp. in
heating operation
+ temp. correction of
room temp. control
parentheses shows an example of cooling ON/OFF.
Ta
(˚C)
Cooling
+1.5
(Cooling ON)
Tsc
or
Tsh
(Cooling OFF)
-1.5
Heating
When –1.5 lowers against Tsc 10 minutes and after
thermo. OFF, cooling operation (Thermo. OFF) exchanges
to heating operation.
2) For the automatic capacity control after judgment of
cooling/heating, see Item 4.
3) For temperature correction of room temp. control in
automatic heating, see Item 3.
– 62 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
6
Air speed selection 1) Operation with (HH), (H), (L) or [AUTO] mode is carried
out by the command from the remote controller.
HH > H+ > H > L+ >
L > UL
2) When the air speed mode [AUTO] is selected, the air
speed varies by the difference between Ta and Ts.
<COOL>
Ta (˚C)
A
+3.0
HH
B
C
+2.5
+2.0
+1.5
+1.0
+0.5
Tsc
(HH)
H+ (HH)
H (HH)
L+ (H+)
L (H)
D
E
L (H)
F
–0.5
L (L+)
G
• Controlling operation in case when thermo of remote
controller works is same as a case when thermo of the
body works.
• If the air speed has been changed once, it is not changed
for 3 minutes. However when the air volume is exchanged,
the air speed changes.
• When cooling operation has started, select a downward
slope for the air speed, that is, the high position.
• If the temperature is just on the difference boundary, the
air speed does not change.
• Mode in the parentheses indicates one in automatic
cooling operation.
<HEAT>
Ta (˚C)
L (L+)
(–0.5) –1.0
E
L+ (H)
(0) Tsh
H (H+)
(+0.5) +1.0
D
H+
(HH)
(+1.0) +2.0
C
HH
(HH)
(+1.5) +3.0
B
A
(+2.0) +4.0
Value in the parentheses indicates one when thermostat of
the remote controller works.
Value without parentheses indicates one when thermostat of
the body works.
• If the air speed has been changed once, it is not changed
for 1 minute. However when the air speed I exchanged, the
air speed changes.
• When heating operation has started, select an upward
slope for the air speed, that is, the high position.
• If the temperature is just on the difference boundary, the
air speed does not change.
• Mode in the parentheses indicates one in automatic
heating operation.
Tc: Indoor heat
exchanger sensor
temperature
• In Tc ≥ 60°C, the air speed increases by 1 step.
– 63 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
6
Air speed
selection
(Continued):
In case of 4-way
Discharge
Standard
Type 1
1
Type 3
Type 6
6
Item code
[5d]
Selection of high
ceiling type
0
3
SW501 (1)/(2)
OFF/OFF
ON/OFF
OFF/ON
ON/ON
Item code:
Tap
F1
HEAT COOL HEAT COOL HEAT COOL HEAT COOL
HH HH HH HH
[5d] or selection of
high ceiling on P.C.
board SW501
Cassette type
F2
HH
HH
H+, H H+, H
L+, L L+, L
H+ H+, H H+, H
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
H+
H
HH
H
HH
H+
L+
L
L+
L
H+
H
L+
L
H
L+
L
L+
L
L+
L
UL
UL
UL
UL
SM56
SM80
SM110
SM140
SM160
Tap
Revolution speed (rpm)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
610
550
500
450
400
390
370
350
340
330
320
310
250
630
700
670
660
640
620
610
550
490
480
450
400
400
300
700
700
670
660
650
640
630
580
530
520
490
450
440
300
590
530
470
450
440
410
380
370
350
330
320
250
670
660
650
640
630
560
490
480
460
430
420
300
3) In heating operation, the mode changes to [UL] if thermostat
is turned off.
4) If Ta ≥ 25°C when heating operation has started and when
defrost operation has been cleared, the air conditioner
operates with (H) mode or higher mode for 1 minute after Tc
entered in E zone of cool air discharge preventive control
(Item 7).
5) In automatic cooling/heating operation, the revolution
frequency of (HH) is set larger than that in the standard
cooling/heating operation.
However only when
the high ceiling
selection is set to
[Standard]
F5 F4
Ta
(˚C)
However the revolution
frequency is restricted in the
automatic heating operation as
shown in the following figure.
47
42
F5
6) Self-clean operation
[Self-clean ] is
displayed.
When performing self-clean operation after stopping the
cooling operation, the mode becomes [UL] (210 rpm).
– 64 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
6
Air speed
Slim Duct Type
selection
(Continued):
In case of
Selection of high static
pressure type
Standard
0
Type 1
1
Type 3
3
Type 6
6
Item code
[5d]
Item code:
SW501 (1)/(2)
OFF/OFF
ON/OFF
OFF/ON
ON/ON
Slim Duct Type
[5d] or selection of high
static pressure on P.C.
board SW501
Tap
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
HEAT COOL HEAT COOL HEAT COOL HEAT COOL
HH
H+
H
HH
H+
H
HH
HH
HH
HH
H+
H
H+
H
L+
L+
HH
HH
H+
H
H+
H
L+
LL
L+
LL
H+
H
H+
H
L+
LL
L+
LL
L+
L
L+
L
LL
LL
LL
LL
Slim Duct Type
SM40
SM45
SM56
Tap
Revolution speed (rpm)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
1260
1180
1120
1040
1020
990
1260
1180
1120
1040
1020
990
1320
1220
1220
1220
1180
1180
1180
1040
990
960
960
950
950
910
910
870
870
990
840
840
880
790
790
820
550
550
550
3) In heating operation, the mode changes to [UL] if
thermostat is turned off.
4) If Ta ≥ 25°C when heating operation has started and when
defrost operation has been cleared, the air conditioner
operates with (H) mode or higher mode for 1 minute after
Tc entered in E zone of cool air discharge preventive
control (Item 7).
– 65 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
7
Cool air discharge
preventive control
1) In heating operation, the indoor fan is controlled
In D and E zones, the
based on the detected temperature of Tc sensor or priority is given to air
Tcj sensor. As shown below, the upper limit of the
revolution frequency is restricted.
volume selection setup
of remote controller.
However B zone is assumed as C zone for
6 minutes and after when the compressor activated.
In A zone while thermo
is ON, [PRE-HEAT
(Heating ready)] is
displayed.
In defrost operation, the control value of Tc is
shifted by 6°C.
Tc
(˚C)
Tcj
HH
32
H
30
L
E zone
28
UL
D zone
26
OFF
C zone
B zone
A zone
20
16
8
Freeze preventive control 1) The cooling operation (including Dry operation) is
Tcj:
(Low temperature release)
performed as follows based on the detected
temperature of Tc sensor or Tcj sensor.
Indoor heat exchanger
sensor temperature
When [J] zone is detected for 6 minutes
(Following figure), the commanded frequency is
decreased from the real operation frequency.
After then the commanded frequency changes
every 30 seconds while operation is performed in
[J] zone.
In [K] zone, time counting is interrupted and the
operation is held.
When [ I ] zone is detected, the timer is cleared
and the operation returns to the normal operation.
If the commanded frequency becomes S0
because the operation continues in [J] zone, the
return temperature A is raised from 5°C to 12°C
until [ I ] zone is detected and the indoor fan
operates with [L] mode.
(˚C)
A
5
I
K
2
J
In heating operation, the freeze-preventive control
works if 4-way valve is not exchanged and the
following conditions are satisfied.
(However the temperature for J zone dashing
control is changed from 2°C to –5°C.)
Tcn:
Tc temperature when 5
minutes elapsed after
activation
Tc (n – 1):
<Conditions>
Tc temperature at start
time
• When
or
is established 5 minutes after
‚
activation.
Tcn ≤ Tc (n – 1) – 5
Tcn < Tc (n – 1) – 1 and Tcn ≤ Ta < 5°C
‚
– 66 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
9
High-temp.
release control
1) The heating operation is performed as follows based on the
detected temperature of Tc sensor or Tcj sensor.
• When [M] zone is detected, the commanded frequency is
decreased from the real operation frequency. After then
the commanded frequency changes every 30 seconds
while operation is performed in [M] zone.
However this control is
ignored in case of the
follower unit of the twin.
• In [N] zone, the commanded frequency is held.
• When [L] zone is detected, the commanded frequency is
returned to the original value by approx. 6Hz every
60 seconds.
Tc(˚C)
Setup at shipment
M
N
Tcj
A
B
Control temp. (°C)
A
B
56 (54)
52 (52)
L
NOTE:
Same status as that
when “thermostat-OFF”
(status that the air
When the operation has started or when Tc or Tcj < 30°C at
start of the operation or after operation start, temperature is
controlled between values in parentheses of A and B.
conditioner enters in the
room temp. monitor
mode when the
temperature reached the
setup temperature on
the remote controller)
10 Drain pump
control
1) In cooling operation (including Dry operation), the drain
pump is usually operated.
2) If the float switch works while drain pump drives, the
compressor stops, the drain pump continues the operation,
and a check code is output.
Check code [P10]
3) If the float switch works while drain pump stops, the
compressor stops and the drain pump operates. If the float
switch keeps operating for approx. 4 minutes, a check code
is output.
11 After-heat
elimination
When heating operation stops, in some cases, the indoor fan
operates with (L) for approx. 30 seconds.
is displayed.
– 67 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
1) Louver position setup
Remarks
12 Louver control:
In case of 4-way
Discharge
The louver position
at horizontal
discharge position
at under SM80
differs from that at
over SM110.
• When the louver position is changed, the position moves
necessarily to downward discharge position once to return to
the set position.
Cassette type
•
The louver position can be set up in the following operation range.
In cooling/dry operation In heating/fan operation
• In group twin/triple operation, the louver positions can be set
up collectively or individually.
2) Swing setup
The swinging
louver moves
• [SWING] is displayed and the following display is repeated.
usually up to the
ceiling side from
the louver position
of the set time.
In all operations
(Repeats)
• In group twin operation, the louver positions can be set up
collectively or individually.
3) When the unit stopped or the warning was output, the louver is
automatically set to full closed position.
4) When PRE-HEAT
(Heating ready) is displayed
(Heating operation started or defrost operation is performed),
heating thermo is off or self-cleaning is performed, the louver is
automatically set to horizontal discharge position.
∗ The louver which air direction is individually set or the locked
louver closes fully when the unit stops and the louver is
automatically set to horizontal discharge position when
PRE-HEAT
(Heating ready) is displayed, heating thermo is
off or self-cleaning is performed.
Setup from the
<<Individual air direction setup>>
UNIT LOUVER
remote controller
UNIT
LOUVER but-
• Pushing
Louver select button enables every discharge
without
port to set up the air direction.
ton is unavailable.
• In case of no input (key operation) for approx. 5 seconds during
setting of individual air direction (during displaying of louver No. on
the remote controller screen), the remote controller screen returns to
the normal display screen.
For the setup
operation, refer to
“How to set up
louver individually”
of Item “Setup at
local site/Others”.
• For the air direction illustration during normal operation, the air
direction of the least No. among the louvers which are block-set is
displayed.
• While individual air direction is being set, the remote controller
operation (Illustration of air direction) and operation of the real
Using same as the
present 4-way Air
Discharge Cassette
Type is possible
machine are linked.
UNIT LOUVER
• When selecting a case,
pushed or louver No. is not
displayed, the air directions
of all the louvers are
Louver select button is not
[02]
collectively set up.
[03]
[01]
E-box
Refrigerant pipe
[04]
Drain pipe
– 68 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
<<Selection of Swing mode>>
Remarks
12 Louver control
(Continued):
• For the Swing mode, the following three types of modes are
selectable and settable by keeping Swing/Direction SWING/FIX
button pushed for 4 seconds or more on the remote controller.
On the remote control-
ler before the wired
remote controller
(RBC-AMT31E), the
mode cannot be moved
In case of 4-way
Discharge
Cassette type
Standard (4 pieces: same phase) swing
→ Data: [0001 (At shipment)]
to the select mode
SWING/FIX
When Swing operation is selected, four louvers align at the
horizontal discharge position and then start the Swing
operation at the same time.
even if pushing
button for a long time.
Dual swing → Data: [0002]
Carry out setting
‚
operation during stop of
the unit; otherwise the
unit stops operation.
When operation is selected, the louvers of louver No. [01]
and [03] move to the horizontal discharge position, the
louvers of louver No. [02] and [04] move to the downward
discharge position and then start the Swing operation at
the same time.
The standard swing
performs the same
swing operation as the
present operation
(2 series).
Cycle swing → Data: [0003]
ƒ
When operation is selected, the louver No. [01] moves to
the horizontal discharge position, [03] to the downward
discharge position, [02] and [04] to the middle position and
then start the Swing operation at the same time.
For the setting opera-
tion, refer to [How to
set up type of the
swings] in Item “Setup
at local site/Others”.
• Three types of the swing modes can be also selected and set
by the setup data of Item code (DN) [F0].
• In case of selecting the Swing mode, “Dual swing” or “Cycle
swing”, the following numerals is displayed at the center of
the remote controller screen for approx. 3 seconds when
button was pushed to select [SWING].
(No display for the standard swing)
On the remote controller
before the wired remote
controller
SWING/FIX
(RBC-AMT31E),
flashing showing the
Swing mode is not
indicated.
Alternate lighting
(0.5 sec.)
Alternate lighting
(0.5 sec.)
Dual swing
Cycle swing
<<Louver lock (Louver fix)>>
On the remote control-
ler before the wired
remote controller
• For the air direction setup for each discharge port, the louver
position can be locked during the normal operation.
• An arbitrary air direction of an arbitrary louver can be
UNIT LOUVER
(RBC-AMT31E),
registered and set by keeping
button pushed for
UNIT LOUVER
button is not
4 seconds or more on the remote controller.
provided.
• The louver lock can be set by registering the setup data to
Item code (DN) [F1] to [F4] according to the following table.
Carry out setting
operation during stop of
the unit; otherwise the
unit stops operation.
Item code Objective louver No.
Setup data
F1
F2
F3
F4
01
02
03
04
0000: Release (At shipment)
0001: Horizontal discharge position
~
0005: Downward discharge position
– 69 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
12 Louver control
(Continued):
• If there is the locked louver in the unit, [
remote controller screen.
] goes on the
For the setting
operation, refer to
[How to set louver
lock] of Installation
Manual.
In case of 4-way
Discharge
Cassette type
• While the following controls are performed, the louvers
operate even if executing the louver lock.
Control which ignores lock
Operation stop
Objective louver No.
Full-close position
‚
ƒ
„
ꢀ
†
When heating operation started
Heating thermo. OFF
During defrost operation
Initialize operation
Horizontal discharge position
Horizontal discharge position
Horizontal discharge position
Full-close position
It is position check
operation and it
does not link with
the real louver and
air direction setup
(Illustration on the
remote controller
screen).
Self-clean operation
Horizontal discharge position
• The real louver corresponding to the louver No. displayed on the
remote controller screen during setting of louver lock operates
swinging.
13 HA control
1) This control is connected to TV control or remote start/stop
I/F, etc, and start/stop are available by HA signal input from
the remote position.
In the group opera-
tion, use this control
by connecting to
either master or
follower indoor unit.
2) This control outputs start/stop status to HA output terminal.
3) I/O specifications conform to JEMA regulations.
4) This control outputs [Operation OFF (STOP) signal] to HA
output terminal while self-cleaning works. However selection of
[Operation ON (Operating) signal] is possible by changing
[0000 (At shipment)] of Item code (DN) [CC] to [0001]. In this
case, if HA is input during self-clean operation during operation
of the air conditioner, the self-clean operation is not performed.
(Unit stops.)
14 Frequency fixed
operation (Test run)
<In case of wired remote controller>
Command frequency
is approximately [S7]
1) When pushing [CHK] button for 4 seconds or more, [TEST]
is displayed on the display screen and the mode enters in
Test run mode.
2) Push [ON/OFF] button.
3) Using [MODE] button, set the mode to [COOL] or [HEAT].
• Do not use other mode than [COOL]/[HEAT] mode.
• During test run operation, the temperature cannot be
adjusted.
• An error is detected as usual.
• A frequency fixed operation is performed.
4) After the test run, push [ON/OFF] button to stop the operation.
(Display in the display part is same as the procedure in Item 1.)
5) Push [CHK] button to clear the test run mode.
([TEST] display in the display part disappears and the
status returns to the normal stop status.)
15 Filter sign display
(Except wireless
type)
1) The operation time of the indoor fan is calculated, the filter reset [FILTER
signal is sent to the remote controller when the specified time
(2500H) has passed, and it is displayed on LCD.
] goes on.
∗ It is provided on
the separately
sold type
2) When the filter reset signal has been received from the
remote controller, time of the calculation timer is cleared.
In this case, the measurement time is reset if the specified
time has passed, and display on LCD disappears.
TCB-AX21E2.
– 70 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
16 Central control mode 1) Setting at the centerl controller side enables to select the
selection
contents which can be operated on the remote controller
at indoor unit side.
2) Setup contents
• 64 line central controller (TCB-SC642TLE2)
Display at remote
controller side
(No display)
[Individual]: Operated on the remote controller
(Priority to second pushing)
[Central 1]: ON/OFF operation cannot be operated on
the remote controller.
[Central
] goes on
[Central 2]: ON/OFF, mode selection, temp. setup
operations cannot be operated on the
remote controller.
[Central
] goes on
[Central 3]: Mode selection and temp. setup operations
cannot be operated on the remote controller.
[Central
[Central
] goes on
] goes on
[Central 4]: Mode selection cannot be operated on the
remote controller.
∗ In case of the wireless type, the display lamp does not
change but the contents are same. If operating an item
which is prohibited by the central control mode from the
remote controller, it is notified with the receive sound,
Pi, Pi, Pi, Pi, Pi (5 times).
17 Energy-saving
control
1) Selecting [AUTO] mode enables an energy-saving to be
operated.
2) The setup temperature is shifted (corrected) in the range
not to lose the comfort ability according to input values of
various sensors.
3) Data (Input value room temp. Ta, Outside temp. To, Air
volume, Indoor heat exchanger sensor temp. Tc) for
20 minutes are taken the average to calculate correction
value of the setup temperature.
4) The setup temperature is shifted every 20 minutes, and
the shifted range is as follows.
In cooling time: +1.5 to – 1.0K
In heating time: –1.5 to +1.0K
18 Max. frequency cut
control
1) This control is operated by selecting [AUTO] operation mode.
2) COOL operation mode:
It is controlled according to the
following figure if To < 28°C.
3) HEAT operation mode:
It is controlled according to the
following figure if To > 15°C.
Max. frequency is
restricted to approximately
the rated heating frequency
Ta(˚C)
Ta(˚C)
Tsh
Normal control
+4
+3
–3
Tsc
–4
Normal control
Max. frequency is
restricted to approximately
the rated cooling frequency
– 71 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
19 DC motor
1) When the fan operation has started, positioning of the
stator and the rotor are performed.
(Moves slightly with tap sound)
2) The motor operates according to the command from the
indoor controller.
Notes)
• When the fan rotates while the air conditioner stops due to
entering of outside air, etc, the air conditioner may operate
while the fan motor stops.
Check code [P12]
• When a fan lock is found, the air conditioner stops, and an
error is displayed.
20 Self-clean operation
(Dry operation):
In case of 4-way
Discharge Cassette
type
1) When cooling operation mode (AUTO COOL, COOL, DRY) stopped, the following
three self-clean operations are performed.
Compressor
ON period
Self-clean
operation period
FAN
Drain pump
Louver
0 to 10 min.
10 to 60 min.
60 min. to
None
1 hour
2 hours
Fan (UL)
STOP
Horizontal discharge position
2) During operation of self-clean,
lights on the wired
On the remote control-
ler before the wired
remote controller
remote controller screen. However the operation lamp
(Green LED) goes off.
(RBC-AMT31E),
Self-clean operation
display is not output.
And it is not also on
the wireless remote
controller.
3) To stop the self-clean operation, push twice the
[ON/OFF] button on the remote controller continuously.
(Stop the operation as compressor ON time in the table
above: 10 minutes or below.)
4) When the follower unit executes self-clean operation in the
group connection, the segment of
is displayed on the
It is recognized as
[STOP] from the
remote monitor side.
wired remote controller screen via master unit.
∗ If self-clean operation is not used, set invalidity
(does not use) of the self-clean operation by changing
[0001 (At shipment) of Item code (DN) [D3] to [0000].
∗ To erase the
display during operation of self-clean,
change Item code [D4] from [0000: Display
(At shipment)] to [0001: Non-display].
SAVE
21 Save operation
1) Turn on
2) During operation of save operation,
wired remote controller.
button on the remote controller.
Operation and display
also are unavailable on
the wired remote
controller RBC-
AMT31E and before.
SAVE
lights on the
3) During save operation, the current release control is
performed with the restriction ratio set in EEPROM on
Carry out setting
the outdoor unit.
SAVE
operation during stop of
the unit; otherwise the
unit stops operation.
4) The restriction ratio can be set by keeping
button
pushed for 4 seconds or more on the remote controller.
5) When validating the save operation, the next operation
starts with save operation valid because contents are
held even when operation stops, operation mode
changes or power supply is reset.
For the setup opera-
tion, refer to “How to
set up contents of
save operation” of
Installation Manual.
6) The restriction ratio can be set by changing the setup
data of Item code (DN) [C2] in the range of 50 to 100%
(every 1%, Setting at shipment: 75%).
– 72 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Item
Outline of specifications
Remarks
22 8°C heating/
Frost protective
operation
1) This functional is intended for the cold latitudes and performs
objective heating operation (8°C heating operation).
2) This function is valid only for combination with the outdoor
units (Super Digital Inverter (SDI) 4-series outdoor units).
In a group connection,
if there is even one
combination with other
unit, “This function is not
provided.” is displayed.
3) Using the indoor DN code [D1] (1 bit), Valid/Invalid of this
function is set up at the customer’s side.
∗ The setup by DN code is Invalid [0]/Valid [1] and Invalid [0]
has been set at the shipment.
4) This operation is the heating operation which sets 8°C as
the setup temperature of the target.
The setup temperature
jumps from [18] to [8].
5) This function starts operation by pushing temperature
button
during heating operation; besides by pushing
button for 4 seconds or more after temperature
reached the minimum set temperature.
6) To stop/release this operation, select and execute one from
the following operations.
Push
continues.
button: Heating operation (18°C setting)
‚
ƒ
Push [START/STOP] button: Air conditioner stops.
(Heating 18°C operation at the next start)
MODE
Push
: Other operation mode is selected and the
operation continues.
7) As the setup temperature is 8°C and the human heating is not
targeted, the cold air discharge preventive control (Item 7) is
made invalid to suppress the intermittent operation.
8) The settings of the air direction and air volume are
changeable during this operation.
9) The indoor fan stops to protect the compressor for
2 minutes after start of heating operation (Thermo-ON) by
this function.
– 73 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function
Connector No.
Pin No.
Specifications
Remarks
Humidifier output is ON when heating operation is performed, when thermostat is on, when the fan is on.
∗ The setting of Humidifier provided + Drain pump ON is performed by short-circuit of CN70 or from the
remote controller. (DN [40] = 0001)
1
2
1
DC12V
Humidifier output (∗)
CN66
Output (Open collector)
DC12V
Setting at shipment: Interlock of ON by indoor unit operation, with OFF by stop operation
∗ The single operation setting by FAN button on the remote controller is performed on the remote
controller (DN [31] = 0000 → 0001)
ntilation output
CN32
CN61
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
Output (Open collector)
ON/OFF input
HA ON/OFF input (J01:YES/NO=Pulse (At shipment from factory) /Static input selection)
0V
Remote controller prohibited input
Operation output (Open collector)
DC12V
Permission/Prohibition of remote controller operation stop is performed by input.
Operation ON (Answer back of HA)
HA
Warning output (Open collector)
DC12V
Warning output ON
Defrost output (Open collector)
ON when outdoor unit is defrosted
Thermostat ON output (Open collector) ON when real thermostat is on. (Compressor ON)
Option output
CN60
Cooling output (Open collector)
Heating output (Open collector)
Fan output (Open collector)
DC12V
ON when operation mode is cooling system (COOL, DRY, Cooling/Heating automatic cooling)
ON when operation mode is heating system (HEAT, Cooling/Heating automatic heating)
ON when indoor fan is on. (When air cleaner is used) OFF while clean operation is performed.
Outside error input
CN80
CN20
NC
Generate the warning code “L30” (continuously for 1 minute) and stop the operation forcibly.
Outside error input
DC12V
Panel operation input
Panel up output (Open collector)
Panel down output (Open collector)
0V
The grille is controlled according to up/down operation from the remote controller.
∗ Setting of automatic up/down grille provided is performed on the remote controller.
(DN [30] = 0000 → 0001)
AUTO up/down grille
(∗)
Selection of option error input (Protective operation display of device attached to outside) or Humidifier
setting input (Vaporizing + Drain pump ON)
Humidifier is set at shipment from factory.
1
2
FILTER
Option error /
Humidifier setting (∗)
CN70
0V
0V
∗ Setting of option error input is performed on the remote controller. (DN [2A] = 0002 → 0001)
1
2
1
2
1
2
CHK
Operation check
This check is used to check indoor operation. (Performs operation of indoor fan “H”, Louver horizontal
and Drain pump ON without communication with outdoor and remote controller)
CN71
CN72
CN73
DISP
Exhibition mode
Communication is available by indoor unit and remote controller only.
Indoor unit forced thermostat OFF operation
0V
Demand input
0V
EXCT
Demand
* This option is not provided to oversea models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Serial send LED
D15 (Green)
Sub bus communication LED
D504 (Green)
Micro computer operation LED
D501 (Red)
Optional power supply
CN309 (Yellow), AC230V
Serial receive LED
D14 (Orange)
DC fan return
CN334 (White)
HA (T10)
CN61 (Yellow), DC12V
High ceiling select switch
SW501
DC fan output
CN333 (White)
Remote controller
CN41 (Blue), DC20V
Louver
CN510 (White),
DC12V
Indoor/Outdoor inter-unit cable
CN67 (Black), AC230V
Optional output
CN60 (White), DC12
Humidifier
CN66 (White), DC12V
Fan drive
CN32 (White), DC12V
TC sensor
CN101 (Black), DC5V
TA sensor
CN104 (Yellow), DC5V
TCJ sensor
CN102 (Red), DC5V
Filter
CN70 (White), DC5V
Float switch
CN34 (Red), DC12V
Drain pump
CN504 (White), DC12V
EXCT
CN73 (Red), DC5V
Remote controller power supply LED
D403 (Red)
Automatic up/down grille
CN20 (Blue), DC12V
Main bus communication LED
D503 (Yellow)
CHK
Outside error input
CN80 (Green), DC12V
CN71 (White), DC5V
TCC-LINK adapter
DISP
CN50 (White), DC12V, 5V CN72 (White), DC5V
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. CIRCUIT CONFIGURATION AND CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS
9-1. Outdoor Controls
9-1-1. Print Circuit Board
<Viewed from parts of P.C board>
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1404AT-E
RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, RAV-SP1404ATZ-E
RAV-SP1104ATZG-E, RAV-SP1404ATZG-E
<MCC-1571>
Fan motor output
(Lower side)
CN300 (White)
Fan motor output
Compressor output terminal
Electrolytic
condenser
(Upper side)
CN202
CN201
CN200
CN400 (White)
Case thermostat connector
CN609 (Blue)
Power supply circuit protective fuse
F100 250V, 3.15A, Plastic case)
4-way valve connector
CN701 (White)
Compressor ON output connector
CN704 (Blue)
Heater output connector
CN610 (Gray)
Lead wire
for grounding
P09 (Black)
Outside input connector
CN610 (Yellow)
Specific operation switch
SW801
SW804
Display select switch
SW800
SW803
Temp. sensor connector
TL CN604 (White)
TD CN603 (White)
TO CN602 (Yellow)
TE CN601 (White)
TS CN600 (White)
Power-ON, error display LED
D800 to 804 (Yellow)
D805 (Green)
PMV connector
CN710 (White)
Initial setting switch
SW802
Connector
for reactor
Conneector
for reactor
Indoor/Outdoor communication signal LED
D503 (Green, Outdoor → Indoor)
D502 (Orange, Indoor → Outdoor)
Inter-unit
cable connector
CN04 (White)
Inter-unit cable
Power supply
protective fuse
protective fuse
F03 (250V, 25A)
F01 (250V, 25A)
4-way valve protective fuse
F700 (250V, 3.15A, Plastic case)
Lead wire for connection of power supply
P01 (Red)
P02 (White)
– 76 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F01, 02, 25A fuse
P.C. board earth lead
(Black)
DB02:
High power factor diode
Q404:
High power factor circuit IGBT
C12, 13, 14
electrrolytiic capaacitor
F03: 3.15A fuse
DB01:
Single-phase rectifier diode
L-phase power supply lead
(Black)
N-phase power supply lead
(White)
Serial lead (Orange)
Reactor lead connector
(White)
CN701:
4-way valve connector
RY701:
4-way valve relay
Comp. lead
(Red) (White) (Black)
CN300:
Fan motor connector
CN602:
Outdoor temperature
(TO) sensor connector
12V
5V
GND
CN806:
Optional connector
CN600:
Heat exchange temperature
(TE) sensor connector
IC800: MCU
CN603:
Suction temperature
(TS) sensor connector
CN601:
Discharge temperature
(TD) sensor connector
CN500:
Case thermo
connector
Fan drive circuit
Q300 to Q305:
FET (QTY: 6P)
Comp. drive circuit
Q200 to Q205: IGBT (QTY: 6P)
IC200: Drive IG (QTY: 1P)
CN700:
PMV connector
CN605:
Sub SW board connector
J800 to 803, 806
Model switch jumper line
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-2. Outline of Main Controls
<In case of RAV-SP110 and SP140 models>
1. PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) control
1) PMV is controlled between 30 and 500 pulsed during operation.
2) In cooling operation, PMV is usually controlled with the temperature difference between TS sensor and
TC sensor aiming 1 to 4K as the target value.
3) In heating operation, PMV is usually controlled with the temperature difference between TS sensor and
TE sensor aiming –1 to 4K as the target value.
4) When the cycle excessively heated in both cooling and heating operation, PMV is controlled by TD
sensor. The target value is usually 91°C in cooling operation and 96°C in heating operation.
REQUIREMENT
A sensor trouble may cause a liquid back-flow or abnormal overheat resulting in excessive shortening of the
compressor life. In a case of trouble on the compressor, be sure to check there is no error in the resistance
value or the refrigerating cycle of each sensor after repair and then start the operation.
2. Discharge temperature release control
1) When the discharge temperature did not fall or the discharge temperature rapidly went up by PMV
control, this control lowers the operation frequency. It subdivides the frequency control up to 0.6Hz to
stabilize the cycle.
2) When the discharge temperature detected an abnormal stop zone, the compressor stops and then
restarts after 2 minutes 30 seconds.
The error counting is cleared when the operation continued for 10 minutes. If the error is detected by
4 times without clearing, the error is determined and restarting is not performed.
∗ The cause is considered as excessively little amount of refrigerant, PMV error or clogging of the cycle.
3) For displayed contents of error, confirm on the check code list.
TD [˚C]
Abnormal stop
111
Frequency normal down
109
Frequency slow down
106
Frequency hold
103
Frequency slow up
(Up to command)
96
As command is
– 78 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Outdoor fan control
Revolution frequency allocation of fan taps [rpm]
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W9
WA
WB WC WD
WE
Up
200 240 240 260 320 380 480 500 530 610 640 660 720 780
200 280 360 400 500 520 550 630 660 700 740 820
SP110
SP140
Down
—
—
3-1) Cooling fan control
The outdoor fan is controlled by TL sensor, TO sensor and the operation frequency.
The outdoor fan is controlled by every 1 tap of DC fan control (14 taps).
Only for 60 seconds after the operation has started, the maximum fan tap corresponding to the
zone in the following table is fixed and then the fan is controlled by temperature of TL sensor.
‚
TL [˚C]
20 Hz
20Hz
45Hz
WE tap
or lower
to 45Hz
or higher
Temp. range
58
55
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
38°C ≤ TO
29°C ≤ TO < 38°C
15°C ≤ TO < 29°C
5°C ≤ TO < 15°C
0°C ≤ TO < 5°C
–4°C ≤ TO < 0°C
TO < –4°C
W6
W5
W4
W3
W2
W2
W1
W1
WC
WB
W8
W6
W4
W3
W2
WC
W8
WC
WA
WD
WC
WC
WA
W8
W6
W6
WD
W7 WC∗ W9
+1 tap / 20 sec
Up to the maximum
revolution frequency of each zone
W6
W5
W4
W3
W1
W1
WA
W8
W6
W5
W4
WC
W8
W7
W5
W4
W2
W2
38
35
Revolution frequency hold
–1 tap / 20 sec
Up to the minimum
revolution frequency of each zone
TO error
* : WB for SP110
3-2) Heating fan control
The outdoor fan is controlled by TE sensor, TO sensor and the operation frequency.
(Control from minimum W1 to maximum (according to the following table))
For 3 minutes after the operation has started, the maximum fan tap corresponding to the zone in
the following table is fixed and then the fan is controlled by temperature of TE sensor.
‚
When TE ≥ 24°C continues for 5 minutes, the
compressor stops.
TE [˚C]
ƒ
–2 taps / 20 sec. (Up to W1)
It is the same status as the normal thermostat-
OFF without error display.
Stop timer count
24
21
18
15
The compressor restarts after approx. 2 minutes
30 seconds and this intermittent operation is not
abnormal.
–2 taps / 20 sec. (Up to W1)
–1 tap / 20 sec. (Up to W1)
Revolution frequency hold
In case that the status in item
generates
„
ƒ
frequently, stain on filter of the suction part of the
indoor unit is considered.
+1 tap / 20 sec
(Up to the maximum tap of each zone)
Clean the filter and then restart the operation.
Object: SP140
Object: SP110
20 Hz
or lower
20Hz
to 45Hz
45Hz
or higher
20 Hz
or lower
20Hz
to 45Hz
45Hz
or higher
Temp. range
Temp. range
Max.
W7
Max.
W8
Max.
W9
Max.
W7
Max.
W8
Max.
W9
10°C ≤ TO
5°C ≤ TO < 10°C
–3°C ≤ TO < 5°C
–10°C ≤ TO < –3°C
TO < –10°C
10°C ≤ TO
W9
WA
WB
WC
WD
WD
WB
WC
WC
WD
WD
5°C ≤ TO < 10°C
–3°C ≤ TO < 5°C
–10°C ≤ TO < –3°C
TO < –10°C
W9
WA
WA
WB
WD
WD
WA
WB
WB
WD
WD
WB
WC
WD
WD
WA
WB
WD
WD
TO error
TO error
– 79 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Coil heating control
1) This control function heats the compressor by turning on the stopped compressor instead of a case heater.
It purposes to prevent stagnation of the refrigerant inside of the compressor.
2) As usual, turn on power of the compressor for the specified time before a test run after installation;
otherwise a trouble of the compressor may be caused.
As same as a test run, it is recommended to turn on power of the compressor beforehand when starting
operation after power of the compressor has been interrupted and left as it is for a long time.
3) A judgment for electricity is performed by TD and TO sensors.
If TO sensor is defective, a backup control is automatically performed by TE sensor.
For a case of defective TO sensor, judge it with outdoor LED display.
4) For every model, the power is turned off when TD is 30°C or more.
(Normal time)
(In defective TO sensor)
TO
TE
18˚C
20˚C
No power
No power
15˚C
10˚C
8˚C
18˚C
12˚C
10˚C
Intermittent power-ON
Intermittent power-ON
10 minutes: ON /
5 minutes: OFF
Output
• Power-ON
condition
TD<30˚C
• Power-ON
condition
TD < 30˚C
10 minutes: ON /
5 minutes: OFF
Output
[40W or equivalent]
[40W or equivalent]
Continuous power-ON
Output
[40W or equivalent]
Continuous power-ON
Output
[40W or equivalent]
REQUIREMENT
While heating the coil, the power sound may be heard. However it is not a trouble.
5. Short intermittent operation preventive control
1) For 3 to 10 minutes after operation start, in some cases, the compressor does not stop to protect the
compressor even if receiving the thermostat-OFF signal from indoor.
However it is not abnormal status. (The operation continuance differs according to the operation status.)
2) When the operation stops by the remote controller, the operation does not continue.
6. Current release control
No. of revolutions of the compressor is controlled by AC current value detected by T620 on the outdoor P.C.
board so that the input current of the inverter does not exceed the specified value.
Current [A]
Frequency down
SP110 / SP140
Objective model
COOL
HEAT
1
Hold
Hold
I1 value [A]
20.0
20.0
1–1.0
Normal operation
– 80 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current release control value (I1)
7. Current release value shift control
[A]
1) This control purposes to prevent troubles of
the electronic parts such as the compressor
driving elements and the compressor during
cooling operation.
Temperature range
44°C ≤ To
SP110, SP140
15.0
17.7
20.0
15.0
39°C ≤ To < 44°C
To < 39°C
2) The current release control value (I1) is
selected from the following table according to
TO sensor value.
TO error
8. Over-current protective control
1) When the over-current protective circuit detected an abnormal current, stop the compressor.
2) The compressor restarts after 2 minutes 30 seconds setting [1] as an error count.
3) When the error count [8] was found, determine an error and restart operation is not performed.
4) For the error display contents, confirm on the check code list.
9. High-pressure release control
1) The operation frequency is controlled to restrain abnormal rising of high pressure by TL sensor in
cooling operation and TC sensor in heating operation.
2) When TL sensor in cooling operation or TC sensor in heating operation detects abnormal temperature of
the stop zone, stop the compressor and the error count becomes +1.
3) When the compressor stopped with 2), the operation restarts from the point of the normal operation
zone (e point or lower) where it returned after 2 minutes 30 seconds.
4) The error count when the compressor stopped with 2) is cleared after the operation continued for
10 minutes.
If the error count becomes [10] without clearing, the error is determined and reactivation is not performed.
5) For the error display contents, confirm on the check code list.
HEAT TC / COOL TL
HEAT
TC
COOL
TL
[˚C]
Abnormal stop
Frequency normal down
Frequency slow down
Frequency hold
a
a
b
c
d
e
62°C
57°C
55°C
53°C
49°C
63°C
62°C
60°C
58°C
54°C
b
c
d
e
Abnormal stop
Frequency slow up (Up to command)
As command is
– 81 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Defrost control
1) In heating operation, defrost operation is performed when TE sensor satisfies any condition in A zone to
D zone.
2) During defrosting operation, it finishes if TE sensor continued 12°C or higher for 3 seconds or continued
7°C ≤ TE < 12°C for 1 minute.
The defrost operation also finishes when it continued for 10 minutes even if TE sensor temperature was
7°C or lower.
3) After defrost operation was reset, the compressor stopped for approx. 40 seconds and then the heating
operation starts.
Start of heating operation
TE [˚C]
[min.]
0
10
15
39 45
55
d
–2
–5
A zone
–10
B zone
D zone
–23
C zone
∗
∗ The minimum TE value and To value between 10 and 15 minutes after heating operation has started
are stored in memory as TE0 and To0, respectively.
In normal To
In abnormal To
When status (TE0 – TE) – (To0 – To) ≥ 3°C
When status (TE0 – TE) ≥ 3°C
A zone
B zone
continued for 20 seconds
continued for 20 seconds
When status (TE0 – TE) – (To0 – To) ≥ 2°C
When status (TE0 – TE) ≥ 2°C
continued for 20 seconds
continued for 20 seconds
C zone
D zone
When status (TE ≤ –23°C) continued for 20 seconds
When compressor operation status of TE < –2°C is calculated by d portion
4) The time of above d can be changed by
exchanging jumper [J805] and [J806] of the
outdoor control P.C. board.
J805
J806
d
150 minutes
Setting at shipment
¡
¡
(Setting at shipment: 150 minutes)
90 minutes
60 minutes
30 minutes
¡
×
×
×
¡
×
: Short circuit,
: Open
¡
×
– 82 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of RAV-SP40 and SP45 models>
1. Pulse Motor Valve (PMV) control
1) For PMV with 50 to 500 pulses during operation, respectively.
2) In cooling operation, PMV is controlled with the temperature difference between TS sensor and TC sensor.
3) In heating operation, PMV is controlled with the temperature difference between TS sensor and TE sensor.
4) For the temperature difference in items 2) and 3), 1 to 5K is aimed as the target in both cooling and
heating operations.
5) When the cycle excessively rose in both cooling and heating operations, PMV is controlled by TD sensor.
The aimed value is usually 106°C in both cooling and heating operations.
REQUIREMENT
A sensor trouble may cause a liquid back-flow or abnormal overheat resulting in excessive shortening of the
compressor life. In a case of trouble on the compressor, be sure to check there is no error in the resistance
value an the refrigerating cycle of each sensor after repair and then start the operation.
2. Discharge temperature release control
1) This function controls the operation
frequency, that is, lowers the operation
TD [˚C]
frequency when the discharge temperature
has not lower or the discharge temperature
has rapidly risen during PMV control.
Error stop
(“P03” display with 8 times error count)
It subdivides the frequency control up to a
unit of 0.6 Hz to stabilize the cycle.
2) When the discharge temperature is detected
in an abnormal stop zone, the unit stops the
compressor and restarts after 2 minutes
30 seconds.
117
Frequency down
107
103
100
93
Frequency slow-down
Frequency holding
The error counter is cleared when it has
continued the operation for 6 minutes.
Frequency slow-up
(Up to command)
If the abnormal stop zone has been detected
by 8 times without clearing of counter, an
error “P03” is displayed.
∗ The cause is considered as excessively
little amount of refrigerant, defective PMV,
or clogging of cycle.
As command is
3. Current release control
Current [A]
The output frequency and the output voltage are
controlled by AC current value detected by T02
on the outdoor P.C. board so that input current of
the inverter does not exceed the specified value.
Frequency down
I1
Hold
SP40, SP45
Hold
Normal operation
I1–0.5
Objective model
COOL
HEAT
I1 value [A]
10.13
10.50
– 83 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Outdoor fan control
Allocations of fan tap revolutions [rpm]
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W9
WA
WB WC WD
WE
WF
SP40, SP45
200 300 350 410 480 500 560 640 670 700 750 800 800 840 840
1) Cooling fan control
The outdoor fan is controlled by TE, TD, and TO sensors and also revolution frequency of the operation.
The outdoor is controlled by every 1 tap of DC fan control (15 taps).
Only during 60 seconds after the operation has started, the fan is fixed with the maximum fan tap
which corresponds to the zone in the following table.
‚
After then the fan is controlled by TE sensor temperature.
Considering a case that TE sensor has come out of the holder, the fan is controlled so that revolution
frequency of the fan increases regardless of TE if temperature of TD sensor has risen.
ƒ
Operation with WE
TE [˚C]
TD [˚C]
“WF”
+1 tap/20 seconds
rpm hold
85
80
75
65
32
29
Operation with
maximum tap in
each zone
–1 tap/20 seconds
Usual fan control
f < 34.1Hz
Min.
34.1Hz ≤ f < 58.6Hz
58.6Hz ≤ f
Temp. range
Max.
WB
WA
W7
W5
W3
W2
Min.
W8
W7
W5
W4
W3
W2
OFF
W1
Max.
WD
WC
W9
W7
W5
W4
W3
WF
Min.
Max.
WF
WF
WB
W9
W7
W5
W4
WF
38°C ≤ TO
W6
W5
W3
W2
W1
W1
WA
W9
W7
W6
W4
W3
W1
W1
32 ≤ TO < 38°C
15 ≤ TO < 32°C
5 ≤ TO < 15°C
1 ≤ TO < 5°C
–5 ≤ TO < 1°C
TO < –5°C
OFF
TO error
W1
WF
– 84 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2) Heating fan control
The outdoor fan is controlled by TE sensor, TO sensor and the operation frequency.
(From Min. W1 to Max. are controlled according to the following table.)
During 3 minutes after start-up, the fan is fixed
with the maximum fan tap corresponding to zone
‚
in the following table.
TE [˚C]
After then the fan is controlled by temperature of
TE sensor.
–2 tap/20 seconds
STOP timer count
24
If status, TE > 24°C continues for 5 minutes, the
ƒ
–2 tap/20 seconds
–1 tap/20 seconds
rpm hold
operation stops.
21
This status is same to the usual Thermo-OFF
which has no alarm display, and the fan restarts
after 2 minutes and 30 seconds.
18
This intermittent operation is not abnormal.
15
When the above status
occurs frequently, it is
+1 tap/20 seconds
„
‚
considered that the filter of suction part of the
indoor unit is stain.
Clean the filter and then restart the operation.
Temp. range
10°C ≤ TO
f < 38.9Hz
38.9Hz ≤ f < 67.6Hz
67.6Hz ≤ f
W7
WA
WE
WE
WE
W8
WB
WF
WF
WF
W9
WD
WF
WF
WF
5 ≤ TO < 10°C
–5 ≤ TO < 5°C
TO < –5°C
Maximum
TO error
5. Coil heating control
1) This control function heats the compressor by turning on the stopped compressor instead of a case heater.
It purposes to prevent slackness of the refrigerant inside of the compressor.
2) As usual, turn on power of the compressor for the specified time before a test run after installation,
otherwise a trouble of the compressor may be caused.
As same as a test run, it is recommended to turn on power of the compressor beforehand when starting
operation after power of the compressor has been interrupted for a long time.
3) Coil heating is controlled by TD and TE sensor.
4) The power is turned off when TD is 30°C or more.
TE [˚C]
No power-ON
0
SP40, SP45
–1
Continuous ON (L)
–6
–7
L
10W and equivalent
30W and equivalent
H
Continuous ON (H)
– 85 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Defrost control
In heating operation, defrost operation is performed when TE sensor temperature satisfies any condition
in A zone to C zone.
The defrost operation is immediately finished if TE sensor temperature has become 12°C or more, or it
also is finished when condition of 5°C < TE < 12°C has continued for 80 seconds.
‚
The defrost operation is also finished when defrost operation has continued for 15 minutes even if TE
sensor temperature has become 5°C or lower.
After defrost operation has finished, the compressor and the outdoor fan start heating operation after
stopped for approx. 40 seconds.
ƒ
Start of heating operation
0
10
15
29
35
[min.]
TE [˚C]
–4
A zone
–6
–10
D zone
B zone
C zone
–25
*
* The minimum TE value between 10 and 15 minutes after heating operation has started is stored in memory as TE0.
A zone
B zone
C zone
Defrost operation is performed in this zone when TE0-TE > 2.5 continued for 20 seconds.
Defrost operation is performed in this zone when TE0-TE > 3 continued for 20 seconds.
Defrost operation is performed when this zone continued for 20 seconds.
– 86 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10-1. Summary ofTroubleshooting
<Wired remote controller type>
1. Before troubleshooting
1) Required tools/instruments
+
–
•
and
screwdrivers, spanners, radio cutting pliers, nippers, push pins for reset switch
• Tester, thermometer, pressure gauge, etc.
2) Confirmation points before check
a) The following operations are normal.
1. Compressor does not operate.
• Is not 3-minutes delay (3 minutes after compressor OFF)?
• Is not the outdoor unit in standby status though the remote controller reached the setup
temperature?
• Does not timer operate during fan operation?
• Is not an overflow error detected on the indoor unit?
• Is not outside high-temperature operation controlled in heating operation?
2. Indoor fan does not rotate.
• Does not cool air discharge preventive control work in heating operation?
3. Outdoor fan does not rotate or air volume changes.
• Does not high-temperature release operation control work in heating operation?
• Does not outside low-temperature operation control work in cooling operation?
• Is not defrost operation performed?
4. ON/OFF operation cannot be performed from remote controller.
• Is not the control operation performed from outside/remote side?
• Is not automatic address being set up?
(When the power is turned on at the first time or when indoor unit address setting is changed, the
operation cannot be performed for maximum approx. 5 minutes after power-ON.)
• Is not being carried out a test run by operation of the outdoor controller?
b) Did you return the cabling to the initial positions?
c) Are connecting cables of indoor unit and remote controller correct?
2. Troubleshooting procedure
When a trouble occurred, check the parts along with the following procedure.
→
→
Trouble
Confirmation of check code display
Check defective position and parts.
NOTE :
For cause of a trouble, power conditions or malfunction/erroneous diagnosis of microcomputer due to outer
noise is considered except the items to be checked. If there is any noise source, change the cables of the
remote controller to shield cables.
– 87 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<Wireless remote controller type>
1. Before troubleshooting
1) Required tools/instruments
+
–
•
and
screwdrivers, spanners, radio cutting pliers, nippers, etc.
• Tester, thermometer, pressure gauge, etc.
2) Confirmation points before check
a) The following operations are normal.
1. Compressor does not operate.
• Is not 3-minutes delay (3 minutes after compressor OFF)?
• Is not the outdoor unit in standby status though the remote controller reached the setup
temperature?
• Does not timer operate during fan operation?
• Is not an overflow error detected on the indoor unit?
• Is not outside high-temperature operation controlled in heating operation?
2. Indoor fan does not rotate.
• Does not cool air discharge preventive control work in heating operation?
3) Outdoor fan does not rotate or air volume changes.
• Does not high-temperature release operation control work in heating operation?
• Does not outside low-temperature operation control work in cooling operation?
• Is not defrost operation performed?
4) ON/OFF operation cannot be performed from remote controller.
• Is not forced operation performed?
• Is not the control operation performed from outside/remote side?
• Is not automatic address being set up?
• Is not being carried out a test run by operation of the outdoor controller?
a) Did you return the cabling to the initial positions?
b) Are connecting cables between indoor unit and receiving unit correct?
2. Troubleshooting procedure
(When the power is turned on at the first time or when indoor unit address setting is changed, the operation
cannot be performed for maximum approx. 5 minutes after power-ON.)
When a trouble occurred, check the parts along with the following procedure.
Confirmation of lamp display
Check defective
→
→
(When 4-way air discharge cassette type
wireless remote controller is connected)
Trouble
position and parts.
1) Outline of judgment
The primary judgment to check where a trouble occurred in indoor unit or outdoor unit is performed with
the following method.
Method to judge the erroneous position by flashing indication on the display part of indoor unit
(sensors of the receiving unit)
The indoor unit monitors operating status of the air conditioner, and the blocked contents of
self-diagnosis are displayed restricted to the following cases if a protective circuit works.
– 88 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
10-2. Troubleshooting
10-2-1. Outline of judgment
The primary judgment to check whether a trouble occurred in the indoor unit or outdoor unit is carried out with
the following method.
Method to judge the erroneous position by flashing indication on the display part of the indoor unit
(sensors of the receiving part)
The indoor unit monitors the operating status of the air conditioner, and the blocked contents of self-diagnosis
are displayed restricted to the following cases if a protective circuit works.
: Go off,
: Go on,
: Flash (0.5 sec.)
Lamp indication
Operation Timer Ready
Check code
Cause of trouble occurrence
—
Power supply OFF or miswiring between receiving unit and indoor unit
No indication at all
E01
E02
E03
E08
E09
E10
Receiving error
Receiving unit
Miswiring or wire connection error
Sending error
between receiving unit and indoor unit
Communication stop
Operation Timer
Ready
Duplicated indoor unit No.
Setup error
Duplicated master units of remote controller
Flash
Communication error between CPUs on indoor unit P.C. board
Wire connection error between indoor units, Indoor power OFF
(Communication stop between indoor master and follower or between main
and sub indoor twin)
E18
E04
Operation Timer
Operation Timer
Ready
Miswiring between indoor unit and outdoor unit or connection erorr
(Communication stop between indoor and outdoor units)
Flash
Ready
P10
P12
Overflow was detected.
Protective device of indoor unit worked.
Indoor DC fan error
Alternate flash
P03
P04
P05
P07
P15
P19
P20
P22
P26
P29
Outdoor unit discharge temp. error
Outdoor high pressure system error
Protective device of
outdoor unit worked.
∗1
Negative phase detection error
Heat sink overheat error
Gas leak detection error
Outdoor unit error
Operation Timer
Ready
4-way valve system error (Indoor or outdoor unit judged.)
Outdoor unit high pressure protection
Alternate flash
Outdoor unit: Outdoor unit error
Protective device of
outdoor unit worked.
Outdoor unit: Inverter Idc operation
Outdoor unit: Position detection error
∗1
Stopped because of error of other indoor unit in a group
(Check codes of E03/L03/L07/L08)
P31
∗1: These are representative examples and the check code differs according to the outdoor unit to be combined.
– 89 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Lamp indication
Operation Timer
Check code
F01
Cause of trouble occurrence
Ready
Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ) error
Heat exchanger sensor (TC) error
Heat exchanger sensor (TA) error
F02
Indoor unit sensor error
Alternate flash
P10
F04
Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error
Temp. sensor (TE) error
F06
Operation Timer
Alternate flash
Ready
F07
Temp. sensor (TL) error
F08
Temp. sensor (TO) error
Sensor error of outdoor unit
∗1
Temp. sensor (TS) error
F12
Temp. sensor (TH) error
F13
Temp. Sensor miswiring (TE, TS)
F15
Operation Timer
Ready
Ready
F29
F31
Indoor EEPROM error
Outdoor EEPROM error
Simultaneous flash
Operation Timer
Simultaneous flash
Operation Timer
Flash
H01
H02
H03
H04
H06
Compressor break down
Compressor lock
Ready
Current detection circuit error
Case thermostat worked.
Outdoor compressor system error ∗1
Outdoor unit low pressure system error
L03
L07
L08
L09
Duplicated master indoor units
There is indoor unit of group connection → AUTO address
in individual indoor unit.
Operation Timer
Ready
* If group construction and
Unsetting of group address
address are not normal
when power supply turned on,
automatically goes to address
setup mode.
Missed setting
(Unset indoor capacity)
Simultaneous flash
L10
L20
L29
L30
L31
Unset model type (Service board)
Duplicated indoor central addresses
Outdoor unit and other error
Outside interlock error
Operation Timer
Ready
Others
Simultaneous flash
Negative phase error
∗1: These are representative examples and the check code differs according to the outdoor unit to be combined.
– 90 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
10-2-2. Others (Other than Check Code)
Lamp indication
Operation Timer Ready
Check code
Cause of trouble occurrence
—
During test run
Simultaneous flash
Operation Timer Ready
Disagreement of cool/heat
(Automatic cool/heat setting to automatic cool/heat prohibited model, or
—
setting of heating to cooling-only model)
Alternate flash
– 91 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
ALT (Alternate): Alternate flashing when there are two flashing LED SIM (Simultaneous): Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED
Air conditioner operation
10-2-3. Check Code List (Indoor)
: Go on,
: Flash, l : Go off
¡
¥
(Indoor unit detected)
Check code indication
Sensor lamp indication
Block indication
Representative defective position
Explanation of error contents
TCC-LINK central &
Wired remote controller
Automatic
reset
Operation
continuation
Operation Timer Ready Flash
Regular communication error between indoor and
remote controller
No communication from remote controller and network adapter
(Also no communication from central control system)
E03
¥
¡
×
l
l
E04
E08
E10
Indoor/Outdoor serial error
There is error on serial communication between indoor and outdoor units
Same address as yours was detected.
¥
l
l
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
l
¥
¥
l
l
l
Duplicated indoor addresses
²
Communication error between indoor MCU
MCU communication error between main motor and micro computer
Regular communication error between
indoor master and follower units
Regular communication between indoor master and follower units is impossible,
Communication between twin master (main) and follower (sub) units is impossible.
E18
¥
¡
×
l
l
F01
F02
F10
F29
L03
L07
L08
L09
L20
L30
P01
P10
P12
P19
P31
ALT
ALT
ALT
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
Indoor unit, Heat exchanger (TCJ) error
Indoor unit, Heat exchanger (TC) error
Indoor unit, Room temp. sensor (TA) error
Indoor unit, other indoor P.C. board error
Duplicated setting of indoor group master unit
There is group cable in individual indoor unit.
Unset indoor group address
Open/short was detected on heat exchanger (TCJ).
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
×
¡
×
×
×
×
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
Open/short was detected on heat exchanger (TC).
Open/short was detected on room temp. sensor (TA).
EEPROM error (Other error may be detected. If no error, automatic address is repeated.
There are multiple master units in a group.
²
²
²
When even one group connection indoor unit exists in individual indoor unit.
Indoor group address is unset.
Unset indoor capacity
Capacity of indoor unit is unset.
Duplicated central control system address
Outside error input to indoor unit (Interlock)
Indoor unit, AC fan error
Duplicated setting of central control system address
Abnormal stop by outside error (CN80) input
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
An error of indoor AC fan was detected. (Fan motor thermal relay worked.)
Float switch worked.
Indoor unit, overflow detection
Indoor unit, DC fan error
Indoor DC fan error (Over-current/Lock, etc.) was detected.
In heating operation, an error was detected by temp. down of indoor heat exchanger sensor.
Follower unit in group cannot operate by warning from [E03/L03/L07/L08] of master unit.
4-way valve system error
Other indoor unit error
When this warning was detected before group construction/address check finish at power supply was turned on, the mode shifts automatically to AUTO address setup mode.
²
(Remote controller detected)
Check code indication
Sensor lamp indication
Air conditioner operation
Block indication
Representative defective position
Explanation of error contents
Automatic
reset
Operation
continuation
Wired remote controller
Operation Timer Ready Flash
No master remote controller, Remote controller
communication (Receive) error
Signal cannot be received from indoor unit. Master remote controller was not set.
(including 2 remote controllers)
E01
E02
E09
—
—
×
—
—
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
Remote controller communication (Send) error
Signal cannot be sent to indoor unit.
¥
¥
In 2-remote controller control, both were set as master. (Indoor master unit stops warning
and follower unit continues operation.)
Duplicated master remote controller
(Central control devices detected)
Check code indication
Sensor lamp indication
Block indication
Air conditioner operation
Representative defective position
Explanation of error contents
Automatic
reset
Operation
continuation
TCC-LINK central
Operation Timer Ready Flash
Signal sending operation of central control system is impossible.
There are multiple same central devices. (AI-NET)
Is not displayed.
(Common use of
C05
C06
C12
—
—
—
—
—
—
Central control system communication (send) error
Central control system communication (receive) error
General-purpose device control interface batched warning
remote controller, etc.)
Signal receiving operation of central control system is impossible.
An error on device connected to general-purpose device control interface of exclusive to
TCC-LINK/AI-NET
—
By warning unit
(Above-mentioned)
Group follower unit is defective.
(For remote controller, above-mentioned [∗∗∗] details are displayed with unit No.
P30
—
—
Group follower unit is defective.
NOTE: Even for the same contents of error such as communication error, the display of check code may differ according to detection device.
When remote controller or central controller detects an error, it is not necessarily related to operation of the air conditioner. In this list, the check codes that outdoor unit detects are not described.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Check Code List (Outdoor)
: Go on,
: Flash, l : Go off
¡
¥
ALT (Alternate): Alternate flashing when there are two flashing LED SIM (Simultaneous): Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED
Sensor lamp part
Remote
Automatic
reset
Operation
continuation
controller
indication
Block indication
Operation Timer Ready Flash
ALT
Representative defective position
Detection
Explanation of error contents
Open/Short of discharge temp. sensor was detected.
F04
F06
Outdoor unit Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TE, TS, TL) error
Outdoor
Outdoor
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
¡
Open/Short of heat exchanger temp. sensor was detected.
Miswiring between TE sensor and TS sensor
ALT
F08
F07
F12
F13
F15
F31
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
SIM
Outdoor unit Outside temp. sensor (TO) error
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TL) error
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TS) error
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TH) error
Outdoor unit Misconnection of temp. sensor (TE, TS)
Outdoor unit EEPROM error
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Open/Short of outside temp. sensor was detected.
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
×
¡
×
×
×
×
×
Open/Short of heat exchanger temp. sensor was detected.
Open/Short of suction temp. sensor was detected.
Open/Short of heat sink temp. sensor (Board installed) was detected.
Misconnection of outdoor heat exchanger temp. sensor and suction temp. sensor was detected.
Outdoor P.C. board part (EEPROM) error was detected.
When reached min-Hz by current release control, short-circuited current (Idc) after
DC excitation was detected.
H01
Outdoor unit Compressor break down
×
×
¥
l
l
H02
H03
H04
L10
Outdoor unit Compressor lock
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Compressor lock was detected.
¥
¥
¥
¡
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
l
l
l
¥
l
l
l
¥
Outdoor unit Current detection circuit error
Outdoor unit Case thermostat operation
Outdoor unit Setting error of service P.C. board type
Current detection circuit error
Case thermostat operation was detected.
SIM
SIM
When outdoor service P.C. board was used, model type select jumper setting was inappropriate.
1) Defective parts on outdoor P.C. board (MCU communication, EEPROM, TH sensor error)
2) When outdoor service P.C. board was used, model type selection was inappropriate.
3) Other error (Heat sink abnormal overheat, gas leak, 4-way valve inverse error) was detected.
L29
Outdoor unit Other outdoor unit error
Outdoor unit Discharge temp. error
Outdoor
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¡
¥
P03
P04
ALT
ALT
Outdoor
Outdoor
Error was detected by discharge temp. release control.
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
Outdoor unit
When case thermostat worked, error was detected by high release control from indoor/
outdoor heat exchanger temp. sensor. Power supply voltage error
High pressure system error, Power supply voltage error
P05
P07
P15
P20
P22
P26
P29
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
Power supply error
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Power supply voltage error
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Outdoor unit Heat sink overheat
Gas leak detection
Abnormal overheat was detected by outdoor heat sink temp. sensor.
Abnormal overheat of discharge temp. or suction temp. was detected.
Error was detected by high release control from indoor/outdoor heat exchanger temp. sensor.
Error (Over-current, lock, etc.) was detected on outdoor fan drive circuit.
Short-circuited protective operation of compressor drive circuit element (G-Tr /IGBT) worked.
Position detection error of compressor motor was detected.
Outdoor unit High pressure system error
Outdoor unit Outdoor fan error
Outdoor unit Inverter Idc operation
Outdoor unit Position detection error
No remote controller master unit
Remote controller communication error
Remote
controller
Signal was not received from indoor unit.
Main remote controller was not set. (including 2 remote controllers)
E01
E02
E03
—
—
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
Remote
controller
Remote controller send error
Signal cannot be sent to indoor unit.
—
—
Regular communication error between indoor and
remote controller
Indoor
No communication from remote controller and network adapter
¡
×
×
l
¥
l
E04
E08
Indoor/Outdoor serial error
Indoor
Indoor
Serial communication error between indoor and outdoor
Same address as yours was detected.
¡
¡
l
¥
l
l
Duplicated indoor addresses
²
Remote
controller
In 2-remote controller control, both were set as master.
(Indoor master unit stops warning and follower unit continues operation.)
E09
E10
E18
Duplicated main remote controllers
Communication error between CPU
×
¡
¡
×
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
Indoor
MCU communication error between main motor and micro computer
Regular communication error between master and
follower indoor units
Regular communication was impossible between master and follower indoor units.
Communication between twin master (Main unit) and follower (sub unit) was impossible.
Indoor
×
L03
L07
L08
L09
L30
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
Duplicated indoor master units
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
There are multiple master units in a group.
When even one group connection indoor unit exists in individual indoor unit
Indoor address group was unset.
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
²
²
²
l
l
l
l
¡
There is group cable in individual indoor unit.
Unset indoor group address
Unset indoor capacity
Capacity of indoor unit was unset.
Outside error input to indoor unit (Interlock)
Abnormal stop by CN80 outside error input
Indoor
Outdoor
P19
ALT
4-way valve inverse error
In heating operation, error was detected by temp. down of indoor heat exchanger or temp. up ofTE, TS.
¡
×
¥
¥
l
When this warning was detected before group construction/address check finish at power supply was turned on, the mode shifts automatically to AUTO address setup mode.
²
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
: Go on,
: Flash, l : Go off
¡
¥
ALT (Alternate): Alternate flashing when there are two flashing LED SIM (Simultaneous): Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED
Sensor lamp part
Block indication
Remote
controller
indication
Automatic
reset
Operation
continuation
Representative defective position
Detection
Explanation of error contents
Open/Short of heat exchanger (TCJ) was detected.
Operation Timer Ready Flash
ALT
F01
F02
F10
F29
P01
P10
P12
P31
Indoor unit Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ) error
Indoor unit Heat exchanger sensor (TC) error
Indoor unit Room temp. sensor (TA) error
Indoor unit Other indoor P.C. board error
Indoor unit Indoor fan error
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
¡
—
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
—
l
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
ALT
ALT
SIM
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
Open/Short of heat exchanger (TC) was detected.
Open/Short of room temp. (TA) was detected.
EEPROM error (Other error may be detected. If no error, automatic address is repeated.
Indoor AC fan error was detected. (Fan thermal relay worked.)
Float switch worked.
Indoor unit Overflow detection
Indoor unit Indoor fan error
Indoor fan error (Over-current / Lock, etc.) was detected.
Other indoor under condition of warning in group. E03/L07/L03/L08 warning
Other indoor unit error
Sub remote controller error in a group
(Details of remote controller are displayed with unit No. Only central control side is displayed.)
—
—
By unit with warning No.
ALT
Error in indoor group
Network adapter
Network adapter/
Center
Communication error of central control system signal
∗ Is not displayed on the remote controller
—
LAN system communication error
¡
¡
Network adapter/
Center
L20
—
SIM
LAN system communication error
Duplicated indoor address of central control system communication
¥
¡
¥
¡
¡
×
¡
—
There are multiple communication adapters.
Network adapter
There are multiple communication adapters on remote controller communication line.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Error mode detected by indoor unit
Operation of diagnostic function
Judgment and measures
Check
code
Status of
air conditioner
Cause of operation
Condition
1. Check cables of remote controller and communication adapters.
• Remote controller LCD display OFF (Disconnection)
• Central remote controller [97] check code
No communication from remote
controller (including wireless) and
communication adapter
Stop
Displayed when
E03
(Automatic reset) error is detected
The serial signal is not output from
outdoor unit to indoor unit.
1. Outdoor unit does not completely operate.
• Inter-unit wire check, correction of miswiring
• Check outdoor P.C. board. Correct wiring of P.C. board.
• Miswiring of inter-unit wire
Stop
Displayed when
E04
• Defective serial sending circuit on
outdoor P.C. board
(Automatic reset) error is detected
2. When outdoor unit normally operates
Check P.C. board (Indoor receiving / Outdoor sending).
• Defective serial receiving circuit on
indoor P.C. board
E08
L03
Duplicated indoor unit address
Duplicated indoor master unit
1. Check whether remote controller connection (Group/Individual)
was changed or not after power supply turned on
(Finish of group construction/Address check).
Displayed when
error is detected
* If group construction and address are not normal when the
power has been turned on, the mode automatically shifts to
address setup mode. (Resetting of address)
Stop
There is group wire in individual indoor
unit.
L07
L08
L09
Unset indoor group address
Unset indoor capacity
Displayed when 1. Set indoor capacity (DN=11)
error is detected
Stop
Stop
Displayed when 1. Check outside devices.
L30
P10
Abnormal input of outside interlock
error is detected
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
1. Trouble of drain pump
Float switch operation
Displayed when 2. Clogging of drain pump
Stop
• Float circuit, Disconnection,
Coming-off, Float switch contact error
error is detected
3. Check float switch.
4. Check indoor P.C. board.
1. Position detection error
Displayed when 2. Over-current protective circuit of indoor fan driving unit operated.
P12
P19
Indoor DC fan error
Stop
Stop
error is detected
3. Indoor fan locked.
4. Check indoor P.C. board.
1. Check 4-way valve.
4-way valve system error
Displayed when 2. Check 2-way valve and check valve.
• After heating operation has started,
indoor heat exchangers temp. is
down.
(Automatic reset) error is detected
3. Check indoor heat exchanger (TC/TCJ).
4. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
1. Judge follower unit while master unit is [E03], [L03], [L07] or [L08].
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
Own unit stops while warning is output
to other indoor units.
Displayed when
(Follower unit)
error is detected
(Automatic reset)
P31
F01
F02
Coming-off, disconnection or short of
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor
(TCJ)
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TCJ).
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
Displayed when
(Automatic reset) error is detected
Coming-off, disconnection or short of
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor
(TC)
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TC).
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
Displayed when
(Automatic reset) error is detected
Coming-off, disconnection or short of
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor
(TA)
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TA).
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
Displayed when
F10
F29
(Automatic reset) error is detected
Indoor EEPROM error
Stop
Displayed when 1. Check indoor EEPROM. (including socket insertion)
(Automatic reset) error is detected
• EEPROM access error
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
Communication error between indoor
MCU
1. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
Displayed when
E10
E18
(Automatic reset) error is detected
• Communication error between fan
driving MCU and main MCU
1. Check remote controller wiring.
2. Check indoor power supply wiring.
3. Check indoor P.C. board.
Regular communication error between
indoor aster and follower units and
between main and sub units
Stop
Displayed when
(Automatic reset) error is detected
– 95 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Error mode detected by remote controller or central controller (TCC-LINK)
Operation of diagnostic function
Judgment and measures
Status of
air conditioner
Check code
Cause of operation
Condition
Power supply error of remote controller, Indoor
EEPROM error
1. Check remote controller inter-unit wiring.
2. Check remote controller.
No communication with master indoor unit
• Remote controller wiring is not correct.
• Power of indoor unit is not turned on.
• Automatic address cannot be completed.
Not displayed at all
(Operation on
remote controller
is impossible.)
3. Check indoor power wiring.
4. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
—
5. Check indoor EEPROM.
(including socket insertion)
→ Automatic address repeating phenom-
enon generates.
Receiving error from remote controller
1. Check remote controller inter-unit wiring.
2. Check remote controller.
No communication with master indoor unit
Stop
(Automatic reset)
E01
• Disconnection of inter-unit wire between
remote controller and master indoor unit
(Detected by remote controller side)
Displayed when
error is detected
∗ If center exists,
∗2
3. Check indoor power wiring.
operation continues.
4. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
Sending error of remote controller
(Automatic reset)
Signal send error to indoor unit
(Detected by remote controller side)
Displayed when 1. Check sending circuit inside of remote
E02
∗ If center exists,
error is detected
controller.
operation continues.
→ Replace remote controller.
1. In 2-remote controllers (including wireless),
there are multiple main units.
Stop
(Sub unit
continues operation.)
There are multiple main remote controllers.
(Detected by remote controller side)
Displayed when
error is detected
E09
L20
Check that there are 1 main remote
controller and other sub remote controllers.
1. Check setting of central control system
network address. (Network adapter SW01)
Duplicated indoor central addresses on
communication of central control system
(Detected by indoor/central controller side)
Stop
(Automatic reset)
Displayed when
error is detected
Central controller
L20
2. Check network adapter P.C. board.
—
1. Check communication wire / miswiring
2. Check communication (U3, U4 terminals)
3. Check network adapter P.C. board.
∗3
Communication circuit error of central
control system
(Detected by central controller side)
Continues
Displayed when
Central controller
(Send)
4. Check central controller (such as central
control remote controller, etc.)
(By remote controller) error is detected
C05
(Receive)
C06
5. Check terminal resistance. (TCC-LINK)
—
Continuation/Stop
(According
to each case)
Indoor Gr sub unit error
(Detected by central controller side)
Displayed when Check the check code of the corresponding
error is detected unit from remote controller.
Central controller
P30
∗2 The check code cannot be displayed by the wired remote controller.
(Usual operation of air conditioner becomes unavailable.)
For the wireless models, an error is notified with indication lamp.
∗3 This trouble is related to communication of remote controller (A, B), central system (TCC-LINK U3, U4), and
[E01], [E02], [E03], [E09] or [E18] is displayed or no check display on the remote controller according to the
contents.
– 96 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Error mode detected by outdoor unit
The check code has been ramified from 4 series and after.
The ramified check code is displayed only when both the indoor unit and the outdoor unit are 4 series and after.
(Ex. Combination of RAV-SM1404UT-E with RAV-SP1404AT-E)
When the indoor unit is 3 series and before, the conventional check code is displayed.
(Ex. Combination of RAV-SM1402BT-E and RAV-SP1404AT-E: Outdoor unit only is 4 series.)
Operation of diagnostic function
Check code
Judgment and measures
Indoor unit
Status of
air conditioner
Cause of operation
Condition
before
after
3 series 4 series
1. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD).
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.
Disconnection, short of discharge
temp. sensor (TD)
Displayed when
error is detected
F04
F06
F04
F06
F07
F12
F15
F08
Stop
Stop
1. Check temp. sensor (TE).
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.
Disconnection, short of outdoor temp.
sensor (TE)
Displayed when
error is detected
1. Check temp. sensor (TL).
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.
Disconnection, short of outdoor temp.
sensor (TL)
Displayed when
error is detected
Stop
1. Check suction temp. sensor (TS).
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.
Disconnection, short of suction temp.
sensor (TS)
Displayed when
error is detected
Stop
1. Check temp. sensor (TE, TS).
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.
Miss-mounting of outdoor temp.
sensor (TE, TS)
Displayed when
error is detected
Stop
1. Check outside temp. sensor (TO).
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.
Disconnection, short of outside temp.
sensor (TO)
Displayed when
error is detected
F08
L29
Continue
Disconnection, short of heat sink
temp. sensor (TH)
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor P.C. board.
error is detected
F13
F31
L10
L29
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor P.C. board.
error is detected
Outdoor P.C. EEPROM error
Displayed when 1. Outdoor service P.C. board
Unset jumper of service P.C. board
error is detected
Check model type setting jumper wire.
Communication error between
outdoor P.C. board MCU
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor P.C. board.
error is detected
Heat sink overheat error
1. Check screw tightening between PC. Board and heat
sink and check radiator grease.
Displayed when
error is detected
P07
P15
Stop
Stop
∗ Heat sink temp. sensor detected
over specified temperature.
2. Check heat sink blast path.
1. Check gas leak, recharge
2. Check full open of service valve.
3. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).
4. Check broken pipe.
Detection of gas leak
Displayed when
error is detected
∗ Discharge temp. sensor (TD),
Suction temp. sensor (TS) detected
temperature over specified temp.
5. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD), suction temp.
sensor (TS).
4-way valve inverse error
1. Check operation of 4-way valve.
∗ After heating operation has started,
indoor heat exchanger temp. lowers
under the specified temp.
2. Check outdoor heat exchanger (TE), suction temp.
sensor (TS).
Displayed when
P19
H01
Stop
Stop
error is detected 3. Check indoor heat exchanger sensor (TC).
4. Check 4-way valve coil.
∗ After heating operation has started,
outdoor heat exchanger / suction
temp. rises over the specified temp.
5. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).
Compressor break down
1. Check power supply voltage. (AC198 to 264V)
Displayed when
error is detected
∗ Although operation has started,
operation frequency decreases and
operation stops.
2. Overload operation of refrigerating cycle
H01
Compressor lock
1. Trouble of compressor (Lock, etc.): Replace compressor.
Displayed when
H02
H03
H02
H03
* Over-current detection after
compressor start-up
Stop
Stop
2. Wiring error of compressor (Open phase)
error is detected
Displayed when
error is detected
1. Check outdoor P.C. board. (AC current detection circuit)
Current detection circuit error
– 97 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Operation of diagnostic function
Cause of operation
Check code
Indoor unit
Judgment and measures
Status of
air conditioner
Condition
before
after
3 series 4 series
1. Check refrigerating cycle (Gas leak)
Discharge temp. error
Displayed when
error is detected
P03
P04
P03
Stop
2. Trouble of electronic expansion valve
3. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD).
∗ Discharge temp. (TD) over specified
value was detected.
1. Check case thermostat and connector.
2. Check gas leak, recharge
Case thermostat operation
Displayed when
error is detected
H04
P05
Stop
Stop
3. Check full open of service valve.
4. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).
5. Check broken pipe.
∗ Abnormal overheat of compressor
Displayed when 1. Check power supply voltage. AC198 to 264V
error is detected
Power supply voltage error
1. Check outdoor heat exchanger sensor (TL).
2. Check indoor heat exchanger sensor (TC, TCJ).
3. Check full open of service valve.
High pressure protective operation
• During cooling operation, outdoor
temp. sensor (TL) detected
temperature over specified temp.
P20
P22
Stop
Stop
Displayed when 4. Check indoor/outdoor fan.
error is detected
5. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).
• During heating operation, indoor
temp. sensor (TC, TCJ) detected
temperature over specified temp.
6. Check clogging and short circuit of indoor/outdoor heat
exchanger.
7. Overcharge of refrigerant. Recharge
1. Check lock of fan motor.
Displayed when
error is detected
P22
Outdoor fan system error
2. Check power supply voltage. AC198 to 264V
3. Check outdoor P.C. board.
1. When performing operation while taking-off compressor
wire, P26 error occurs. Check control P.C. board.
Short-circuit error of compressor
driving element
Displayed when
Stop
Stop
P26
P29
P26
P29
error is detected 2. When performing operation while taking-off compressor
wire, an error does not occur. (Compressor rare short)
Displayed when 1. Check control P.C. board.
error is detected
Position detection circuit error
– 98 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
10-2-4. Diagnostic Procedure for Each Check Code (Indoor Unit)
Check code
[E01 error]
NO
Correct inter-unit cable
of remote controller
Is inter-unit cable of A and B normal?
YES
Is there no disconnection or
contact error of connector on harness
from terminal block of indoor unit?
YES
Correct connection of connector.
Check circuit wiring.
NO
NO
Is group control operation?
YES
NO
Check power connection of indoor unit.
(Turn on power again.)
Is power of all indoor units turned on?
YES
NO
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Is power supplied to remote controller?
AB terminal: Approx. DC18V
Defect → Replace
YES
YES
Are 2 remote controllers set
without master unit?
Correct a master unit/a follower unit.
(Remote controller address connector)
NO
Check remote controller P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[E09 error]
YES
Are 2 master units set in
2 remote controllers?
Correct as a master unit
and a follower unit.
NO
Check remote controller P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 99 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
[E04 error]
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
Is group address setup of
remote controller correct?
Does outdoor operate?
Check Item code [14].
YES
YES
Are wiring in indoor unit and
1, 2, 3 inter-unit cables correct?
Correct wiring and
inter-unit cables.
YES
Correct wiring of connector
and terminal blocks.
Are wirings of terminal blocks
(1, 2, 3) wired to CN04 normal?
YES
Check indoor P.C. board.
Does D502 (Orange LED) flash
after power supply turned on again?
Defect → Replace
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Check indoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
Defect → Replace
[E10 error]
YES
Check power supply voltage.
Correct lines.
Check and eliminate noise, etc.
Is there no disorder of power supply?
NO
Check indoor control P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
– 100 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
<In case of SP110, SP140>
[E18 error]
NO
Correct inter-unit cable
of remote controller.
Is inter-unit cable
of A and B normal?
YES
Is there no disconnection
or contact error of connector
on harness from terminal block
of indoor unit?
YES
Correct connection of connector.
Check circuit wiring.
NO
NO
Is group control operation?
YES
Check power
connection status of indoor unit
(Connect again).
NO
Is power of all indoor units turned on?
YES
NO
Is Twin or Triple control?
YES
Is there no contact error
of indoor/outdoor inter-unit cable
(Signal line) of the main unit?
YES
Correct indoor/outdoor inter-unit cable
(Serial signal line).
NO
Check indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
[E08, L03, L07, L08 error]
E08: Duplicated indoor unit No.
L03: There are 2 or more master units in a group control.
L07: There is 1 or more group address [Individual] in a group control.
L08: The indoor group address is unset. (13. ADDRESS SETUP)
If the above error is detected when power supply turned on, the mode enters automatically in the automatic
address set mode. (Check code is not output.)
However, if the above error is detected during the automatic address set mode, a check code may be
output.
[L09 error]
YES
Set capacity data of indoor unit.
(Setup item code (DN)=11)
Is not yet capacity setting
of indoor unit set up?
NO
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
– 101 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[L20 error]
Are wiring connections
to communication lines
U3 and U4 normal?
NO
Correct wiring connection.
YES
YES
Is not the multiple same central
control system addresses connected?
Correct central control system address.
NO
Check central controller
(including network adapter) and
indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
[L30 error]
NO
NO
Are outside devices of
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
connector CN80 connected?
Defect → Replace
YES
Check outside devices.
Defect → Replace
Do outside devices normally work?
YES
Check cause of operation.
[P30 error] (Central controller)
NO
NO
Is group operation carried out?
YES
Is there check code
on sub remote controller in main
and sub remote controllers?
YES
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Check corresponding
indoor unit/outdoor unit.
Defect → Replace
– 102 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[P10 error]
Is connection of
NO
NO
float switch connector
(Indoor control board CN34)
normal?
Correct connection
of connector.
YES
YES
Does float switch work?
YES
Is circuit wiring normal?
NO
Check and correct wiring
and wire circuit.
NO
Does drain pump work?
YES
Are connector pins 1 and 2
at drain pump unit side shorted
(Resistance value 0)?
NO
NO
Is power of
drain pump turned on? ∗
YES
YES
Replace drain pump
and indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
Check the drain pipe, etc.
Check indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
Replace drain pump.
Check wiring.
Defect → Replace
∗ Check that voltage of 1-2 pin of CN504 on the indoor P.C. board is +12V. (1 pin is plus (+).)
[F10 error]
NO
Is connection of TA sensor connector
Correct connection of connector.
Replace TA sensor.
(CN104 on indoor P.C. board) correct?
YES
NO
Are characteristics of
TA sensor resistance value normal?
YES
∗ Refer to Characteristics-1.
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
– 103 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
<In case of SP110, SP140>
[P12 error]
Turn off the power.
Is there no connection error or
disconnection on connectors CN333
and CN334 of indoor unit P.C. board
(MCC-1570)?
YES
Correct connection
of connector.
CN333
NO
Remove connectors CN333
and CN334 of indoor unit P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
CN334
NO
Does the fan rotate without trouble
when handling the fan with hands?
Replace indoor fan motor.
YES
Are resistance values
between phases at fan motor connector
CN333 motor side of indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570) correct? ∗1
Incorrect
Replace indoor fan motor.
Correct
∗1
• Are not coil windings between ꢀ (Red lead) and ꢁ (White lead),
between ꢁ (White lead) and ꢂ (Black lead),
between ꢂ (Black lead) and ꢀ (Red lead) opened or shorted?
→ The resistance should be the resistance value below.
SM56, SM80 → Approx. 70 to 100Ω
SM110, SM140, SM160 → Approx. 27 to 40Ω
• Is not grounded between cabinet and ꢀ, ꢁ, ꢂ. → It should be 10MΩ or more.
Is resistance value of
fan motor connector CN334 motor side
of indoor P.C. board
Incorrect
Replace indoor fan motor.
(MCC-1570) correct? ∗2
Correct
∗2
Resistance value confirmation of the fan motor position detection circuit
Is not status between ꢀ (Yellow lead) and ꢃ (Pink lead) opened or shorted?
→ The resistance should be approx. 5k to 20kΩ.
Is output of
indoor fan motor position
NO
Replace indoor fan motor.
detection signal correct? ∗3
YES
∗3
Confirmation of the fan motor position detection signal
• Using a voltage tester, measure voltage between CN334 ꢀ and ꢁ on the indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570) under condition that CN333 and CN334 are mounted and the power supply is turned on.
→ When rotating the fan slowly with hands, the pin voltage should shake between 0 and 5V.
• Between ꢃ and ꢁ: 5V
Check indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
– 104 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
<In case of SP110, SP140>
[F02 error]
NO
NO
Is connection of TC sensor connector
Correct connection of connector.
(CN101 on Indoor P.C. board) correct?
YES
Are characteristics of
TC sensor resistance value normal?
Replace TC sensor.
YES
∗ Refer to Characteristics-2.
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
[F01 error]
NO
NO
Is connection of TCJ sensor connector
(CN102 on Indoor P.C. board) correct?
Correct connection of connector.
Replace TCJ sensor.
YES
Are characteristics of
TCJ sensor resistance value normal?
YES
∗ Refer to TCJ sensor
(Temperature-Resistance value characteristic table)
Check indoor main P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
– 105 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
[C06 error] (TCC-LINK central controller)
NO
NO
Are U3 and U4 communication lines normal?
YES
Correct communication line.
∗1
Correct connection of connector.
Is connection of connector normal?
YES
∗1
TCC-LINK central:
CN51 of TCC-LINK adapter P.C. board (MCC-1440) and CN050 of indoor P.C. board
NO
Check connection of A and B terminal blocks.
Correct communication line of remote controller.
Are A and B communication lines normal?
YES
YES
NO
Is there no connection error of power supply cable?
NO
Correct power wiring.
Is not the source power supply turned on?
YES
Turn on the source power supply.
YES
Did a power failure occur?
NO
YES
YES
Is the network address changed
from the remote controller?
Clear the check code.
Eliminate noise, etc.
NO
Is there no noise source?
NO
Uncontrolled
(Same to others)
Can the other indoor units
be normally controlled from the central controller?
Or is the operation status of indoor unit reflected?
Check central controller.
Defect → Replace
YES
Uncontrolled
Can the indoor unit be normally controlled
from the remote controller?
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
YES
Check power supply transformer on
TCC-LINK adapter P.C. board (MCC-1440).
Defect → Replace
– 106 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
[E03 error] (Master indoor unit)
[E03 error] is detected when the indoor unit cannot receive a signal from the remote controller
(also central controller).
Check A and B remote controllers and communication lines of the central control system U3 and U4.
As communication is impossible, this check code [E03] is not displayed on the remote controller and the central
controller. [E01] is displayed on the remote controller and [C06 error] is displayed on the central controller.
If these check codes generate during operation, the air conditioner stops.
[F29 error]
This check code indicates a detection error of IC10 non-volatile memory (EEPROM) on the indoor unit P.C.
board, which generated during operation of the air conditioner. Replace the service P.C. board.
∗ When EEPROM was not inserted when power supply turned on or when the EEPROM data read/write
operation is impossible at all, the automatic address mode is repeated. In this time, [97 error] is displayed on
the central controller.
(Approx.
3 minutes)
(Approx.
1 minute)
LED (D02) on indoor unit
P.C. board flashes with
1Hz for approx. 10 seconds.
[SET] is displayed
on remote controller.
[SET]
goes off.
Reboot
(Reset)
(Power ON)
(Repetition)
[P31 error] (Follower indoor unit)
When the master unit of a group operation detected [E03], [L03], [L07] or [L08] error, the follower unit of the
group operation detects [P31 error] and then the unit stops.
There is no display of the check code or alarm history of the remote controller. (In this model, the mode enters
in automatic address set mode when the master unit detected [L03], [L07] or [L08] error.)
– 107 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
10-2-5. Diagnostic Procedure for Each Check Code (Outdoor Unit)
1) This section describes the diagnostic method for each check code displayed on the remote controller.
2) In some cases, a check code indicates multiple symptoms.
In this case, confirm LED display on the outdoor P.C. board to narrow the contents to be confirmed.
3) The check code on the remote controller is displayed only when the same error occurred continuously by
multiple times while LED of the outdoor P.C. board displays even an error which occurred once.
Therefore the display on the remote controller may differ from that of LED.
LED display on outdoor P.C. board
Dip switch setup
<Latest error display>
Only 1) of SW803 is ON.
• When turning on 1) only of SW803, the latest error
is displayed. As the memory is stored, it can be
confirmed even if the power supply is turned off
once. (excluding outside temp. sensor (TO) error)
• When the work finished or the outdoor temp.
sensor (TO) error was found, turn off all of SW803.
(The error which occurs at present is displayed.)
<Error display, which occurs at present>
All SW803 are OFF. (Initial status)
Display selection
<Display 1> ó <Display 2>
(No error)
(Error occurred) (Push SW800)
• When even a LED of D800 to D804 (Yellow)
goes on, error occurrence is indicated. <Display 1>
D800 (Yellow)
D801 (Yellow)
D802 (Yellow)
D803 (Yellow)
D804 (Yellow)
D805 (Green)
¡
l
l
l
l
l
¡
l
¡
l
• If pushing the button switch SW800 for 1 second
under the above condition, the yellow LED is
displayed with flashing. <Display 2>
¥
l
l
¡
l
l
¡
¡
• When pushing SW800 for 1 second again, the
status returns to <Display 1>.
(Example of discharge temp. sensor error)
: Go off, : Go on, : Flash
• The error contents can be confirmed by combining
<Display 1> and <Display 2>.
¡
¥
l
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[E04]
—
[Indoor/Outdoor communication error]
NO
Is setting of group address
of remote controller correct?
Check Item code [14].
YES
NO
Are inner wiring and
inter-unit cables (1, 2, 3) normal?
Correct wiring
and inter-unit cable.
YES
NO
NO
Are CN04 connection and
Correct wiring of connectors
and terminal blocks.
wiring of terminal blocks (1, 2, 3) normal?
YES
Does D502 (Orange LED) flash after
power supply is turned on again?
Check indoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 108 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[F04]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error]
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
NO
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
Is CN603 connection normal?
Is resistance value of TD sensor normal?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[F06]
• There is a possibility that it is one of the following errors.
Confirm LED on outdoor P.C. board to judge which error it is.
Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error, Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error,
Suction temp. sensor (TS) error, Miswiring of heat exchanger sensor (TE, TS)
<Display 1> <Display 2> Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error]
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
¥
¥
l
l
¡
NO
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
Is CN601 connection normal?
Is resistance value of TE sensor normal?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error] → Refer to [F07] column.
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Suction temp. sensor (TS) error] → Refer to [F12] column.
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
¥
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Miswiring of heat exchanger sensor (TE,TS)] → Refer to [F15] column.
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
[F07]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error]
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
NO
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
Is CN604 connection normal?
Is resistance value of TL sensor normal?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 109 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[F08]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Outside air temp. sensor (TO) error]
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
l
¥
l
¡
NO
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
Is CN602 connection normal?
Is resistance value of TO sensor normal?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[F12]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Suction temp. sensor (TS) error]
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
¥
l
¡
NO
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
Is CN600 connection normal?
Is resistance value of TS sensor normal?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[F13]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink temp. sensor (TH) error]
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
¥
l
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replac
[F15]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Miswiring of heat exchanger sensor (TE,TS)]
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
NO
NO
NO
Is mounting status of
TE and TS sensors normal?
Correct sensor mounting.
YES
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
Is CN600 connection normal?
Is resistance value of TS sensor normal?
YES
Is CN601 connection normal?
Correct connector.
Is resistance value of TE sensor normal?
Sensor error → Replace
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[F31]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [EEPROM error]
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 110 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[H01]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Compressor break down]
¥
l
l
l
l
¡
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
NO
Is power supply voltage normal?
AC198 to 264V
Correct power supply line.
YES
Is wire connection normal?
Compressor lead
(Board side, Compressor side),
Reactor lead, Power supply lead
NO
Check wire connection
and correct it.
YES
YES
Is it not abnormal overload?
NO
Correct and clear the cause.
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[H02]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Compressor lock]
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
l
l
l
¡
NO
NO
Is power supply voltage normal?
AC198 to 264V
Correct power supply line.
YES
Is wire connection normal?
Compressor lead
(Board side, Compressor side),
Reactor lead, Power supply lead
Check wire connection
and correct it.
YES
YES
NO
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Is compressor normal?
NO
Defect → Replace
Is there no refrigerant stagnation?
YES
Compressor lock → Replace
NO
Check TE, TS sensors and PMV.
Does PMV normally operate?
YES
Defect → Replace
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[H03]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Current detection circuit error]
¥
¥
l
l
l
¡
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 111 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[H04]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Case thermostat operation]
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
l
l
l
¥
l
¡
NO
NO
Are CN609 connection
and case thermostat normal?
Correct connector.
Case thermostat error → Replace
YES
Is cooling/heating operation
available when short-circuiting
case thermostat?
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
YES
NO
NO
NO
Repair defectives position.
Recharge refrigerant.
Is there no gas leak?
Is it not refrigerant shortage?
YES
Is valve fully opened?
YES
Open valve fully.
Correct defective position.
Replace defective part.
Is PMV normal?
YES
Check crushed or broken pipe.
Defect → Correct and Replace
[L10]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Unset model type]: Only when service P.C. board is used
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
l
¥
l
¡
Cut jumper line according
to the explanation sheet packaged
with the service P.C. board.
– 112 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[L29]
∗ There is a possibility that it is one of the following errors.
Confirm LED on outdoor P.C. board to judge which error it is.
Communication error between MCU, Heat sing temp. sensor (TH) error,
EEPROM error, Unset model type, Heat sink overheat error, Gas leak detection,
4-way valve inverse error
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Communication error between MCU]
¥
l
¥
¥
¥
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink temp. sensor (TH) error] → Refer to [F13] column.
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [EEPROM error] → Refer to [F31] column.
¡
¡
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Unset model type] → Refer to [L10] column.
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
l
¥
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink overheat error] → Refer to [P07] column.
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Gas leak detection] → Refer to [P15] column.
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [4-way valve inverse error] → Refer to [P19] column.
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
l
l
¥
¡
– 113 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[P03]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Discharge temp. error]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
l
l
l
¡
NO
Repair defective position.
Recharge refrigerant.
Is there no gas leak?
Is refrigerant charge amount adequate?
YES
NO
Repair defective position.
Replace defective part.
Is PMV normal?
YES
YES
Correct and clear the cause.
Is it not abnormal overload?
NO
NO
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
Is CN603 connection normal?
Is resistance value of TD sensor normal?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[P04]
∗ There is a possibility that it is one of the following errors.
Confirm LED on outdoor P.C. board to judge which error it is.
Power supply error (Vdc), High pressure protective operation, Case thermostat
operation
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Case thermostat operation] → Refer to [H04] column.
l
l
¡
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Power supply error (Vdc)] → Refer to [P05] column.
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
l
l
¡
<Display 1> <Display 2> [High pressure protective operation] → Refer to [P20] column.
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
¥
¡
[P05]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Power supply error (Voltage error)]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
l
l
¡
Is there no down or up
of power supply voltage?
(AC198 to 264V)
YES
Confirm electric construction, etc.
NO
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 114 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[P07]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Heat sink overheat error]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¡
Is there no loosening of
screws of motor drive element of
outdoor P.C. board Q200, Q300, Q400
and rectifier DB01, DB02, DB03?
Did not forget to apply
YES
radiation grease to rear side of
Q200, DB01, DB02 or DB03?
NO
Apply radiation grease to objective part.
Retightening of screws.
(Be sure not to forget to attach insulating sheet
between heat sink and Q300, Q400.)
Is not the ventilation flue
of the heat sink blocked?
Is not the fan blocked?
(Short-circuit, etc.)
NO
Remove blocking matter.
Correct short-circuit.
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[P15]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Gas leak detection]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
¡
NO
Is there no gas leak?
Is refrigerant charge amount adequate?
Repair defective position.
Recharge refrigerant.
YES
NO
NO
Correct defective position.
Replace defective part.
Is PMV normal?
YES
Open valve fully.
Is valve fully opened?
YES
YES
Correct and replace piping.
Is there no crushed pipe?
NO
Check temp. sensor.
TD sensor CN603
TS sensor CN600
Error
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
OK
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 115 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[P19]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [4-way valve inverse error]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
l
l
¥
¡
Temperature sensor check
TE sensor CN601
TS sensor CN600
Indoor TC sensor
Defect → Correct and repair
Is operation of
4-way valve normal?
(Check pipe temp., etc. in
cooling/heating operation.)
YES
NO
Is the coil
resistance value of 4-way valve
between 1.3 and 1.6kΩ?
NO
Replace coil of 4-way valve.
YES
Check operation of
outdoor P.C. board.
(See below.)
Error
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → replace
OK
Check 4-way valve.
Defect → Replace
Check method of outdoor P.C. board operation (Self-hold valve type)
1) Set SW804 of Dip switch as the following figure and then push SW801 for
approx. 1 second to check exchange operation to cooling cycle/heating cycle.
• Power is turned on for approx. 10 seconds.
• When checking again, check operation 1 minute or more after the first check
because exothermic of part (Coil, resistance R700) is large.
(There is no problem when coil is not connected.)
2) After check, turn off all the Dip switch SW804.
Exchange to cooling cycle
Exchange to heating cycle
SW804 SW801 CN701
1
SW804 SW801 CN701
1
Push
4
Push
4
DC200V or more
DC200V or more
Note) Check by tester
Analog tester : Good if over DC200V
Digital tester : Good if Max. value is over DC200V though the varied
value may be displayed.
– 116 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[P20]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [High pressure protective operation]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
l
¥
l
¥
¡
NO
Is valve fully opened?
YES
Open valve fully.
Reset the power supply
and then perform test run
matching to the season.
Cooling season
Cooling operation
Heating season
Heating operation
Is there no problem
on outdoor TL sensor?
(Measurement of resistance value)
NO
YES
Replace sensor.
NO
Is there no crack or
loosening of outdoor fan?
YES
Check outdoor fan.
Defect → Replace, retightening
NO
Does not the outdoor fan
perform abnormal operation?
YES
Check the same items as
[P22] error.
Is there no element
which interfere heat exchange
of outdoor unit?
YES
• Clogging of heat exchanger
• Short circuit
NO
Eliminate interfering element.
Check overcharge of refrigerant, clogging of cycle,
broken pipe, abnormal overload, etc.
Defect → Correct defective position.
NO
NO
Does indoor fan
normally operate?
Are indoor fan motor
and connector normal?
YES
YES
Repair defective position.
Are resistance values
of indoor TC and TCJ
sensors normal?
NO
Replace
sensor.
YES
Check indoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
Is there no element which
interfere heat exchange of indoor unit?
• Clogging of filter
YES
• Clogging of heat exchanger
• Short circuit
Eliminate interfering element.
NO
Check overcharge of refrigerant, clogging of cycle,
broken pipe, abnormal overload, etc.
Defect → Correct defective position.
– 117 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Check
code
Outdoor
LED display
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[P22]
<Display 1> <Display 2> [Fan system error]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
¥
l
¥
¡
NO
Is there no problem on power supply voltage?
(198 to 264V)
Check wiring construction.
Ask repair of power supply.
YES
Does the fan rotate without trouble when rotating
shaft of fan motor with hands during power-OFF?
Is there no problem on coil resistance of fan motor?
Between red and white lead wire : 12 to 20Ω
Between white and black lead wire : 12 to 20Ω
Between black and red lead wire : 12 to 20Ω
YES
NO
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Replace fan motor.
Defect → Replace
Single operation check for outdoor fan
1) Set SW804 of Dip switch as the following figure and then push SW801 for
approx. 1 second to check single operation of outdoor fan. Use this method to
check which fan, upper or lower fan, has a trouble.
• When pushing SW801 for 1 second
again or 2 minutes passed, the fan stops.
Outdoor fan single operation
2) After check, turn off all Dip switch
SW804.
SW804
SW801
Push
[P26]
<Display 1> <Display 2>
[Short-circuit of compressor drive element]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¥
l
¥
¥
¡
Is there no problem on connection
of compressor lead or reactor?
(Check referring to Wiring diagram.)
NO
Correct wiring.
YES
NO
The same error does not occur in
operation without compressor lead.
Replace outdoor P.C. board.
YES
Check compressor. (Rear short, etc.)
Defect → Replace
[P29]
<Display 1> <Display 2>
[Position detection circuit error]
¡
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
¥
l
¥
¥
¥
¡
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
—
No code
<Display 1> <Display 2>
[Other error] Compressor disorder due to sudden change of load, etc.
∗ Although the display of outdoor LED outputs, the unit automatically restarts
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
l
¡
¡
l
¡
¡
and error is not determined.
∗ LED display also may output due to negative phase of compressor or wire
coming-off.
– 118 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Temperature – Resistance value characteristic table
Temperature sensor
TA,TC,TCJ,TE,TS,TO sensors
TD,TL sensors
Representative value
Representative value
Resistance value (kΩ)
(Minimum value) (Standard value) (Maximum value)
Resistance value (kΩ)
(Minimum value) (Standard value) (Maximum value)
Temperature
Temperature
(°C)
(°C)
0
10
20
25
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
32.33
19.63
12.23
9.75
33.80
20.35
12.59
10.00
7.990
5.192
3.451
2.343
1.623
1.146
0.8237
0.6023
35.30
21.09
12.95
10.25
8.218
5.375
3.594
2.454
1.709
1.213
0.8761
0.6434
0
10
20
25
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
150.5
92.76
58.61
47.01
37.93
25.12
17.00
11.74
8.269
5.925
4.321
3.205
161.3
99.05
62.36
49.93
40.22
26.55
17.92
12.34
8.668
6.195
4.507
3.336
172.7
105.6
66.26
52.97
42.59
28.03
18.86
12.95
9.074
6.470
4.696
3.468
7.764
5.013
3.312
2.236
1.540
1.082
0.7740
0.5634
TA,TC,TCJ,TE,TS,TO sensors
40
30
20
10
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
Temperature (˚C)
TD,TL sensors
200
150
100
50
20
15
10
5
0
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
Temperature (˚C)
∗ As TH sensor (Outdoor unit heat sink temp. sensor) is incorporated in the outdoor control P.C. board, the resistance
value cannot be measured.
– 119 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
10-2-6. Outline of judgment
The primary judgment to check whether a trouble occurred in the indoor unit or outdoor unit is carried out with
the following method.
Method to judge the erroneous position by flashing indication on the display part of the indoor unit
(sensors of the receiving part)
The indoor unit monitors the operating status of the air conditioner, and the blocked contents of self-diagnosis
are displayed restricted to the following cases if a protective circuit works.
: Go off,
: Go on,
: Flash (0.5 sec.)
Lamp indication
Operation Timer Ready
Check code
Cause of trouble occurrence
—
Power supply OFF or miswiring between receiving unit and indoor unit
No indication at all
E01
E02
E03
E08
E09
E10
Receiving error
Receiving unit
Miswiring or wire connection error
Sending error
between receiving unit and indoor unit
Communication stop
Operation Timer
Ready
Duplicated indoor unit No.
Setup error
Duplicated master units of remote controller
Flash
Communication error between CPUs on indoor unit P.C. board
Wire connection error between indoor units, Indoor power OFF
(Communication stop between indoor master and follower or between main
and sub indoor twin)
E18
E04
Operation Timer
Operation Timer
Ready
Miswiring between indoor unit and outdoor unit or connection erorr
(Communication stop between indoor and outdoor units)
Flash
Ready
P10
P12
P03
Overflow was detected.
Protective device of indoor unit worked.
Indoor DC fan error
Alternate flash
Outdoor unit discharge temp. error }
Protective device of outdoor unit worked.
∗1
P05
P19
P22
P26
P29
Negative phase detection error } Outdoor unit error
4-way valve system error (Indoor or outdoor unit judged.)
Operation Timer
Ready
Outdoor unit: Outdoor fan error
Protective device of
outdoor unit worked.
Alternate flash
Outdoor unit: Inverter Idc operation
Outdoor unit: Position detection error
∗1
Stopped because of error of other indoor unit in a group
(Check codes of E03/L03/L07/L08)
P31
∗1: These are representative examples and the check code differs according to the outdoor unit to be combined.
– 120 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
Lamp indication
Operation Timer
Check code
F01
Cause of trouble occurrence
Ready
Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ) error
Heat exchanger sensor (TC) error
Heat exchanger sensor (TA) error
F02
Indoor unit sensor error
Alternate flash
P10
F04
Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error
Operation Timer
Ready
F06
Temp. sensor (TE) error
Temp. sensor (TO) error
Sensor error of outdoor unit
∗1
F08
Alternate flash
Temp. sensor (TS) error
F12
Operation Timer
Ready
Ready
F29
Indoor EEPROM error
Simultaneous flash
Operation Timer
H01
H02
H03
L03
L07
L08
L09
L20
L30
L31
Compressor break down
Compressor lock
Outdoor compressor system error ∗1
Current detection circuit error
Flash
Duplicated master indoor units
There is indoor unit of group connection → AUTO address
Operation
Timer Ready
in individual indoor unit.
Unsetting of group address
Missed setting
* If group construction and
address are not normal
when power supply turned on,
automatically goes to address
setup mode.
Simultaneous flash
(Unset indoor capacity)
Operation Timer
Ready
Duplicated indoor central addresses
Outside interlock error
Others
Negative phase error
Simultaneous flash
∗1: These are representative examples and the check code differs according to the outdoor unit to be combined.
10-2-7. Others (Other than Check Code)
Lamp indication
Operation Timer Ready
Check code
Cause of trouble occurrence
—
During test run
Simultaneous flash
Operation Timer Ready
Disagreement of cool/heat
(Automatic cool/heat setting to automatic cool/heat prohibited model, or
setting of heating to cooling-only model)
—
Alternate flash
– 121 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
ALT (Alternate): Alternate flashing when there are two flashing LED SIM (Simultaneous): Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED
Air conditioner operation
10-2-8. Check Code List (Indoor)
: Go on,
: Flash, l : Go off
¡
¥
(Indoor unit detected)
Check code indication
Sensor lamp indication
Block indication
Representative defective position
Explanation of error contents
TCC-LINK central &
Wired remote controller
Automatic
reset
Operation
continuation
Operation Timer Ready Flash
Regular communication error between indoor and
remote controller
No communication from remote controller and network adapter
(Also no communication from central control system)
E03
¥
¡
×
l
l
E04
E08
E10
Indoor/Outdoor serial error
There is error on serial communication between indoor and outdoor units
Same address as yours was detected.
¥
l
l
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
l
¥
¥
l
l
l
Duplicated indoor addresses
²
Communication error between indoor MCU
MCU communication error between main motor and micro computer
Regular communication error between
indoor master and follower units
Regular communication between indoor master and follower units is impossible,
Communication between twin master (main) and follower (sub) units is impossible.
E18
¥
¡
×
l
l
F01
F02
F10
F29
L03
L07
L08
L09
L20
L30
P01
P10
P12
P19
P31
ALT
ALT
ALT
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
Indoor unit, Heat exchanger (TCJ) error
Indoor unit, Heat exchanger (TC) error
Indoor unit, Room temp. sensor (TA) error
Indoor unit, other indoor P.C. board error
Duplicated setting of indoor group master unit
There is group cable in individual indoor unit.
Unset indoor group address
Open/short was detected on heat exchanger (TCJ).
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
×
¡
×
×
×
×
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
Open/short was detected on heat exchanger (TC).
Open/short was detected on room temp. sensor (TA).
EEPROM error (Other error may be detected. If no error, automatic address is repeated.
There are multiple master units in a group.
²
²
²
When even one group connection indoor unit exists in individual indoor unit.
Indoor group address is unset.
Unset indoor capacity
Capacity of indoor unit is unset.
Duplicated central control system address
Outside error input to indoor unit (Interlock)
Indoor unit, AC fan error
Duplicated setting of central control system address
Abnormal stop by outside error (CN80) input
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
An error of indoor AC fan was detected. (Fan motor thermal relay worked.)
Float switch worked.
Indoor unit, overflow detection
Indoor unit, DC fan error
Indoor DC fan error (Over-current/Lock, etc.) was detected.
In heating operation, an error was detected by temp. down of indoor heat exchanger sensor.
Follower unit in group cannot operate by warning from [E03/L03/L07/L08] of master unit.
4-way valve system error
Other indoor unit error
When this warning was detected before group construction/address check finish at power supply was turned on, the mode shifts automatically to AUTO address setup mode.
²
(Remote controller detected)
Check code indication
Wired remote controller
Sensor lamp indication
Block indication
Air conditioner operation
Representative defective position
Explanation of error contents
Automatic
reset
Operation
continuation
Operation Timer Ready Flash
No master remote controller, Remote controller
communication (Receive) error
Signal cannot be received from indoor unit. Master remote controller was not set.
(including 2 remote controllers)
E01
E02
E09
—
—
×
—
—
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
Remote controller communication (Send) error
Signal cannot be sent to indoor unit.
¥
¥
In 2-remote controller control, both were set as master. (Indoor master unit stops warning
and follower unit continues operation.)
Duplicated master remote controller
(Central control devices detected)
Check code indication
Sensor lamp indication
Air conditioner operation
Block indication
Representative defective position
Explanation of error contents
Automatic
reset
Operation
continuation
TCC-LINK central
Operation Timer Ready Flash
Signal sending operation of central control system is impossible.
There are multiple same central devices. (AI-NET)
Is not displayed.
(Common use of
C05
C06
C12
—
—
—
—
—
—
Central control system communication (send) error
Central control system communication (receive) error
General-purpose device control interface batched warning
remote controller, etc.)
Signal receiving operation of central control system is impossible.
An error on device connected to general-purpose device control interface of exclusive to
TCC-LINK/AI-NET
—
By warning unit
(Above-mentioned)
Group follower unit is defective.
(For remote controller, above-mentioned [∗∗∗] details are displayed with unit No.
P30
—
—
Group follower unit is defective.
NOTE: Even for the same contents of error such as communication error, the display of check code may differ according to detection device.
When remote controller or central controller detects an error, it is not necessarily related to operation of the air conditioner. In this list, the check codes that outdoor unit detects are not described.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
Check Code List (Outdoor)
: Go on,
ALT (Alternate): Alternate flashing when there are two flashing LED SIM (Simultaneous): Simultaneous flashing when there are two flashing LED
: Flash, l : Go off
¡
¥
Sensor lamp part
Remote
Automatic
reset
Operation
continuation
controller
indication
Block indication
Operation Timer Ready Flash
ALT
Representative defective position
Detection
Explanation of error contents
Open/Short of discharge temp. sensor was detected.
F04
F06
Outdoor unit Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TE, TS, TL) error
Outdoor
Outdoor
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
Open/Short of heat exchanger temp. sensor was detected.
Miswiring between TE sensor and TS sensor
ALT
F08
F12
ALT
ALT
Outdoor unit Outside temp. sensor (TO) error
Outdoor unit Temp. sensor (TS) error
Outdoor
Outdoor
Open/Short of outside temp. sensor was detected.
Open/Short of suction temp. sensor was detected.
¡
¡
¥
¥
¥
¥
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
When reached min-Hz by current release control, short-circuited current (Idc) after
DC excitation was detected.
H01
Outdoor unit Compressor break down
Outdoor
¥
l
l
H02
H03
P03
P05
P22
P26
P29
Outdoor unit Compressor lock
Outdoor unit Current detection circuit error
Outdoor unit Discharge temp. error
Power supply error
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Compressor lock was detected.
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
Current detection circuit error
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
Error was detected by discharge temp. release control.
Power supply voltage error
Outdoor unit Outdoor fan error
Outdoor unit Inverter Idc operation
Outdoor unit Position detection error
Error (Over-current, lock, etc.) was detected on outdoor fan drive circuit.
Short-circuited protective operation of compressor drive circuit element (G-Tr /IGBT) worked.
Position detection error of compressor motor was detected.
No remote controller master unit
Remote controller communication error
Signal was not received from indoor unit.
Main remote controller was not set. (including 2 remote controllers)
E01
E02
E03
Remote controller
Remote controller
Indoor
—
—
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
Remote controller send error
Signal cannot be sent to indoor unit.
—
—
Regular communication error between indoor and
remote controller
No communication from remote controller and network adapter
¡
×
×
l
¥
l
E04
E08
Indoor/Outdoor serial error
Duplicated indoor addresses
Indoor
Indoor
Serial communication error between indoor and outdoor
Same address as yours was detected.
¡
¡
l
¥
l
l
²
In 2-remote controller control, both were set as master.
(Indoor master unit stops warning and follower unit continues operation.)
E09
E10
E18
Duplicated main remote controllers
Communication error between CPU
Remote controller
Indoor
×
¡
¡
×
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
l
MCU communication error between main motor and micro computer
Regular communication error between master and
follower indoor units
Regular communication was impossible between master and follower indoor units.
Communication between twin master (Main unit) and follower (sub unit) was impossible.
Indoor
×
L03
L07
L08
L09
L30
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
SIM
Duplicated indoor master units
There is group cable in individual indoor unit.
Unset indoor group address
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
There are multiple master units in a group.
When even one group connection indoor unit exists in individual indoor unit
Indoor address group was unset.
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
²
²
²
l
l
l
l
¡
Unset indoor capacity
Capacity of indoor unit was unset.
Outside error input to indoor unit (Interlock)
Abnormal stop by CN80 outside error input
Indoor
Outdoor
In heating operation, error was detected by temp. down of indoor heat exchanger or temp. up
ofTE, TS.
P19
ALT
4-way valve inverse error
¡
×
¥
¥
l
F01
F02
F10
F29
P01
P10
P12
P31
ALT
ALT
ALT
SIM
ALT
ALT
ALT
ALT
Indoor unit Heat exchanger sensor (TCJ) error
Indoor unit Heat exchanger sensor (TC) error
Indoor unit Room temp. sensor (TA) error
Indoor unit Other indoor P.C. board error
Indoor unit Indoor fan error
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Indoor
Open/Short of heat exchanger (TCJ) was detected.
Open/Short of heat exchanger (TC) was detected.
¡
¡
¡
×
×
×
×
¡
—
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
—
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
¥
l
l
l
l
l
¥
¥
¥
¥
Open/Short of room temp. (TA) was detected.
EEPROM error (Other error may be detected. If no error, automatic address is repeated.
Indoor AC fan error was detected. (Fan thermal relay worked.)
Float switch worked.
l
l
l
¥
Indoor unit Overflow detection
Indoor unit Indoor fan error
Indoor fan error (Over-current / Lock, etc.) was detected.
Other indoor under condition of warning in group. E03/L07/L03/L08 warning
Other indoor unit error
Sub remote controller error in a group
(Details of remote controller are displayed with unit No. Only central control side is displayed.)
—
—
By unit with warning No.
ALT
Error in indoor group
Network adapter
Network adapter/
Center
Communication error of central control system signal
∗ Is not displayed on the remote controller
—
LAN system communication error
¡
¡
Network adapter/
Center
L20
—
SIM
LAN system communication error
Duplicated indoor address of central control system communication
¡
¡
×
¡
¥
¡
¥
—
There are multiple communication adapters.
Network adapter
There are multiple communication adapters on remote controller communication line.
When this warning was detected before group construction/address check finish at power supply was turned on, the mode shifts automatically to AUTO address setup mode.
²
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
Error mode detected by indoor unit
Operation of diagnostic function
Judgment and measures
Check
code
Status of
air conditioner
Cause of operation
Condition
1. Check cables of remote controller and communication adapters.
• Remote controller LCD display OFF (Disconnection)
• Central remote controller [97] check code
No communication from remote
controller (including wireless) and
communication adapter
Stop
Displayed when
E03
(Automatic reset) error is detected
The serial signal is not output from
outdoor unit to indoor unit.
1. Outdoor unit does not completely operate.
• Inter-unit wire check, correction of miswiring
• Check outdoor P.C. board. Correct wiring of P.C. board.
• Miswiring of inter-unit wire
Stop
Displayed when
E04
• Defective serial sending circuit on
outdoor P.C. board
(Automatic reset) error is detected
2. When outdoor unit normally operates
Check P.C. board (Indoor receiving / Outdoor sending).
• Defective serial receiving circuit on
indoor P.C. board
E08
L03
Duplicated indoor unit address
Duplicated indoor master unit
1. Check whether remote controller connection (Group/Individual)
was changed or not after power supply turned on
(Finish of group construction/Address check).
Displayed when
error is detected
* If group construction and address are not normal when the
power has been turned on, the mode automatically shifts to
address setup mode. (Resetting of address)
Stop
There is group wire in individual indoor
unit.
L07
L08
L09
Unset indoor group address
Unset indoor capacity
Displayed when 1. Set indoor capacity (DN=11)
error is detected
Stop
Stop
Displayed when 1. Check outside devices.
L30
P10
Abnormal input of outside interlock
error is detected
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
1. Trouble of drain pump
Float switch operation
Displayed when 2. Clogging of drain pump
Stop
• Float circuit, Disconnection,
Coming-off, Float switch contact error
error is detected
3. Check float switch.
4. Check indoor P.C. board.
1. Position detection error
Displayed when 2. Over-current protective circuit of indoor fan driving unit operated.
P12
P19
Indoor DC fan error
Stop
Stop
error is detected
3. Indoor fan locked.
4. Check indoor P.C. board.
1. Check 4-way valve.
4-way valve system error
Displayed when 2. Check 2-way valve and check valve.
• After heating operation has started,
indoor heat exchangers temp. is
down.
(Automatic reset) error is detected
3. Check indoor heat exchanger (TC/TCJ).
4. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
1. Judge follower unit while master unit is [E03], [L03], [L07] or [L08].
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
Own unit stops while warning is output
to other indoor units.
Displayed when
(Follower unit)
P31
F01
F02
error is detected
(Automatic reset)
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TCJ).
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
Coming-off, disconnection or short of
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor
(TCJ)
Stop
Displayed when
(Automatic reset) error is detected
Coming-off, disconnection or short of
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor
(TC)
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TC).
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
Displayed when
(Automatic reset) error is detected
Coming-off, disconnection or short of
indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor
(TA)
1. Check indoor heat exchanger temp. sensor (TA).
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
Displayed when
F10
F29
(Automatic reset) error is detected
Indoor EEPROM error
Stop
Displayed when 1. Check indoor EEPROM. (including socket insertion)
(Automatic reset) error is detected
• EEPROM access error
2. Check indoor P.C. board.
Communication error between indoor
MCU
1. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
Displayed when
E10
E18
(Automatic reset) error is detected
• Communication error between fan
driving MCU and main MCU
1. Check remote controller wiring.
2. Check indoor power supply wiring.
3. Check indoor P.C. board.
Regular communication error between
indoor aster and follower units and
between main and sub units
Stop
Displayed when
(Automatic reset) error is detected
– 124 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
Error mode detected by remote controller or central controller (TCC-LINK)
Operation of diagnostic function
Judgment and measures
Status of
air conditioner
Check code
Cause of operation
Condition
Power supply error of remote controller, Indoor
EEPROM error
1. Check remote controller inter-unit wiring.
2. Check remote controller.
No communication with master indoor unit
• Remote controller wiring is not correct.
• Power of indoor unit is not turned on.
• Automatic address cannot be completed.
Not displayed at all
(Operation on
remote controller
is impossible.)
3. Check indoor power wiring.
4. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
—
5. Check indoor EEPROM.
(including socket insertion)
→ Automatic address repeating phenom-
enon generates.
Receiving error from remote controller
1. Check remote controller inter-unit wiring.
2. Check remote controller.
No communication with master indoor unit
Stop
(Automatic reset)
E01
• Disconnection of inter-unit wire between
remote controller and master indoor unit
(Detected by remote controller side)
Displayed when
error is detected
∗ If center exists,
∗2
3. Check indoor power wiring.
operation continues.
4. Check indoor P.C. board.
Stop
Sending error of remote controller
(Automatic reset)
Signal send error to indoor unit
(Detected by remote controller side)
Displayed when 1. Check sending circuit inside of remote
E02
∗ If center exists,
error is detected
controller.
operation continues.
→ Replace remote controller.
1. In 2-remote controllers (including wireless),
there are multiple main units.
Stop
(Sub unit
continues operation.)
There are multiple main remote controllers.
(Detected by remote controller side)
Displayed when
error is detected
E09
L20
Check that there are 1 main remote
controller and other sub remote controllers.
1. Check setting of central control system
network address. (Network adapter SW01)
Duplicated indoor central addresses on
communication of central control system
(Detected by indoor/central controller side)
Stop
(Automatic reset)
Displayed when
error is detected
Central controller
L20
2. Check network adapter P.C. board.
—
1. Check communication wire / miswiring
2. Check communication (U3, U4 terminals)
3. Check network adapter P.C. board.
∗3
Communication circuit error of central
control system
(Detected by central controller side)
Continues
Displayed when
Central controller
(Send)
4. Check central controller (such as central
control remote controller, etc.)
(By remote controller) error is detected
C05
(Receive)
C06
5. Check terminal resistance. (TCC-LINK)
—
Continuation/Stop
(According
to each case)
Displayed when Check the check code of the corresponding
error is detected unit from remote controller.
Indoor Gr sub unit error
(Detected by central controller side)
Central controller
P30
∗2 The check code cannot be displayed by the wired remote controller.
(Usual operation of air conditioner becomes unavailable.)
For the wireless models, an error is notified with indication lamp.
∗3 This trouble is related to communication of remote controller (A, B), central system (TCC-LINK U3, U4), and [E01],
[E02], [E03], [E09] or [E18] is displayed or no check display on the remote controller according to the contents.
– 125 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
Error mode detected by outdoor unit
Operation of diagnostic function
Judgment and measures
Status of
air conditioner
Check code
Cause of operation
Condition
1. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD).
Disconnection, short of discharge
temp. sensor (TD)
Displayed when
error is detected
Stop
Stop
F04
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.
1. Check temp. sensor (TE).
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.
Disconnection, short of outdoor temp.
sensor (TE)
Displayed when
error is detected
F06
F12
F08
1. Check suction temp. sensor (TS).
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.
Disconnection, short of suction temp.
sensor (TS)
Displayed when
error is detected
Stop
1. Check outside temp. sensor (TO).
2. Check outdoor P.C. board.
Disconnection, short of outside temp.
sensor (TO)
Displayed when
error is detected
Continue
4-way valve inverse error
1. Check operation of 4-way valve.
After heating operation has started,
indoor heat exchanger temp. lowers
under the specified temp.
2. Check outdoor heat exchanger (TE), suction temp.
sensor (TS).
∗
Displayed when
P19
H01
Stop
Stop
error is detected 3. Check indoor heat exchanger sensor (TC).
After heating operation has started,
outdoor heat exchanger / suction
temp. rises over the specified temp.
∗
4. Check 4-way valve coil.
5. Check PMV (Pulse Motor Valve).
Compressor break down
1. Check power supply voltage. (AC198 to 264V)
Although operation has started,
operation frequency decreases and
operation stops.
Displayed when 2. Overload operation of refrigerating cycle
error is detected
∗
Compressor lock
1. Trouble of compressor (Lock, etc.): Replace compressor.
Displayed when
H02
H03
Over-current detection after
compressor start-up
Stop
Stop
2. Wiring error of compressor (Open phase)
error is detected
∗
Displayed when 1. Check outdoor P.C. board. (AC current detection circuit)
error is detected
Current detection circuit error
Discharge temp. error
1. Check refrigerating cycle (Gas leak)
Displayed when
error is detected
P03
P05
P22
Stop
Stop
Stop
2. Trouble of electronic expansion valve
∗ Discharge temp. (TD) over specified
value was detected.
3. Check discharge temp. sensor (TD).
Displayed when 1. Check power supply voltage. AC198 to 264V
error is detected
Power supply voltage error
Outdoor fan system error
1. Check lock of fan motor.
Displayed when
error is detected
2. Check power supply voltage. AC198 to 264V
3. Check outdoor P.C. board.
1. When performing operation while taking-off compressor
wire, P26 error occurs. Check control P.C. board.
Stop
Stop
Short-circuit error of compressor
driving element
Displayed when
P26
P29
error is detected 2. When performing operation while taking-off compressor
wire, an error does not occur. (Compressor rare short)
Displayed when 1. Check control P.C. board.
error is detected
Position detection circuit error
– 126 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
10-2-9. Diagnostic Procedure for Each Check Code (Indoor Unit)
Check code
[E01 error]
NO
Correct inter-unit cable
of remote controller
Is inter-unit cable of A and B normal?
YES
Is there no disconnection or
contact error of connector on harness
from terminal block of indoor unit?
YES
Correct connection of connector.
Check circuit wiring.
NO
NO
Is group control operation?
YES
NO
Check power connection of indoor unit.
(Turn on power again.)
Is power of all indoor units turned on?
YES
NO
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Is power supplied to remote controller?
AB terminal: Approx. DC18V
Defect → Replace
YES
YES
Are 2 remote controllers set
without master unit?
Correct a master unit/a follower unit.
(Remote controller address connector)
NO
Check remote controller P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[E09 error]
YES
Are 2 master units set in
2 remote controllers?
Correct as a master unit
and a follower unit.
NO
Check remote controller P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 127 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
[E04 error]
NO
NO
NO
NO
Is group address setup of
remote controller correct?
Does outdoor operate?
Check Item code [L07].
YES
YES
Are wiring in indoor unit and
1, 2, 3 inter-unit cables correct?
Correct wiring and
inter-unit cables.
YES
Correct wiring
of terminal blocks.
Are wirings of
terminal blocks (1, 2, 3) normal?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Check indoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
Defect → Replace
[E10 error]
YES
Check power supply voltage.
Correct lines.
Check and eliminate noise, etc.
Is there no disorder of power supply?
NO
Check indoor control P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
– 128 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
[E18 error]
NO
Correct inter-unit cable
of remote controller.
Is inter-unit cable
of A and B normal?
YES
Is there no disconnection
or contact error of connector
on harness from terminal block
of indoor unit?
YES
Correct connection of connector.
Check circuit wiring.
NO
NO
Is group control operation?
YES
Check power
connection status of indoor unit
(Connect again).
NO
Is power of all indoor units turned on?
YES
NO
Is Twin control?
YES
Is there no contact error
of indoor/outdoor inter-unit cable
(Signal line) of the main unit?
YES
Correct indoor/outdoor inter-unit cable
(Serial signal line).
NO
Check indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
[E08, L03, L07, L08 error]
E08: Duplicated indoor unit No.
L03: There are 2 or more master units in a group control.
L07: There is 1 or more group address [Individual] in a group control.
L08: The indoor group address is unset. (13. ADDRESS SETUP)
If the above error is detected when power supply turned on, the mode enters automatically in the automatic
address set mode. (Check code is not output.)
However, if the above error is detected during the automatic address set mode, a check code may be
output.
[L09 error]
YES
Set capacity data of indoor unit.
(Setup item code (DN)=11)
Is not yet capacity setting
of indoor unit set up?
NO
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
– 129 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
[L20 error]
Are wiring connections
to communication lines
U3 and U4 normal?
NO
Correct wiring connection.
YES
YES
Is not the multiple same central
control system addresses connected?
Correct central control system address.
NO
Check central controller
(including network adapter) and
indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
[L30 error]
NO
NO
Are outside devices of
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
connector CN80 connected?
Defect → Replace
YES
Check outside devices.
Defect → Replace
Do outside devices normally work?
YES
Check cause of operation.
[P30 error] (Central controller)
NO
NO
Is group operation carried out?
YES
Is there check code
on sub remote controller in main
and sub remote controllers?
YES
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Check corresponding
indoor unit/outdoor unit.
Defect → Replace
– 130 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
<In case of SP40, SP45>
[P10 error]
Is connection of
NO
NO
float switch connector
(Indoor control board CN34)
normal?
Correct connection
of connector.
YES
YES
Does float switch work?
YES
Is circuit wiring normal?
NO
Check and correct wiring
and wire circuit.
NO
Does drain pump work?
YES
Are connector pins 1 and 2
at drain pump unit side shorted
(Resistance value 0)?
NO
NO
Is power of
drain pump turned on? ∗
YES
YES
Replace drain pump
and indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
Check the drain pipe, etc.
Check indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
Replace drain pump.
Check wiring.
Defect → Replace
∗ Check that voltage of 1-2 pin of CN504 on the indoor P.C. board is +12V. (1 pin is plus (+).)
[F10 error]
NO
Is connection of TA sensor connector
Correct connection of connector.
Replace TA sensor.
(CN104 on indoor P.C. board) correct?
YES
NO
Are characteristics of
TA sensor resistance value normal?
YES
∗ Refer to TA sensor
(Temperature-Resistance value characteristic table)
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
– 131 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
[P12 error]
Turn off the power.
Is there no connection error or
disconnection on connectors CN333
and CN334 of indoor unit P.C. board
(MCC-1570)?
YES
Correct connection
of connector.
CN333
NO
Remove connectors CN333
and CN334 of indoor unit P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
CN334
NO
Does the fan rotate without trouble
when handling the fan with hands?
Replace indoor fan motor.
YES
Are resistance values
between phases at fan motor connector
CN333 motor side of indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570) correct? ∗1
Incorrect
Replace indoor fan motor.
Correct
∗1
• Are not coil windings between
(Red lead) and
(Black lead),
(Red lead) opened or shorted?
(White lead),
between
between
(White lead) and
(Black lead) and
→ The resistance should be the resistance value below.
SM40, SM45 → Approx. 70 to 100Ω
• Is not grounded between cabinet and
,
,
. → It should be 10MΩ or more.
Is resistance value of
fan motor connector CN334 motor side
of indoor P.C. board
Incorrect
Replace indoor fan motor.
(MCC-1570) correct? ∗2
Correct
∗2
Resistance value confirmation of the fan motor position detection circuit
Is not status between
(Yellow lead) and
(Pink lead) opened or shorted?
→ The resistance should be approx. 5k to 20kΩ.
Is output of
indoor fan motor position
NO
Replace indoor fan motor.
detection signal correct? ∗3
YES
∗3
Confirmation of the fan motor position detection signal
• Using a voltage tester, measure voltage between CN334
and
on the indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570) under condition that CN333 and CN334 are mounted and the power supply is turned on.
→ When rotating the fan slowly with hands, the pin voltage should shake between 0 and 5V.
• Between
and : 5V
Check indoor P.C. board
(MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
– 132 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
<In case of SP40, SP45>
[F02 error]
NO
NO
Is connection of TC sensor connector
Correct connection of connector.
(CN101 on Indoor P.C. board) correct?
YES
Are characteristics of
TC sensor resistance value normal?
Replace TC sensor.
YES
∗ Refer to TC sensor
(Temperature-Resistance value characteristic table)
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
[F01 error]
NO
NO
Is connection of TCJ sensor connector
(CN102 on Indoor P.C. board) correct?
Correct connection of connector.
Replace TCJ sensor.
YES
Are characteristics of
TCJ sensor resistance value normal?
YES
∗ Refer to Characteristics-2.
Check indoor main P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
– 133 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
[C06 error] (TCC-LINK central controller)
NO
NO
Are U3 and U4 communication lines normal?
YES
Correct communication line.
∗1
Correct connection of connector.
Is connection of connector normal?
YES
∗1
TCC-LINK central:
CN51 of TCC-LINK adapter P.C. board (MCC-1440) and CN050 of indoor P.C. board
NO
Check connection of A and B terminal blocks.
Correct communication line of remote controller.
Are A and B communication lines normal?
YES
YES
NO
Is there no connection error of power supply cable?
NO
Correct power wiring.
Is not the source power supply turned on?
YES
Turn on the source power supply.
YES
Did a power failure occur?
NO
YES
YES
Is the network address changed
from the remote controller?
Clear the check code.
Eliminate noise, etc.
NO
Is there no noise source?
NO
Uncontrolled
(Same to others)
Can the other indoor units
be normally controlled from the central controller?
Or is the operation status of indoor unit reflected?
Check central controller.
Defect → Replace
YES
Uncontrolled
Can the indoor unit be normally controlled
from the remote controller?
Check indoor P.C. board (MCC-1570).
Defect → Replace
YES
Check power supply transformer on
TCC-LINK adapter P.C. board (MCC-1440).
Defect → Replace
– 134 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
[E03 error] (Master indoor unit)
[E03 error] is detected when the indoor unit cannot receive a signal from the remote controller
(also central controller).
Check A and B remote controllers and communication lines of the central control system U3 and U4.
As communication is impossible, this check code [E03] is not displayed on the remote controller and the central
controller. [E01] is displayed on the remote controller and [C06 error] is displayed on the central controller.
If these check codes generate during operation, the air conditioner stops.
[F29 error]
This check code indicates a detection error of IC10 non-volatile memory (EEPROM) on the indoor unit P.C.
board, which generated during operation of the air conditioner. Replace the service P.C. board.
∗ When EEPROM was not inserted when power supply turned on or when the EEPROM data read/write
operation is impossible at all, the automatic address mode is repeated. In this time, [97 error] is displayed on
the central controller.
(Approx.
3 minutes)
(Approx.
1 minute)
LED (D02) on indoor unit
P.C. board flashes with
1Hz for approx. 10 seconds.
[SET] is displayed
on remote controller.
[SET]
goes off.
Reboot
(Reset)
(Power ON)
(Repetition)
[P31 error] (Follower indoor unit)
When the master unit of a group operation detected [E03], [L03], [L07] or [L08] error, the follower unit of the
group operation detects [P31 error] and then the unit stops.
There is no display of the check code or alarm history of the remote controller. (In this model, the mode enters
in automatic address set mode when the master unit detected [L03], [L07] or [L08] error.)
– 135 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
10-2-10. Diagnostic Procedure for Each Check Code (Outdoor Unit)
• This section describes the diagnostic method for each check code displayed on the remote controller.
In some cases, a check code indicates multiple symptoms.
Check and troubleshooting
Check code
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
[E04]
[Indoor/Outdoor communication error]
NO
NO
NO
Is setting of group address of remote controller correct?
YES
Check Item code [14].
Correct wiring
and inter-unit cable.
Are inner wiring and inter-unit cables (1, 2, 3) normal?
YES
Correct wiring
of terminal blocks.
Is wiring of terminal blocks (1, 2, 3) normal?
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[F04]
[Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error]
NO
Is CN601 connection normal?
Correct connector.
Is resistance value of TD sensor normal?
Sensor error → Replace
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[F06]
[Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error]
NO
Is CN600 connection normal?
Is resistance value of TE sensor normal?
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[F08]
[Outside air temp. sensor (TO) error]
NO
Is CN602 connection normal?
Is resistance value of TO sensor normal?
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 136 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
Check code
[F12]
[Suction temp. sensor (TS) error]
NO
Is CN603 connection normal?
Is resistance value of TS sensor normal?
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[H01]
[Compressor break down]
NO
Is power supply voltage normal?
AC198 to 264V
Correct power supply line.
YES
Is wire connection normal?
Compressor lead (Board side, Compressor side),
Reactor lead, Power supply lead
NO
Check wire connection
and correct it.
YES
YES
Is it not abnormal overload?
NO
Correct and clear the cause.
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[H02]
[Compressor lock]
NO
NO
Is power supply voltage normal?
AC198 to 264V
Correct power supply line.
YES
Is wire connection normal?
Compressor lead (Board side, Compressor side),
Reactor lead, Power supply lead
Check wire connection
and correct it.
YES
YES
NO
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Is compressor normal?
NO
Defect → Replace
Compressor lock → Replace
Is there no refrigerant stagnation?
YES
NO
Check TE, TS sensors and PMV.
Does PMV normally operate?
YES
Defect → Replace
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[H03]
[Current detection circuit error]
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
– 137 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
Check code
[P03]
[Discharge temp. error]
NO
Is there no gas leak?
Is refrigerant charge amount adequate?
Repair defective position.
Recharge refrigerant.
YES
NO
Repair defective position.
Replace defective part.
Is PMV normal?
YES
YES
Correct and clear the cause.
Is it not abnormal overload?
NO
NO
Is CN601 connection normal?
Is resistance value of TD sensor normal?
Correct connector.
Sensor error → Replace
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[P05]
[Power supply error (Voltage error)]
YES
Is there no down or up of power supply voltage?
(AC198 to 264V)
Confirm electric
construction, etc.
NO
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
[P19]
[4-way valve inverse error]
Temperature sensor check
TE sensor CN600
TS sensor CN603
Indoor TC sensor
Defect → Correct and repair
YES
NO
Is operation of 4-way valve normal?
(Check pipe temp., etc. in cooling/heating operation.)
NO
Is the coil resistance value of 4-way valve
Replace coil of 4-way valve.
between 1.3 and 1.6kΩ?
YES
Check 4-way valve.
Defect → Replace
– 138 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
Check and troubleshooting
(Item without special mention Indicates part of outdoor unit.)
Check code
[P22]
[Fan system error]
NO
Is there no problem on power supply voltage?
(198 to 264V)
Check wiring construction.
Ask repair of power supply.
YES
Does the fan rotate without trouble when rotating
shaft of fan motor with hands during power-OFF?
Is there no problem on coil resistance of fan motor?
Between red and white lead wire : 12 to 20Ω
Between white and black lead wire : 12 to 20Ω
Between black and red lead wire : 12 to 20Ω
YES
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
NO
Replace fan motor.
[P26]
[Short-circuit of compressor drive element]
Is there no problem on connection
of compressor lead or reactor?
(Check referring to Wiring diagram.)
NO
NO
Correct wiring.
YES
The same error does not occur in
operation without compressor lead.
Replace outdoor P.C. board.
YES
Check compressor. (Rear short, etc.)
Defect → Replace
[P29]
[Position detection circuit error]
Check outdoor P.C. board.
Defect → Replace
—
No code
[Other error] Compressor disorder due to sudden change of load, etc.
∗ LED display also may output due to negative phase of compressor or wire coming-off.
– 139 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP40, SP45>
Temperature – Resistance value characteristic table
Temperature sensor
T A,T C,T CJ,T E,T S,T O sensors
T D,T L sensors
Representative value
Representative value
Resistance value (kΩ)
(Minimum value) (Standard value) (Maximum value)
Resistance value (kΩ)
(Minimum value) (Standard value) (Maximum value)
T emperature
T emperature
(°C)
(°C)
0
10
20
25
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
32.33
19.63
12.23
9.75
33.80
20.35
12.59
10.00
7.990
5.192
3.451
2.343
1.623
1.146
0.8237
0.6023
35.30
21.09
12.95
10.25
8.218
5.375
3.594
2.454
1.709
1.213
0.8761
0.6434
0
10
20
25
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
150.5
92.76
58.61
47.01
37.93
25.12
17.00
11.74
8.269
5.925
4.321
3.205
161.3
99.05
62.36
49.93
40.22
26.55
17.92
12.34
8.668
6.195
4.507
3.336
172.7
105.6
66.26
52.97
42.59
28.03
18.86
12.95
9.074
6.470
4.696
3.468
7.764
5.013
3.312
2.236
1.540
1.082
0.7740
0.5634
T A,T C,T CJ,T E,T S,T O sensors
40
30
20
10
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
Temperature (˚C)
T D,T L sensors
200
150
100
50
20
15
10
5
0
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100
Temperature (˚C)
∗ As TH sensor (Outdoor unit heat sink temp. sensor) is incorporated in the outdoor control P.C. board, the resistance
value cannot be measured.
– 140 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. REPLACEMENT OF SERVICE P.C. BOARD
11-1. Indoort Unit
<Note: when replacing the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing>
The nonvolatile memory (hereafter called EEPROM, IC503) on the indoor unit P.C. board before replacement
includes the model specific type information and capacity codes as the factory-set value and the important
setting data which have been automatically or manually set when the indoor unit is installed, such as system/
indoor/group addresses, high ceiling select setting, etc.
When replacing the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing, follow the procedures below.
After replacement completes, confirm whether the settings are correct by checking the indoor unit No., Group
header unit/follower unit settings and perform the cooling cycle confirmation through the trial operation.
<Replacement procedures>
CASE 1
Before replacement, the indoor unit can be turned on and the setting data can be read out by
wired remote control operation.
EEPROM data read out [1]
ò
Replacement of P.C. board for Indoor unit servicing and power on [2]
ò
Writing the read out EEPROM data [3]
ò
Power reset
(for all indoor units connected to the remote control when the group operation control is performed.)
CASE 2
The EEPROM before replacement is defective and the setting data cannot be read out.
EEPROM data read out [2]
ò
Writing the setting data to EEPROM, such as high ceiling installation setting and
optional connection setting, etc., based on the customer information. [3]
ò
Power reset
(for all indoor units connected to the remote control when the group operation control is performed.)
– 141 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[1] Setting data read out from EEPROM
The setting data modified on the site, other than factory-set value, stored in the EEPROM shall be read out.
SET
CL
TEST
Step 1 Push
,
and
button on the remote controller simultaneously for more than 4 seconds.
∗ When the group operation control is performed, the unit No. displayed for the first time is the header unit No.
At this time, the CODE No. (DN) shows “10 ”. Also, the fan of the indoor unit selected starts its operation
and the swing operation also starts if it has the louvers.
UNIT LOUVER
Step 2 Every time when the
button is pushed, the indoor unit No. under the group control is displayed in
order. Specify the indoor unit No. to be replaced.
1. Change the CODE No. (DN) to 10 → 01 by pushing
/
buttons for the temperature
setting. (this is the setting for the filter sign lighting time.)
At this time, be sure to write down the setting data displayed.
2. Change the CODE No. (DN) by pushing
/
buttons for the temperature setting.
Similarly, be sure to write down the setting data displayed.
3. Repeat the step 2-2 to set the other settings in the same way and write down the setting data as shown
in the table 1 (example).
∗ The CODE No. (DN) are ranged from “01 ” to “FF ”. The CODE No. (DN) may skip.
TEST
Step 3 After writing down all setting data, push
button to return to the normal stop status.
(It takes approx. 1 min until the remote controller operation is available again.)
CODE No. required at least
1. The CODE No. for the Indoor unit type and Indoor unit capacity are
DN
10
11
12
13
14
Contents
Type
required to set the rotation number setting of the fan.
2. If the system/indoor/group addresses are different from those before
replacement, the auto-address setting mode starts and the manual
resetting may be required again.
Indoor unit capacity
System address
Indoor unit address
Group address
(when the multiple units group operation including twin system.)
[2] P.C. Board for indoor unit servicing replacement procedures
Step 1 Replace the P.C. board to the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing.
At this time, perform the same setting of the jumper wire (J01) setting (cut), switch SW501, (short-circuit)
connector CN34 as the setting of the P.C. board before replacement.
Step 2 According to the system configuration, turn on the indoor unit following to the either methods shown below.
a) Single operation (Indoor unit is used as standalone.)
Turn on the indoor unit.
1. After completion of the auto-address setting mode (required time: approx. 5 min.), proceed to [3].
(System address = 1, Indoor unit address = 1, Group address = 0 (standalone) are automatically set.)
SET
CL
TEST
2. Push
,
and
buttons simultaneously for more than 4 seconds to interrupt the auto-address
setting mode, and proceed to [3]. (The unit No. “
” is displayed.)
b) Group operation (including twin system)
Turn on the indoor unit(s) with its P.C. board replaced to the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing, accord-
ing to either methods 1 or 2 shown below.
1. Turn on only the indoor unit with its P.C. board replaced. (Be sure to confirm the remote controller is
surely connected. If not, the operation [3] cannot be performed.)
Perform either methods 1 or 2 described in item a) above.
2. Turn on the multiple indoor units including the indoor unit with its P.C. board replaced.
• Twin 1 system only
• All group connections
After completion of the auto-address setting mode (required time: approx. 5 min.), proceed to [3].
∗ The header unit of the group may be changed by performing the auto-address setting.
Also, the system address/Indoor unit address of the indoor unit with its P.C. board replaced may be
assigned to the addresses (not used) other than those of the indoor units without its P.C. board replaced.
It is recommended to keep the information in advance, which cooling system the indoor unit belongs to
or whether the indoor unit works as the header unit or the follower unit in the group control operation.
– 142 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
Setting 4-way air discharge cassette Indoor Unit model only
buttons, set “CE ” to the CODE No. (DN).
buttons, set the data. (0001)
1. Using the set temperature
/
2. Using the timer time
/
SET
• Push
button. (The setting completes if the setting data are displayed.)
<In case of 4-way Discharge Cassette type>
If the plug for short-circuit is attached on the P.C. board
before replacement, attach it on the P.C. board replaced.
Connector (CN504)
for drain pump
CAUTION
Be sure to set the jumper wire since the motor
protection level setting selection is performed on it.
∗ Set J02 as follows depending on the capacity class.
CN34
SW501
(Red)
Type
Jumper wire (J02)
SM56, 80
None
J02
4-Way
J01
Air Discharge Cassette
SM110, 140, 160 Required (factory setting)
SM40 to 56 None
Slim Duct
<In case of Slim Duct type>
• As P.C. board of the Slim Duct type differs from that of the 4-way Discharge Cassette type, selection by HP is
unnecessary.
TEST
• Push the
button to return to the normal stop status.
(It takes approx. 1 min until the remote controller operation is available again.)
[3] Writing the setting data to EEPROM
The settings stored in the EEPROM of the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing are the factory-set values.
SET
CL
TEST
Step 1 Push
,
and
buttons on the remote controller simultaneously for more than 4 seconds.
∗ In the group control operation, the unit No. displayed for the first time is the header unit No.
At this time, the CODE No. (DN) shows “10 ”. Also, the fan of the indoor unit selected starts its operation
and the swing operation starts if it has the louvers.
(The unit No. “
” is displayed if the auto-address setting mode is interrupted in [2] step 2 a))
UNIT LOUVER
Step 2 Every time when
button is pushed, the indoor unit No. in the group control operation are displayed
in order.
(The settings stored in the EEPROM of the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing are the factory-set values.)
Specify the indoor unit No. with its P.C. board replaced to the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing.
(You cannot perform this operation if “
” is displayed.)
Step 3 Select the CODE No. (DN) can be selected by pushing the
/
button for the temperature setting.
• Set the indoor unit type and capacity.
<Fig. 1 RBC-AMT32E>
The factory-set values shall be written to the EEPROM by changing
the type and capacity.
1. Set the CODE No. (DN) to “10 ”. (without change)
2. Select the type by pushing
/
buttons for the timer setting.
(For example, 4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type is set to “0001”.
Refer to table 2)
SET
3. Push
button.
(The operation completes if the setting data is displayed.)
4. Change the CODE No. (DN) to “11 ” by pushing
/
buttons for the temperature setting.
5. Select the capacity by pushing
/
buttons for the timer setting.
(For example, 80 Type is set to “0012”. Refer to table 3)
SET
6. Push
button.
(The setting completes if the setting data are displayed.)
3 6 5 1 4 2
– 143 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step 4 Write the on-site setting data to the EEPROM, such as address setting, etc. Perform the steps 1 and 2
above again.
Step 5 Change the CODE No. (DN) to “01 ” by pushing
/
buttons for the temperature setting.
(this is the setting for the filter sign lighting time.)
Step 6 Check the setting data displayed at this time with the setting data put down in [1].
1. If the setting data is different, modify the setting data by pushing
the data put down in [1].
/
buttons for the timer setting to
The operation completes if the setting data is displayed.
2. If the data is the same, proceed to next step.
Step 7 Change the CODE No. (DN) by pushing
As described above, check the setting data and modify to the data put down in [1].
Step 8 Repeat the steps 6 and 7.
Step 9 After the setting completes, push
/
buttons for the temperature setting.
TEST
button to return to the normal stop status.
(It takes approx. 1 min until the remote control operation is available again.)
∗ The CODE No. (DN) are ranged from “01 ” to “FF ”. The CODE No. (DN) is not limited to be serial No.
SET
Even after modifying the data wrongly and pushing
button, it is possible to return to the data before
CL
modification by pushing
button if the CODE No. (DN) is not changed.
<Fig. 2 EEPROM layout diagram>
The EEPROM (IC503) is attached to the IC socket. When detaching the EEPROM, use a tweezers, etc.
Be sure to attach the EEPROM by fitting its direction as shown in the figure.
∗ Do not bend the IC lead when replacing.
Cut out
EEPROM
EEPROM
IC503
Cut out
IC socket
– 144 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
Table 1. Setting data (CODE No. table (example))
Setting data
DN
01
02
03
Item
Filter sign lighting time
Factory-set value
Depending on Type
Filter pollution leve
0000: standard
Central control address
0099: Not determined
0002: +2°C
(flooring installation type: 0)
06
Heating suction temperature shift
OF
10
11
12
13
14
19
Cooling only
0000: Heat pump
Type
Depending on model type
Depending on capacity type
0099: Not determined
0099: Not determined
0099: Not determined
Depending on Type.
Indoor unit capacity
System address
Indoor unit address
Group address
Louver type (wind direction adjustment)
Temperature range of cooling/heating
automatic SW control point
1E
0003: 3 deg (Ts ± 1.5)
28
2A
2b
31
32
40
5d
60
Power failure automatic recovery
Option/Abnormal input (CN70) SW
0000: None
0002: Humidifier
Thermo output SW (T10
)
0000: Thermo ON
0000: Not available
0000: Body sensor
0003: Humidifier ON + Pump OFF
0000: Standard
ƒ
Ventilation fan (standalone)
Sensor SW (Selection of static pressure)
Humidifier control (+ drain pump control)
High ceiling SW
Timer setting (wired remote controller)
0000: Available
Demand setting
(outdoor unit current demand)
C2
0075: 75 %
d0
d3
d1
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
Remote controller operation save function
Rotation number of the self-clean operation
Frost protection function
0001: Enable
0001: 210ypm(at self-clean operation)
0000: None
Swing mode
0001: Standard
Louver fixing position (Flap No. 1)
Louver fixing position (Flap No. 2)
Louver fixing position (Flap No. 3)
Louver fixing position (Flap No. 4)
0000: Not fixed
0000: Not fixed
0000: Not fixed
0000: Not fixed
Table 3.
Indoor unit capacity: CODE No. 11
Table 2.Type: CODE No. 10
Setting data
0001*1 * 2
0005
Type
4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type RAV-SM∗∗∗UT-E
Slim Duct Type RAV-SM∗∗∗SDT-E
Type name abb.
Setting data
0000∗
0006
Type
Disable
40
0007
45
0009
56
∗1 EEPROM initial value on the P.C. board for indoor unit servicing
∗2
0012
80
0015
110
140
160
CAUTION
0017
<Model Name: RAV-SM∗∗∗UT-E>
0018
For the above models, set the CODE No. to “ CE ” and the setting
data 0000 (initial) to “0001”.
∗ EEPROM initial value on the P.C. board
for indoor unit servicing.
– 145 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
11-2. Outdoor Unit
1. Setting the jumper wires and DIP switches
Part name
J800 to J803
Function
Setting
Model switching
Cut these jumper wires according to the following table.
Jumper wire
Set these jumper wires to the settings of the P.C. board before
replacement.
J804 to J810
Settings
SW802
SW803
SW804
Settings
Set SW802 to the setting of the P.C. board before replacement.
Set SW803 to all OFF.
DIP switch
LED indication switching
Special operations for service Set SW804 to all OFF.
Model switching (J800 to J803)
Since this service P.C. board is available for several models, cut the jumper wires according to the following table.
If they are not cut correctly, an error code “L10” or “L29” appears on the remote controller and the operation of the air
conditioner is disabled.
Model name
J 800 J 801 J 802 J 803
Factory setting (default)
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
RAV-SP1104AT -E
∗
×
¡
RAV-SP1404AT -E
∗
¡ ×
∗ : Characters that indicate the following:
No character ...... Standard models
: Connected,
: Cut
¡
×
Z......................... For salt-affected areas
ZG ...................... For heavily salt-affected areas
J800 to J803
2. Installing the P.C. board
1) Apply thermal grease to the back (heat sink contacting side) of devices Q200, Q650, DB01, and DB02.
( Q300 and Q400 are not necessary to be applied thermal grease.)
2) Reuse the insulating sheet. When a small amount of thermal grease is applied to the back of the insulating
sheet, it adheres temporarily to the heat sink, which makes it easy to attach the insulating sheet.
3) Insert the P.C. board, align the holes of the insulating sheets, semiconductor devices, and heat sinks, and
then secure them with screws.
4) Connect the lead wires according to the wiring diagram sticked on the backside of the pannel .
Reuse the insulating sheet.
Apply thermal grease to
Applying thermal grease to the back
the back (heat sink contacting side) of
of the insulating sheet makes it easy
Q200, Q650, DB01, and DB02.
to attach the insulating sheet.
– 146 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. SETUP AT LOCAL SITE AND OTHERS
12-1. Indoor Unit
12-1-1. Test Run Setup on Remote Controller
<Wired remote controller>
TEST
1. When pushing
button on the remote controller for 4 seconds or more, “TEST” is displayed on LC display.
ON / OFF
Then push
button.
• “TEST” is displayed on LC display during operation of Test Run.
• During Test Run, temperature cannot be adjusted but air volume can be selected.
• In heating and cooling operation, a command to fix the Test Run frequency is output.
• Detection of error is performed as usual. However, do not use this function except case of Test Run
because it applies load on the unit.
2. Use either heating or cooling operation mode for [TEST].
NOTE : The outdoor unit does not operate after power has been turned on or for approx. 3 minutes after
operation has stopped.
TEST
3. After a Test Run has finished, push
button again and check that [TEST] on LC display has gone off.
(To prevent a continuous test run operation, 60-minutes timer release function is provided to this remote
controller.)
<Wireless remote controller>
(4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type only)
1
Turn off power of the unit.
Remove the adjuster attached with sensors from the ceiling panel.
For removing, refer to the Installation manual attached to the ceiling panel.
(Be careful to handle the adjuster because cables are connected to the sensor.)
Remove the sensor cover from the adjuster. (1 screw)
2
3
Change ON of Bit [1:TEST] of the sensor P.C. board switch [S003] to OFF.
Mount the sensor cover and mount the adjuster with sensor to the ceiling panel.
Turn on power of the unit.
ON / OFF
Push
button on the wireless remote controller and select [COOL] or [HEAT] operation
MODE
mode using
button.
(All the display lamps of sensors on the wireless remote controller flash during Test Run.)
• Do not perform Test Run operation in other modes than [HEAT] / [COOL] mode.
• Detection of error is performed as usual.
ON / OFF
4
5
After Test Run operation, push
Turn off power of the unit.
button to stop the operation.
Return Bit [1] of the sensor P.C. board switch [S003]
DIP switch S003
Bit 1: OFF → ON
to the original position. (ON → OFF)
Mount the adjuster with sensors to the ceiling panel.
ON
Sensor board
Sensor cover
Adjust corner cap
with sensor
– 147 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(Except 4-way Air Discharge Cassette Type and Under Ceiling Type)
1
Remove a screw which fixes the name plate of the receiver part on the wireless remote
controller.
Remove the nameplate of the reciver section by inserting a minus screwdriver, etc. into the notch at the
bottom of the plate, and set the Dip switch to [TEST RUN ON].
2
Execute a test operation with
button on the wireless remote controller.
•
,
and LED flash during test operation.
• Under status of [TEST RUN ON], the temperature adjustment from the wireless remote controller is
invalid.
Do not use this method in the operation other than test operation because the equipment is damaged.
3
4
Use either [COOL] or [HEAT] operation mode for test operation.
• The outdoor unit does not operate approx. 3 minutes
after power-ON and operation stop.
Receiver unit
Spacer
M4 × 25 screw
(2 pieces)
After the test operation finished, stop the air
conditioner from the wireless remote controller,
and return Dip switch of the sensor section as before.
(A 60 minutes timer clearing function is attached to the sensor
section in order to prevent a continuous test operation.)
Nameplate
Notch
Small screw
(Under Ceiling Type only)
1
Turn off power of the air conditioner.
Remove the adjust corner cap attached with sensor section from the ceiling panel. For removing method,
follow to the installation manual attached to the ceiling panel.
(Be careful to handle the sensor section because cables are connected to the sensor section.)
Remove the sensor cover from the adjust corner cap. (1 screw)
2
3
Change Bit [1:TEST] of the switch [S003] on the sensor P.C. board from OFF to ON.
Mount the sensor cover and attach the adjust corner cap with with sensors to the ceiling panel.
Turn on power of the air conditioner.
Push
button of the wireless remote controller and select an operation mode [COOL] or
MODE
[HEAT] with
button. (All the display lamps of the wireless remote controller sensor
section flash during the tst operation.)
• Do not use operation mode other than [COOL] or [HEAT].
• Error is detected as usual.
4
5
When the test operation has finished, push button to stop the operation.
Turn off power of the air conditioner.
Change Bit [1] of the switch [S003] on the
sensor P.C. board from ON to OFF.
4
3
1 2
Attach the adjust corner cap with sensors
to the ceiling panel.
ON
– 148 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of wireless remote controller>
Procedure
Description
Turn on power of the air conditioner.
1
2
The operation is not accepted for 5 minutes when power has been turned on at first time after installation,
and 1 minute when power has been turned on at the next time and after. After the specified time has
passed, perform a test operation.
Push [Start/Stop] button and change the operation mode to [COOL] or [HEAT] with [Mode] button.
Then change the fan speed to [High] using [Fan] button.
Test cooling operation
Test heating operation
Set temperature to [18°C] using [Temperature set]
button.
Set temperature to [30°C] using [Temperature set]
button.
3
4
5
After checking the receiving sound “Pi”, immediately After checking the receiving sound “Pi”, immediately
push [Temperature set] button to set to [19°C] push [Temperature set] button to set to [29°C].
After checking the receiving sound “Pi”, immediately After checking the receiving sound “Pi”, immediately
push [Temperature set] button to set to [18°C]. push [Temperature set] button to set to [30°C].
Then repeat the procedure
→
→
→
.
4 5 4 5
After approx. 10 seconds, all the display lamps on the sensor part of wireless remote controller,
6
7
[Operation] (Green), [Timer] (Green), and [Ready] (Yellow) flash and the air conditioner starts operation.
If the lamps do not flash, repeat the procedure
2
and after.
After the test operation, push [Start/Stop] button to stop the operation.
<Outline of test operation from the wireless remote controller>
Test cooling operation:
Start → 18°C → 19°C → 18°C → 19°C → 18°C → 19°C → 18°C → (Test operation) → Stop
Test heating operation:
Start → 30°C → 29°C → 30°C → 29°C → 30°C → 29°C → 30°C → (Test operation) → Stop
Be sure to set the
air speed to [High]
2
3, 4, 5, 6
2, 7
– 149 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-1-2. Forced Defrost Setup of Remote Controller (For wired remote controller only)
(Preparation in advance)
TEST
SET
CL
1
Push
+
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more on the remote controller.
(Push buttons while the air conditioner stops.)
The first displayed unit No. is the master indoor unit address in the group control.
UNIT
2
Every pushing
other.
button, the indoor unit No. in the group control is displayed one after the
Select a main indoor unit (outdoor unit is connected) which is to be defrosted. In this time, fan and louver of
the selected indoor unit operate.
TEMP.
3
4
5
6
Using the set temperature
buttons, specify the item code (DN) 8C.
TIME
Using the timer time
buttons, set time to data 0001. (0000 at shipment)
SET
Push
button. (OK if indication lights)
TEST
Pushing
button returns the status to the normal stop status.
(Practical operation)
ON / OFF
• Push ON/OFF
Key.
• Select the HEAT mode.
• After while, the forced defrost signal is sent to the outdoor unit and then the outdoor unit starts defrost operation.
(The forced defrost operation is performed for Max. 12 minutes.)
• After defrost operation finished, the operation returns to the heating operation.
To execute the defrost operation again, start procedure from above item
(If the forced defrost operation was executed once, setting of the above forced defrost operation is cleared.)
1
.
12-1-3. LED Display on P.C. Board
1. D501 (Red)
• It goes on (Goes on by operation of the main microcomputer) at the same time when the power supply is
turned on.
• It flashes with 1-second interval (every 0.5 second):When there is no EEPROM or writing-in operation fails.
• It flashes with 10-seconds interval (every 5 second): During DISP mode
• It flashes with 2-seconds interval (every 1 second): While setting of function select (EEPROM)
2. D403 (Red)
• It goes on when power supply of the remote controller is turned on. (Lights on hardware)
3. D503 (Yellow): Main bus communication
• It goes on for 5 seconds in the first half of communication with the central controller.
4. D504 (Green): Sub bus communication
• It flashes for 5 seconds in the first half of communication with the remote controller. (Group master unit)
• It flashes with 0.2-second interval (for 0.1 second) for 5 second in the latter half of communication between
master and follower in the Gr indoor unit.
5. D14 (Orange)
• It flashes while receiving the serial signal from the outdoor unit. (Hardware)
6. D15 (Green)
• It flashes while sending the serial signal to the outdoor unit. (Hardware)
– 150 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-1-4. Function Selection Setup
<Procedure> Perform setting while the air conditioner stops.
TEST
SET
CL
1
2
Push
+
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds or more.
The first displayed unit No. is the master indoor unit address in the group control.
In this time, fan and louver of the selected indoor unit operate.
ò
UNIT LOUVER
Every pushing
button (button at left side), the indoor unit No. in the group control is
displayed one after the other. In this time, fan and louver of the selected indoor unit only operate.
ò
TEMP.
3
4
5
Using the set temperature
buttons, specify the item code (DN).
ò
TIME
Using the timer time
buttons, select the set data.
ò
SET
Push
button. (OK if indication lights)
• To change the selected indoor unit, proceed to Procedure
2
.
• To change item to be set up, proceed to Procedure
3
.
ò
TEST
6
Pushing
button returns the status to the normal stop status.
TEMP.
ON / OFF
TIMER SET
TIME
FAN
SAVE
MODE
VENT
3
6
4
5
FILTER
RESET TEST
SET
CL
SWING/FIX
UNIT LOUVER
1
2
<Operation procedure>
1 2 3 4 5 6 END
– 151 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function selection item No. (DN) list
DN
Item
Contents
At shipment from factory
0000: None
0001: 150H
01
Filter sign lighting time
0002: 2500H
0004: 10000H
0003: 5000H
0005: Clogging sensor used
According to type
0000: Standard
0001: Heavy stain (Half of standard time)
02
03
Filter stain level
0000: Standard
0001: No.1 unit
0099: Undecided
to
0064: No.64 unit
Central control address
0099: Undecided
0000: No shift
0002: +2°C
0001: +1°C
0010: +10°C
(Up to +6 is recommended.)
0002: +2°C
(Floor type 0000: 0°C)
06
Heating suction temp. shift
to
0000: Heat pump
0001: Cooling only (No display for [AUTO] [HEAT] )
0F Cooling-only
0000: Heat pump
0000: (1-way air discharge cassette)
0001: (4-way air discharge cassette) to 0037
10
Type
According to model type
11
12
13
Indoor unit capacity
Line address
0000: Undecided
0001: No.1 unit
0001: No.1 unit
0000: Individual
0001 to 0034
According to capacity type
0099: Undecided
to
to
0030: No.30 unit
0064: No.64 unit
0001: Master unit in group
Indoor unit address
0099: Undecided
14
19
Group address
0099: Undecided
0002: Follower unit in group
0000: No louver model
(0002:1-way)
0004: 4-way
0001: Swing only
(0003:2-way)
Louver type
(Adjustment of air direction)
According to model type
In automatic cooling/heating, temp.
0000: 0 deg
to
0010: 10 deg
0003: 3 deg
(Ts±1.5)
1E width of cool → heat, heat →
(Cool/heat are reversed with ± (Data value) /
2 against the set temperature)
cool mode selection control point
28
Automatic reset of power failure
0000: None
0001: Provided
0000: None
0000: Filter input
0002: Humidifier input
0001: Alarm input
2A Selection of option / error input (CN70)
0002: Humidifier
(Air cleaner, etc.)
Selection of thermostat output
(T10 ƒ )
0000: Indoor thermostat ON
0001: ON receiving output of outdoor compressor
2b
0000: Thermostat ON
0000: Normal (JEMA)
0002: Fire alarm input
0001: Card input
(Forgotten to be off)
0000: Normal
(HA terminal)
2E Selection of HA (T10) terminal
AUTO grille
(This function is not provided.)
30
0000: Impossible
0001: Possible
0000: Impossible
31
32
Fan (Single operation)
Sensor selection
0000: Impossible
0000: Body TA sensor
0000: No control
0001: Possible
0000: Impossible
0001: Remote controller sensor
0000: Body sensor
Humidifier control
(+Drain pump control)
(This function is not provided.)
0001: Humidifier + Vaporizing type (Pump ON)
0002: Humidifier + Supersonic type
(Pump ON when specified time elapsed)
0003: Humidifier + Natural drain type (Pump OFF)
0003: Humidifier ON
Pump OFF
40
<4-way Discharge Cassette type>
High ceiling selection
(Air volume selection)
0000: Standard filter
0001: Super long life
0003: High performance (65%), High performance (90%),
(0006:Deodorant, Ammonia deodorization)
0000: Standard
5d
60
0000: Standard (At shipment)
0001: High static pressure 1
0003: High static pressure 2
0006: High static pressure 3
(10 Pa)
(20 Pa)
(35 Pa)
(50 Pa)
<Slim Duct type>
External static pressure
0000: Standard
0000: Operable
Timer setting (Wired remote controller) 0000: Operable
0001: Operation prohibited
– 152 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DN
Item
Contents
0000: 0.5 h to 0.012: 0 h
At shipment from factory
0000: None
Set when compressor-ON time is 10 to 60 minutes.
42
Self-clean operation time
0002: 1 hour
When ON-time is 60 minutes or more,
the double of this operation time setting is set.
Selection of louver horizontal discharge
position
0000: Smudging-less setting
0002: Cold draft preventive setting
0000: Smudging-
less setting
45
C2 Current demand X% to outdoor unit
0050: 50%
0000: No
to
0100: 100%
0075: 75%
• Clean operation is performed in case of stop by HA input.
• HA operation output OFF during clean operation in case of
stop by remote controller
0000: None
CC Setting of self-clean operation forced stop
0001: Yes
• Clean operation is not performed in case of stop by HA input.
• HA operation output ON during clean operation in case of stop
by remote controller
The air conditioner stops (including fire alarm such as remote
monitor system) while setup of [ON/OFF] operation prohibited
(Central 1, 2) is performed from the central controller side.
Clean operation stop function when
CD
0000: Valid
[ON/OFF] operation is prohibited.
0000: Valid (Clean operation)
0001: Invalid (No clean operation)
D0 Existence of remote controller save function 0000: Invalid (Impossible)
D1 Existence of 8°C heating operation function 0000: Invalid (Impossible)
0001: Valid (Possible)
0001: Valid (Possible)
0001: Valid (Possible)
0001: Invalid (Impossible)
0000: Invalid (Self clean operation is not carried out.)
0001: Valid (Self clean operation is practiced with 210 rpm.)
0001: Valid
D3 Revolution frequency of self clean operation
(210 rpm / operation)
Display / No display of
[Dry operation] during self clean operation
D4
0000: Display
0001: No display
0000: Display
0000: No synchronization
0002: Dual
0001: 4-way synchronization
0003: Cycle
0001: 4-way
F0 Louver swing mode
synchronization
0000: Release (Free)
F1 Louver No.1 fixed position
0001 to 0005: Horizontal discharge position to
Downward discharge position
0000: Release
0000: Release
0000: Release
0000: Release
0000: Release (Free)
0001 to 0005: Horizontal discharge position to
Downward discharge position
F2 Louver No.2 fixed position
F3 Louver No.3 fixed position
F4 Louver No.4 fixed position
0000: Release (Free)
0001 to 0005: Horizontal discharge position to
Downward discharge position
0000: Release (Free)
0001 to 0005: Horizontal discharge position to
Downward discharge position
∗ The swing mode selection (DN code No. [F0]), louver fix (DN code No. [F1] to [F4]) and restriction ratio setting for
save operation (DN code No. [C2]) can be set/changed from the normal DN setup (Detail DN setup).
– 153 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-1-5. Wiring and Setting of Remote Controller Control
2-remote controller control
<Wired remote controller>
(Controlled by 2 remote controllers)
How to set wired remote controller
as sub remote controller
This control is to operate 1 or multiple indoor units
are operated by 2 remote controllers.
(Max. 2 remote controllers are connectable.)
Change DIP switch inside of the rear side of the
remote controller switch from remote controller master
to sub. (In case of RBC-AMT32E)
• When connected 2 remote controllers
operate an indoor unit
Remote controller (Inside of the rear side)
Remote controller
switch (Master)
Remote controller
switch (Sub)
1 2
Sold
separately
Sold
separately
Sub remote
controller
A B
A B
Master remote
controller
1
2
DIP switch
Remote controller
cables (Procured locally)
1
2
Terminal block for
remote controller cables
A B
<Wireless remote controller>
Indoor unit
1 2 3
How to set wireless remote controller to sub
remote controller
Change OFF of Bit [3: Remote controller Sub/Master]
of switch S003 to ON.
1 2 3
Outdoor unit
<In case of 4-way Discharge Cassette type>
• When connected 2 remote controllers
operate the twin
DIP switch S003
Bit 1: OFF → ON
Remote controller
switch (Master)
Remote controller
ON
switch (Sub)
Remote controller
inter-unit wire
(Procured locally)
Sold
Sold
separately
separately
Sensor board
Sensor cover
A B
A B
Terminal block for
remote controller cables
Adjust corner cap
with sensor
A B
A B
Replace OFF with ON of the Bit SW
[Remote controller Sub/Master].
Indoor unit 1
1 2 3
Indoor unit 2
1 2 3
<In case of Slim Duct type>
1 2 3
Inter-unit wiring
between indoor units
(Procured locally)
Outdoor unit
(Setup method)
One or multiple indoor units are controlled by
2 remote controllers.
(Max. 2 remote controllers are connectable.)
[Remote controller
Sub/Master]
DIP SW
[Operation]
1. The operation contents can be changed by Last-push-priority.
2. Use a timer on either Master remote controller or Sub remote controller.
– 154 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-1-6. Monitor Function of Remote Controller Switch
n Calling of sensor temperature display
<Contents>
Each data of the remote controller, indoor unit and outdoor unit can be understood by calling the service monitor
mode from the remote controller.
<Procedure>
CL
TEST
1
Push
+
buttons simultaneously for 4 seconds to
call the service monitor mode.
The service monitor goes on, the master indoor unit No. is
displayed at first and then the temperature of item code 00 is
displayed.
TEMP.
ON / OFF
ò
TEMP.
TIMER SET
TIME
FAN
SAVE
MODE
VENT
2
Push temperature set
buttons and then change
the item code of data to be monitored.
FILTER
RESET TEST
SET
CL
SWING/FIX
UNIT LOUVER
The item code list is shown below.
2 4 1
<Operation procedure>
3
1 2 3 4
Returned to usual display
Item code
Data name
Room temperature
Unit
Item code
Data name
Unit
01
°C
60
61
Outdoor heat exchanger (Coil) temperature (TE)
Outside temperature (TO)
°C
°C
(Remote controller)
02
03
Indoor suction temperature (TA)
°C
°C
62
Compressor discharge temperature (TD)
Compressor suction temperature (TS)
Heat sink temperature (THS)
°C
Indoor heat exchanger (Coil)
temperature (TCJ)
63
°C
65
°C
04
Indoor heat exchanger (Coil)
temperature (TC)
°C
6A
Operation current (× 1/10)
A
∗ 6D
∗ 70
∗ 72
∗ 73
F1
Outdoor heat exchanger (Coil) temperature (TL)
Compressor operation frequency
°C
∗ 07
∗ F2
F3
Indoor fan revolution frequency
rpm
rps
rpm
rpm
×100h
Indoor fan calculated operation time ×100h
Outdoor fan revolution frequency (Lower)
Outdoor fan revolution frequency (Upper)
Compressor calculated operation time
Filter sign time
×1h
°C
∗ F8
Indoor discharge temperature*1
Items with ∗ marks are not provided to the Slim Duct type.
ò
UNIT LOUVER
3
4
Push
button to select the indoor unit to be monitored.
Each data of the indoor unit and its outdoor units can be monitored.
ò
TEST
Pushing
button returns the status to the usual display.
∗1 The indoor discharge temperature of item code [F8] is the estimated value from TC or TCJ sensor.
Use this value to check discharge temperature at test run.
(A discharge temperature sensor is not provided to this model.)
• The data value of each item is not the real time, but value delayed by a few seconds to ten-odd seconds.
• If the combined outdoor unit is one before 2 or 3 series, the outdoor unit data [6D], [70], [72] and [73]
are not displayed.
– 155 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
n Calling of error history
<Contents>
The error contents in the past can be called.
<Procedure>
SET
TEST
1
Push
+
buttons simultaneously for
4 seconds or more to call the service check mode.
TEMP.
ON / OFF
Service Check goes on, the item code 01 is displayed, and
then the content of the latest alarm is displayed. The number
and error contents of the indoor unit in which an error oc-
curred are displayed.
TIMER SET
TIME
FAN
SAVE
MODE
VENT
FILTER
RESET TEST
SET
CL
SWING/FIX
UNIT LOUVER
2
In order to monitor another error history, push the set
temperature
/
buttons to change the error
history No. (Item code).
Item code 01 (Latest) → Item code 04 (Old)
2 3 1
NOTE : 4 error histories are stored in memory.
TEST
3
Pushing
button returns the display to usual display.
<Operation procedure>
1 2 3
REQUIREMENT
CL
Do not push
button, otherwise all the error histories of the
Returned to usual display
indoor unit are deleted.
(Group control operation)
In a group control, operation of maximum 8 indoor units can be controlled by a remote controller.
The indoor unit connected with outdoor unit (Individual/Master of twin) controls room temperature according to
setting on the remote controller.
<System example>
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
Master
2-1
1-1
3-1
4-1
7-1
Max. 8 units
Remote controller
1. Display range on remote controller
The setup range (Operation mode/Air volume select/Setup temp) of the indoor unit which was set to the
master unit is reflected on the remote controller.
2. Address setup
Turn on power of the indoor unit to be controlled in a group within 3 minutes after setting of automatic
address.
If power of the indoor unit is not turned on within 3 minutes (completion of automatic address setting), the
system is rebooted and the automatic address setting will be judged again.
1) Connect 3 In/Out cables surely.
2) Check line address/indoor address/group address of the unit one by one.
3) The unit No. (line/indoor gout address) which have been set once keep the present status as a rule if the
unit No. is not duplicated with one of another unit.
– 156 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
n Indoor unit power-ON sequence
Power ON
• The unit without power feed waits entirely
→ Waiting status is released by system start
• Reboot when power is fed on the way
<By feed unit>
<Automatic
address judgment>
Not normal
NO
3 minutes elapse
Gr construction check
YES
Normal
∗ Gr normal
1) There is no duplicated indoor unit address.
2) There is no invalid indoor unit address.
3) Individual unit and master/follower units
are not intermingled.
4) Only a unit for individual.
5) A master indoor unit and 1 or more
follower indoor units for Gr.
System start
Automatic address starts.
(Approx. 1 minute up to finish)
<Initial communication>
Outdoor model distinction (10 seconds) (Indoor unit)
Twin Master/follower distinction (Indoor unit)
Gr construction, louver information (Remote controller)
<Cautions at test run>
• Power supply/Indoor/Outdoor serial and Gr wiring: OK
• Powers of all indoor units are turned on within 3 minutes.
• Reception time for remote controller operation
(After power supply was turned on)
1) When address is OK : Approx. 50 seconds
2) In AUTO address
: Approx. 4 to 5 minutes
Remote controller operation is available.
(Approx. 50 seconds after power-ON)
<Usual regular
communication>
Regular communication between indoor units (Every 30 seconds) (Master/Follower)
Regular communication on the identical pipe (every 30 seconds) (Twin Master/Follower)
(When the above status changes, immediately communicates.)
(Repetition)
• In a group operation, if the indoor unit which was fed power after judgment of automatic address cannot
receive regular communication from the master unit and regular communication on identical pipe within
120 seconds after power was turned on, it reboots (system reset).
→ The operation starts from judgment of automatic address (Gr construction check) again.
(If the address of the master unit was determined in the previous time, the power fed to the master unit and
reboot works, the master unit may change though the indoor unit line address is not changed.)
– 157 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12-2. Setup at Local Site / Others
Model name:TCB-PCNT30TLE2
12-2-1. TCC-LINK Adapter (For TCC-LINK Central Control)
1. Function
This model is an optional P.C. board to connect the indoor unit to TCC-LINK (Central controller).
2. Microprocessor block diagram
Indoor unit
Central controller
TCC-LINK adapter P.C. board
CN40
CN050
Indoor control
P.C. board
CN041
CN51
TCC-LINK
communication circuit
Terminal
resistance
SW01
MCC-1440
Terminal block
(A, B)
TCC-LINK
Communication units
Communication distance : 2000 m
: Total 64 units
Remote controller
3. TCC-LINK wiring connection
CAUTION
1) When controlling customized setup collectively, TCC-LINK adapter (This option) is required.
2) In case of group operation or twin operation, the adapter is necessary to be connected to the main unit.
3) Connect the central control devices to the central control system wiring.
4) When controlling collectively customized setup only, turn on only Bit 1 of SW01 of the least line of the system
address No. (OFF when shipped from the factory)
* In case of customized setup, the address is necessary to be set up again from the wired remote
controller after automatic addressing.
Central control device
Central control device
Central control devices: Max. 10 units
U1 U2
U3 U4
U1 U2
U3 U4
Refrigerant line 1
Refrigerant line 2
Refrigerant line 3
1 2 3
Refrigerant line 4
1 2 3
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
Indoor/outdoor inter-unit wire (AC230V serial)
Central control system wiring
Caution 3
* Wiring for No.1 and 2 only
Master
unit
Sub
unit
Sub unit
Master unit
Indoor unit
U3 U4 1 2 3
A B
U3 U4 1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
A B
U3 U4 1 2 3
A B
A B
A B
TCC-LINK adapter
This product
(
)
Caution 1
Caution 2
sold separately
Remote controller
wiring
Remote controller
Remote controller
Remote controller
Remote controller
Group operation (Max. 8 units)
Indoor units in all refrigerant lines: Max. 64 units
Twin operation
[If mixed with multi model (Link wiring), multi indoor units are included.]
* However group sub units and twin sub units of customized setup are not included in number of the units.
– 158 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Wiring specifications
• Use 2-core with no polar wire.
• Match the length of wire to wire length of the central
control system.
No. of wires
Size
Up to 1000m: twisted wire 1.25mm2
Up to 2000m: twisted wire 2.0mm2
If mixed in the system, the wire length is lengthened
with all indoor/outdoor inter-unit wire length at side.
2
• To prevent noise trouble, use 2-core shield wire.
• Connect the shield wire by closed-end connection and apply open process (insulating process) to the last
terminal. Ground the earth wire to 1 point at indoor unit side. (In case of central controlling of digital inverter
unit setup)
CAUTION
1) Closed-end connection of shield wire (Connect all the connecting parts of each indoor unit)
2) Apply open process to the last terminal (insulating process).
Central control device
3) Ground earth wire to 1 point at indoor unit side.
U1 U2
Caution 2
Caution 1
Caution 3
Central control system wiring
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
: TCC-LINK adapter
(This option)
Master
unit
U3 U4 1 2 3
Sub unit
1 2 3
Sub unit
Master unit
Indoor unit
U3 U4 1 2 3
A B
1 2 3
U3 U4 1 2 3
A B
A B
A B
A B
Earth terminal
Remote controller
Remote controller
Remote controller
Remote controller
(Group operation)
(Twin operation)
5. P.C. board switch (SW01) setup
When performing collective control by customized setup only, the setup of terminator is necessary.
• Using SW01, set up the terminator.
• Set up the terminator to only the adapter connected to the indoor unit of least line address No.
Central control device
Central control device
Central control devices: Max. 10 units
U1 U2
U3 U4
U1 U2
U3 U4
Refrigerant line 1
Outdoor unit
Refrigerant line 2
Refrigerant line 3
1 2 3
Refrigerant line 4
1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3
Indoor/outdoor inter-unit wire (AC230V serial)
Central control system wiring
* Wiring for No.1 and 2 only
Master
unit
Sub
unit
Sub unit
Master unit
Indoor unit
U3 U4 1 2 3
U3 U4 1 2 3
1 2 3
A B
Remote controller wiring
Remote controller Remote controller
Group operation (Max. 8 units)
1 2 3
U3 U4 1 2 3
A B
A B
A B
A B
TCC-LINK adapter
This product
sold separately
(
)
Remote controller
Remote controller
Remote controller
Twin operation
Line address
SW01 Bit 1
SW01 Bit 2
Remarks
1
ON
OFF
2
OFF
OFF
4
OFF
OFF
(OFF at shipment from factory)
(OFF at shipment from factory)
Turn SW01 Bit 1 to ON. As status shipped from factory
As status shipped from factory
(Reference) Setup contents of switch
SW01
Terminator
Remarks
Bit 1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Bit 1
OFF
OFF
ON
None
100Ω
75Ω
Mixed with multi (Link wiring) at shipment from factory
Central control by digital inverter only
Spare
Spare
ON
43Ω
– 159 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. External view of P.C. board assembly
Terminator (SW01)
52
85
7. Address setup
In addition to set up the central control address, it is necessary to change the indoor unit number.
(Line/Indoor/Group address). For details, refer to TCC-LINK Adapter Installation Manual.
12-3. How to Set up Central Control Address Number
When connecting the indoor unit to the central control remote controller using TCC-LINK adapter, it is neces-
sary to set up the central control address number.
• The central control address number is displayed as the line No. of the central control remote controller.
1. Setup from remote controller at indoor unit side
∗ If you use the network adapter P.C. board, it is effective only when No. 7 of setup switch SW01 on P.C.
board is turned off.
<Procedure> Perform setup while the unit stops.
VENT
TEST
1
Push
When group control is executed, first the unit No.
control are selected. In this time, fans of all the selected indoor units are turned on. (Fig. 1)
+
buttons for 4 seconds or more.
is displayed and all the indoor units in the group
UNIT LOUVER
(Keep
displayed status without pushing
button.)
In case of individual remote controller which is not group-controlled, Line address and Indoor unit address
are displayed.
TEMP.
2
3
Using temperature setup
buttons, specify item code 03.
TIME
Using timer time
buttons, select the setup data.
The setup data is shown in the table below (Table 1).
SET
4
5
Push
button. (OK if display goes on.)
(Fig.1)
• To change the item to be set up, return to Procedure 2.
TEST
Push
button.
The status returns to usual stop status.
(Table 1)
TEMP.
ON / OFF
Setup data
Central control address No.
TIMER SET
FAN
SAVE
MODE
VENT
2
1
0001
0002
0003
:
1
2
3
TIME
3
1
FILTER
RESET TEST
SET
CL
SWING/FIX
UNIT LOUVER
:
0064
64
0099
Unset (Setup at shipment from factory)
4
5
– 160 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. How to confirm the central control address
(New function for AMT32 remote controller)
<Procedure> It can be confirmed even during operation or stopping.
UNIT LOUVER
1
2
Push
button for 4 seconds or more.
ò
In the frame at left side of the remote controller screen, the lighting set contents are
displayed.
During unset time, 0099 (At shipment from factory) is displayed.
ò
After lighting display for 3 seconds, the display automatically disappears.
3
If any button is pushed during display, immediately the display disappears and then the pushed button is
displayed.
– 161 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
∗ Dual swing
3. How to set up type of swing
<For only 4-way Discharge Cassette type>
SWING/FIX
(Recommended for heating operation)
• The adjoined louvers repeat horizontal
discharge/Downward discharge alternately
to clear irregularity of the temperature in
heating operation.
1
Push
the operation.
for 4 seconds or more during stop of
•
flashes.
• The vertical discharge spreads hot air to
the floor, and the horizontal discharge stirs.
Both suppress the temperature irregularity.
UNIT LOUVER
2
Push
(At the left side of the button) and
select the unit to be selected.
• Every pushing the button, the unit No. changes.
Horizoontal
discharge
UNIT No.
1–1
UNIT No.
1–2
UNIT No.
1–3
Horizontal
discharge
UNIT No.
No display
UNIT No.
1–4
Downward
discharge
Downward
discharge
The fan of the selected unit rotates and the louver swings.
3
Using TIMER SET
the swing.
/
buttons, select type of
Horizontal
discharge
Horizoontal
discharge
Downward
discharge
Downward
discharge
Swing setup code
∗ Cycle swing
(Recommended for cooling operation)
Swing setup code
Louver operation
Standard swing (At shipment)
Dual swing
• 4 louvers swing with time lag as if they
heave.
0001
0002
0003
Cycle swing
REQUIREMENT
• Do not set 0000. (Louver may cause a trouble.)
SET
4
5
Push
Push
.
TEST
to finish the setup.
∗ Standard swing
Four louvers swing simultaneously with the same
angel.
Swing
– 162 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. How to set louver lock (Louver fix)
03
01
Refrigerant pipe
1<For only 4-way Discharge Cassette type>
Push
(At the right side of the button) for
UNIT LOUVER
Electric parts box
4 seconds or more during stop of the operation.
04
02
•
flashes.
Drain pipe
UNIT LOUVER
2
Push
(At the left side of the button) and
select the unit to be set.
• Every pushing the button, the unit No. changes.
NOTIFICATION
UNIT No.
1–1
UNIT No.
1–2
UNIT No.
1–3
• Even if louver lock works, the louver temporarily
moves in the following cases.
1) During stop
UNIT No.
1–4
2) At start of heating operation
3) During defrost operation
4) During thermostat OFF
The fan of the selected unit rotates and the
louver swings.
3
4
Push temp. set
/
to display the
louver No. of which air direction is to be fixed.
• The selected louver swings.
5. How to clear louver lock
<For only 4-way Discharge Cassette type>
In the item 4 of the louver lock setup
procedure, set the air direction to 0000.
[F1]
[F2]
[F3]
[F4]
•
mark goes off.
PushTIMER SET
/
and select air
The operations from 1 to 3, 5
and 6 are same as those of the
louver lock.
direction of the louver of which swinging you
do not want.
Code 0000
6. How to set contents of save operation
In combination with outdoor units before 4 series,
the displayed setup value exchanges, but the real
operation is “75% fixed”.
Code 0001
0002
0005
0003
SAVE
1
2
Push
for 4 seconds or more during
stop of the operation.
•
flashes.
UNIT LOUVER
Push
(At the left side of the button)
0004
and select the unit to be set.
• Every pushing the button, the unit No. changes.
∗ If selecting above „ and …, there may be fear of
The fan of the selected unit rotates and the
louver swings.
dewing in cooling time.
SET
5
6
Push
to determine the setup contents.
mark goes on.
UNIT No.
1–1
UNIT No.
1–2
UNIT No.
1–3
• When the setup was determined,
UNIT No. 1–4
To set continuously the louver lock of the other unit,
repeat operations from 2 but from 3 to set the other
louver lock in the same unit, respectively.
TEST
3
Determine the capacity restricted value when
pushing the save button ofTIMER SET
• Every pushing the button, the capacity re-
stricted value can be set at 1% interval in the
range between 100% and 50%.
/
.
Push
to finish the setup.
∗ The setting at shipment is 75%.
Louver
No.
0001 to 0005
(Louver fixed position code)
Setup value at saving
∗ F1 displayed at the item code on the remote
controller means that the 01 louver was selected
as shown in the figure.
4
Push SET and then push TEST to finish the setup.
– 163 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. When installing separately sold filters
REQUIREMENT
• When you use this air conditioner for the first time, it takes approx. 5 minutes until the remote controller becomes
available after power-on. This is normal.
<When power is turned on for the first time after installation>
Approx. 5 minutes
It takes approx. 5 minutes until the remote controller
Remote
becomes available.
“SETTING”
flashes
“SETTING”
goes out
Power ON
controller
is available
<When power is turned on for the second (or later) time>
Approx. 1 minute
Remote
It takes approx. 1 minute until the remote controller
“SETTING”
flashes
“SETTING”
goes out
becomes available.
Power ON
controller
is available
• Normal settings were made when the indoor unit
was shipped from factory. Change the indoor unit settings as required.
• Use the wired remote controller to change the settings.
∗ The settings cannot be changed using the wireless remote controller, sub remote controller, or remote-
controllerless system (for central remote controller only).
Therefore, install the wired remote controller to change the settings.
n Changing of settings of for applicable controls
Basic procedure for changing settings
Change the settings while the air conditioner is not working.
(Be sure to stop the air conditioner before making settings.)
1
3
Procedure 1
TEST
4
Push
button and temp. setup
button
5
simultaneously for at least 4 seconds.
6
1
After a while, the display flashes as shown in the
figure. Confirm that the CODE No. is [01].
2
TEST
• If the CODE No. is not [01], push
the display content, and repeat the procedure from
the beginning.
(No operation of the remote controller is accepted for
a while after
button to erase
Procedure 4
Using timer time
/
buttons, select SET DATA
[
].
TEST
∗∗∗∗
button is pushed.)
Procedure 5
SET
Push
button. When the display changes from
flashing to lit, the setup is completed.
• To change settings of another indoor unit, repeat
from Procedure 2.
• To change other settings of the selected indoor unit,
repeat from Procedure 3.
(∗ Display content varies with the indoor unit model.)
SET
Use
button to clear the settings.
SET
To make settings after
from Procedure 2.
button was pushed, repeat
Procedure 2
Each time you push
UNIT LOUVER
button, indoor unit
Procedure 6
When settings have been completed, push
numbers in the control group change cyclically.
Select the indoor unit you want to change settings for.
TEST
button
The fan of the selected unit runs. You can confirm the
indoor unit for which you want to change settings.
to determine the settings.
TEST
When
button is pushed, “SETTING” flashes and
then the display content disappears and the air
conditioner enters the normal stop mode.
(While “SETTING” is flashing, no operation of the
remote controller is accepted.)
∗∗
-
∗∗
∗∗∗∗
Procedure 3
Using temp. setup
No. [ ].
/
buttons, specify CODE
∗∗
– 164 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure to make ceiling setting when installing
separately sold filters.
When wireless remote controller is used
Change the high-ceiling and filter settings with the
DIP switch on the receiver section P.C. board.
∗ Separately sold filters cannot be installed in an
indoor unit on a high ceiling.
For details, refer to the manual of the wireless
remote controller kit.
Follow to the basic operation procedure
(1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 ).
The settings can also be changed with the switch on
the indoor microcomputer P.C. board.
• For the CODE No. in Procedure 3, specify [5d].
• For the set data in Procedure 4, select the setup
data of filters to be installed from the following
table.
∗ However, once the setting is changed, setting to
0001 or 0003 is possible but setting to 0000
requires a setting data change to 0000 using the
wired remote controller (separately sold) with the
normal switch setting (factory setting).
Setup data
High-ceiling setting
Normal filter
(Installed at factory shipping)
0000
Setup data
High-ceiling setting
High Efficiency Filter (65%)
High Efficiency Filter (90%)
0003
Installing indoor unit on high ceiling
SW501-1
SW501-2
When an indoor unit is installed on a ceiling higher
than the standard height, make the high-ceiling
setting for air volume adjustment.
MCU (IC501)
• Take the same procedure as that in
“When installing separately sold filters”.
Setup data
SW501-1
SW501-2
• Select the setting data for Procedure 4 from the
“Height list of ceiling possible to be installed” table.
0000
(Factory shipping)
OFF
OFF
0001
0003
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
To restore the factory settings
To return the DIP switch settings to the factory
settings, set SW501-1 and SW501-2 to OFF,
connect a separately sold wired remote controller,
and then set the data of CODE No. [5d] to “0000” in
“When installing separately sold filters” in the
previous page.
– 165 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Mar., 2008
<In case of SP110, SP140>
12-4. Outdoor Unit
12-4-1. Refrigerant Recovery Control
The “ozone destruction coefficient” of HFC refrigerant is 0 and the
discharge regulation is set as anathermal effect gas.
W804: All OFF (As initial status)
SW801: Push for 1 second.
To this model, a switch which can perform the refrigerant recovery
(pump down) by the outdoor unit is mounted so that it is easy to
react against the environment at reinstalling or rejection time.
[Operation method]
The D805 (Green LED)
flashes.
1) Set the mode of the indoor unit to fan mode.
2) Set all DIP switch SW804 to OFF (Initial status) and then push
the button switch SW801 for approx. 1 second.The cooling
operation starts. (During this time, D805 (Green LED) flashes.)
This operation finishes by 10 minutes.
D800
D801
D802
D803
D804
D805
3) After operation for 3 minutes or more, close valve at liquid side.
4) After recovery of refrigerant, close valve at gas side.
5) Push the button switch SW801 again for approx. 1 second.
The outdoor unit stops.
6) Stop the indoor unit and then turn off the power supply.
12-4-2. Various Setting on Outdoor Unit (Existing piping, Power save, Cooling-only, etc.)
The following settings are available by DIP switch setup and jumper line setup.
Function
Set position
Control contents
Turn the switch to ON when mounting a duct to the discharge port of the
outdoor unit. Add 3 taps to the upper limit value of the outdoor fan tap.
The operation is performed with
(Max: Upper fan: 890 rpm / Lower fan: 910 rpm (WF)).
High static
pressure setup
In this case, the upper limit value of static pressure for duct is 5Pa or less
on 25°C degrees and please use straight duct.
SW802
High static pressure setup
Existing piping setup
Power save setup
In this case, the outdoor noise level may increase.
Turn the switch to ON when Ø19.1 is used for the existing pipe.
Existing
piping setup
In this case, the heating capacity may lower according to outside temp. and
indoor temp. in heating operation.
Snow-proof fan control
Turn the switch to ON when using the power save function.
Power save
setup
The control to lower the compressor frequency (Approx. –10%) is
performed by indoor heat exchanger temp. in heating operation.
∗ all are OFF at shipment.
When snow enters from clearance of the fan guard or heat exchanger into
blast path and it is accumulated, the control to prevent generation of motor
lock is validated.
Snow-proof
fan control
When outside temp. is below 0°C though the compressor stops, the
outdoor fan operates with W5.
The defrost interval is cut to shorten it than the standard status.
Defrost
time change
J805, J806
For contents of control and cutting method, refer to Section
9-2-10. Defrost control.
When it is needed to lower the maximum value of the compressor
frequency, cut the jumper line. Max. frequency at cooling/heating is lowered.
In this case the Max. capacity decreases.
Max. frequency of compressor
Max. frequency
change
J807
J808
RAV-SP1104
RAV-SP1404
Model
COOL
HEAT
71.4
COOL
HEAT
90.6
Standard status
When J807 is cut
53.4
53.4
64.2
64.2
64.2
72.0
When using the air conditioner as a cooling-only conditioner, cut the jumper
line. (An air conditioner can be changed to cooling-only conditioner by “0F”
of DN code on the remote controller.)
Cooling-only
setup
– 166 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
12-4-3. Service Support Function (LED Display, Switch Operation)
1. Outline
A various setup and operation check can be performed by DIP switches at 3 positions (SW802, SW803,
SW804) and the pushdown button switches (SW800, SW801) at 2 positions.
Operation part
Part No.
SW800
SW803
SW801
SW804
SW802
Specifications
Pushdown button switch
DIP switch
Operation contents
Exchanges the displayed contents of LED (D800 to D804) on the outdoor
control P.C. board.
Pushdown button switch
DIP switch
Performs the specific operation to check maintenance.
Performs various initial settings. (Refer to 12-4-2.)
DIP switch
Display part
Part No.
Specifications
Operation contents
Indoor/Outdoor communication (Serial communication) signal display
(Receive signal from indoor signal)
D502
Orange LED
Indoor/Outdoor communication (Serial communication) signal display
(Send signal from outdoor signal)
D503
Green LED
Yellow LED
Error display
When all SW803 are OFF, or when any of D800 to D804 goes on, LED
displays that the outdoor controller detects an error.
D800 to D804
When status of SW803 is other than OFF, various indications are displayed.
Power-ON display
When the power of the outdoor unit is turned on, LED goes on.
When SW801 and SW804 operate the specific operation, LED flashes.
D805
Green LED
∗ All LED are colorless when it goes off.
SW804 Specific operation switch
SW801 (Various operations during maintenance check operation)
SW800
LED display select switch
SW803
D800 (Yellow LED)
D801 (Yellow LED)
D802 (Yellow LED)
D803 (Yellow LED)
D804 (Yellow LED)
Error display / various display
D800
D801
D802
D803
D804
D805
D805 (Green LED) : Display while power is ON
D503 (Green LED) : Serial signal (Outdoor → Indoor)
D502 (Orange LED) : Serial signal (Indoor → Outdoor)
SW802 : Selection of various initial settings
– 167 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
12-4-4. Others
1. Selection of LED display (SW800, SW803 operation)
1) Display selection list
The displayed contents of LED D800 to D804 on the outdoor control P.C. board can be exchanged by
operation of SW803.
Switch
Function / Contents
Refer
Error display (Error generating at present)
Error generating at present is displayed.
Refer to
Page 169.
SW803
This switch goes off when an error does not generate.
Error display (The latest error: Latest error including present)
Refer to
Page 169.
After error status was cleared, the error which generated before
can be confirmed by this setting. (Reconfirmation is available
even if power supply was turned off once.)
SW803
• If an error generates at present, the same contents as those of
error which is generating at present are displayed.
• Only error of TO sensor is not displayed by this setting.
(Confirm it by setting of error which is generating at present.)
Temperature sensor display
Refer to
Page 170.
TD
SW803
TE
SW803
TS
SW803
The detected value of temperature sensor is displayed.
TO
SW803
TL
SW803
TH
SW803
TA
SW803
TC
SW803
TCJ
SW803
Current display
Refer to
Page 170.
SW803
SW803
SW803
The current value which flows in the outdoor unit is displayed.
Compressor operation frequency display
Refer to
Page 170.
The operation frequency of the compressor is displayed.
PMV opening display
Refer to
Page 170.
The opening of PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) is displayed.
– 168 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
2) Error display
The error which is generating at present and the latest error (Latest error information including present)
can be confirmed by lighting LED D800 toD804 on the outdoor control P.C. board.
a) When all DIP switch SW803 are OFF, the status of error which is generating at present is displayed.
b) <1> only of DIP switch SW803 is turned on, the error which generated before
(Latest error information including present) is displayed.a)
c) If there is an error, any of LED D800 to D804 goes on. (Display 1)
d) When pushing the pushdown button switch SW800 for approx. 1 second, the display is exchanged.
(Display 2)
e) When pushing SW800 again or after 2 minutes, the status returns to that of Display
.
(Legend)
Present error
Latest error
SW803
SW803
D800 (Yellow)
D801 (Yellow)
D802 (Yellow)
D803 (Yellow)
D804 (Yellow)
D805 (Green)
l
l
¥
l
l
¡
: Go on,
: Flash
l : Go off,
¡
¥
Display 1)
Display 2)
Wired remote controller
Error code
Error contents
(Initial display) (SW800 operation)
Normal
—
F04
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
lllll
lllll
Discharge temp. sensor (TD) error
Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TE) error
Heat exchanger temp. sensor (TL) error
Outside temp. sensor (TO) error
Suction temp. sensor (TS) error
Heat sink temp. sensor (TH) error
Heat exchanger sensor (TE, TS) miswiring
EEPROM error
¥
ll ll
F06
¥¥
l
ll
F06, F07
F08
¥¥¥
ll
¥ ¡
lll l
¡¡
¡¡
ll
F06, F12
F13, L29
F06, F15
F31, L29
H01
¥¥ ¡
l
ll
¥ ¥¥ ¡
l l
¥¥¥¥ ¡
l
¥¥¥¥¥¡
Compressor break down
¥
¡
¡
¡
¡
llll
Compressor lock
H02
¥
l lll
¡ ¡¡
ll l
Current detection circuit error
Case thermostat operation
Model unset
H03
¥¥
lll
H04, P04
L10, L29
L29
¥
ll ll
¥ ¥ ¡
l l l
Communication error between MCU
Other error (Compressor disorder, etc.)
Discharge temp. error
¡¡ ¡¡
l
¥ ¥¥¥¡
l
l
Error is not determined.
P03
¥¥¥¥¥¡
¥¥
¡
¡
¡
lll
Power supply error
P04, P05
P07, L29
P15, L29
P19, L29
P04, P20
P22
¥ ¥
l ll
Heat sink overheat error
¥¥¥
ll
Gas leak detection
¥¥¥¥ ¡
l
4-way valve reverse error
¡¡¡ ¡¡
l
¥¥
¥¡
ll
High pressure protective operation
Fan system error
¥ ¥¡
ll l
¥¥ ¥¡
l
l
Driving element short-circuit
Position detection circuit erro
P26
¥ ¥¥¡
l l
P29
¥ ¥¥¥¡
l
∗ As the error code displayed on the wired remote controller may differ according to type of indoor model, multiple
codes are described.
– 169 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
3) Sensor, current, compressor operation frequency, PMV opening display
The values detected by the controller, such as temperature sensor or current value are simply confirmed.
(Legend)
D800 (Yellow)
D803 (Yellow)
D804 (Yellow)
D805 (Green)
l
l
l
l
l
¡
: Go on
l : Go off,
D801 (Yellow)
D802 (Yellow)
¡
Temperature sensor (°C)
Compressor
operation
frequency
(rpm)
PMV
opening
(Pulse)
Current
(A)
TD
SW803
TE
TS
SW803
TO
SW803
TL
SW803
Item
setup
SW803
SW803
SW803
SW803
TH
SW803
TA
SW803
TC
SW803
TCJ
SW803
LED
display
Below –25
–25 to –21
–20 to –16
–15 to –11
–10 to – 5
–5 to –1
0 to 4
0 to 0.9
1 to 1.9
0 to 4
5 to 9
0 to 19
20 to 39
40 to 59
60 to 79
80 to 99
100 to 119
120 to 139
140 to 159
160 to 179
180 to 199
200 to 219
220 to 239
240 to 259
260 to 279
280 to 299
300 to 319
320 to 339
340 to 359
360 to 379
380 to 399
400 to 419
420 to 439
440 to 459
460 to 479
480 to 499
500
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
lllll
¡
llll
¡
2 to 2.9
10 to 14
15 to 19
20 to 24
25 to 29
30 to 34
35 to 39
40 to 44
45 to 49
50 to 54
55 to 59
60 to 64
65 to 69
70 to 74
75 to 79
80 to 84
85 to 89
80 to 84
95 to 99
100 to 104
105 to 109
110 to 114
115 to 119
120 to 124
125 to 129
130 to 134
135 to 139
140 to 144
145 to 149
150 to 154
Over 155
l lll
3 to 3.9
¡¡
lll
4 to 4.9
¡
ll ll
5 to 5.9
¡ ¡
l ll
6 to 6.9
¡¡
l
¡¡¡
ll
ll
5 to 9
7 to 7.9
10 to 14
15 to 19
20 to 24
25 to 29
30 to 34
35 to 39
40 to 44
45 to 49
50 to 54
55 to 59
60 to 64
65 to 69
70 to 74
75 to 79
80 to 84
85 to 89
90 to 94
95 to 99
100 to 104
105 to 109
110 to 114
115 to 119
Over 120
8 to 8.9
¡ ¡
lll l
¡
9 to 9.9
¡ ¡
ll l
¡ ¡ ¡
l l l
10 to 10.9
11 to 11.9
12 to 12.9
13 to 13.9
14 to 14.9
15 to 15.9
16 to 16.9
17 to 17.9
18 to 18.9
19 to 19.9
20 to 20.9
21 to 21.9
22 to 22.9
23 to 23.9
24 to 24.9
25 to 25.9
26 to 26.9
27 to 27.9
28 to 28.9
29 to 29.9
30 to 30.9
Over 31
¡¡ ¡ ¡
l l
¡¡ ¡
ll
l
¡ ¡¡ ¡
l
¡¡¡ ¡
l
l
¡¡¡¡ ¡
l
l
¡¡
¡¡
¡¡
¡¡
llll
¡
lll
¡
l ll
¡¡
ll
¡ ¡¡
ll l
¡ ¡ ¡¡
l l
¡¡ ¡¡
l
¡¡¡ ¡¡
l
l
¡¡¡
lll
¡
ll
l l
¡¡¡
—
¡ ¡¡¡
—
¡¡ ¡¡¡
l
¡¡¡¡
—
ll
—
¡ ¡¡¡¡
l
¡¡¡¡¡
—
l
¡¡¡¡¡¡
Sensor error, unconnected
—
∗ As TD, TL and TH are sensors for high temperature, there is error at normal temperature or below position.
∗ For current value, the current for the outdoor unit only is displayed.
– 170 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
4) Specific operation for maintenance check (SW801, SW804)
The following specific operations for the maintenance check are performed by operation of SW801 or
SW804.
a) Select DIP switch SW804. (See table below)
b) Push the pushdown button switch SW801 for approx. 1 second.
c) The following functions start. While each function starts, LED D805 (Green) flashes.
d) When pushing the pushdown button switch SW801 again for approx. 1 second, when selecting DIP
switch SW804 or when the specified time of each function elapsed, each function stops and
LED D805 (Green) returns to the continuous lighting.
<Specific operation>
SW804
Operation when pushdown button switch SW801 is pushed
Refrigerant recovery operation
SW804
The outdoor unit performs cooling operation. The indoor unit does not work by this operation
alone. Therefore operate the fan beforehand. (Refer → 12-4-1. Refrigerant Recovery Control)
SW804
SW804
SW804
SW804
SW804
SW804
SW804
Indoor cooling test run demand
The cooling test run is performed. (→ Note 1)
Indoor heating test run demand
The heating test run is performed. (→ Note 1)
Fan motor forced operation
Drive the fan motor forcedly.
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the
operation returns to the normal control.
(No operation especially)
[NOTE]
Although these operations can
be performed even during
operation, basically perform
operation while the unit stops.
PMV full open operation
If performing this operation
Open PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) fully.
during driving the unit, it is
dangerous because the
pressure may change suddenly.
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the
operation returns to the normal control.
PMV full close operation
Close PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) fully.
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the
operation returns to the normal control.
PMV middle opening operation
Set PMV (Pulse Motor Valve) to middle opening
(250 pulses).
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the
operation returns to the normal control.
Note 1) Indoor cooling test run demand / Indoor heating test run demand
Only when combining with the following indoor unit, cooling/heating operation can be performed from the
outdoor unit.
Test run is available: Indoor unit of 4 series and after (RAV-SM
4UT-E etc.)
∗∗∗
Test run is unavailable: Indoor units other than the above-mentioned indoor units, or indoor units other
than above-mentioned indoor units are included in the twin connection.
Note 2) The forced test run by this setting cannot be cleared on the indoor remote controller.
Be sure to clear the test run by operation of the outdoor unit. (Push SW801 again for 1 second.)
– 171 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<In case of SP110, SP140>
SW804
Operation when pushdown button switch SW801 is pushed
4-way valve relay operation (For RY700, CN70 check)
Turn on 4-way valve power relay (RY700).
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the
operation returns to the normal control.
SW804
[NOTE]
In case of model adopting the self hold valve
(RAV-SP1104AFE, RAV-SP1404T-E), the coil develops fever.
Therefore do not perform this operation as coil is connected.
SW804
Self-hold valve suction operation (Exchange to heating cycle)
(For RY700 RY701, RY705, CN701 check)
Turn on relay RY700, RY701, RY705.
(CN701 between
and
: Voltage=Approx. +198 to 380V)
„
This function works for 10 seconds and then is OFF.
SW804
Self-hold valve separation operation (Exchange to cooling cycle)
Turn on relay RY700.
(CN701 between 1) and 4): Voltage=Approx. –198 to 380V)
This function works for 10 seconds and then is OFF.
[CAUTION]
SV valve relay operation (For RY702, CN702 check)
Turn on SV valve relay (RY702).
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the
operation returns to the normal control.
* For RAV-SP1104 to RAV-SP1404, the part is not mounted, so
do not operate.
SW804
Although these operations can be
performed even during operation,
basically perform operation while
the unit stops.
If performing this operation during
driving the unit, it is dangerous
because the pressure may change
suddenly.
SW804
SW804
SW804
SW804
Heater output relay operation (For check RY703, CN703 check)
Turn on relay for option heater (RY703).
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the
operation returns to the normal control.
Outside output relay operation (RY704, CN704)
Turn on relay for outside output (RY704).
When pushing SW801 again or when 2 minutes elapsed, the
operation returns to the normal control.
(No operation especially)
Relay operation change for outside output
[CAUTION]
Do not use this setting.
– 172 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
13. ADDRESS SETUP
13-1. Address Setup Procedure
When an outdoor unit and an indoor unit are connected, or when an outdoor unit is connected to each indoor
unit respectively in the group operation even if multiple refrigerant lines are provided, the automatic address
setup completes with power-ON of the outdoor unit.The operation of the remote controller is not accepted while
automatic address works. (Approx. 4 to 5 minutes)
Setup of line address of outdoor unit,
indoor unit address, and group address
Completion of cabling work
NO
Do you arbitrarily set the
indoor unit address?
YES
NO
NO
(MANUAL)
Is refrigerant line 1 line?
YES
Is group control performed?
YES
(To AUTO address mode)
Do you change setting after
automatic setting at the first time?
YES
Connect one remote controller with
one indoor unit (1 : 1) tentatively with
communication cable.
Turn on power of outdoor unit.
Turn on power of outdoor unit.
Turn on power of outdoor unit.
After completion of address
setup, change is to arbitral
address/group manually.
Setup of automatic
address finishes within
4 to 5 minutes.
(
)
Set to all indoor units one by one.
(
)
END
• When the following addresses are not stored in the neutral memory (IC503) on the indoor P.C. board, a test
run operation cannot be performed. (Unfixed data at shipment from factory)
Item code Data at shipment
Setup data range
0001 (No. 1 unit) to 0064 (No. 64 unit)
Line address
12
13
0099
0099
0001 (No. 1 unit) to 0064 (No. 64 unit)
Max. value of indoor units in the identical refrigerant line
Indoor unit address
0000 : Individual (Indoor units which are not controlled in a group)
0001 : Master unit (1 indoor unit in group control)
Group address
14
0099
0002 : Sub unit (Indoor units other than master unit in group control)
– 173 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
13-2. Address Setup & Group Control
<Terminology>
Indoor unit No. : N - n = Outdoor unit line address N (Max. 30) - Indoor unit address n (Max. 64)
Group address : 0 = Single (Not group control)
1 = Master unit in group control
2 = Sub unit in group control
Master unit (= 1) : The representative of multiple indoor units in group operation sends/receives signals to/from
the remote controllers and sub indoor units.
(* It has no relation with an indoor unit which communicates serially with the outdoor units.)
The operation mode and setup temperature range are displayed on the remote controller LCD.
(Except air direction adjustment of louver)
Sub unit (= 2)
: Indoor units other than master unit in group operation
Basically, sub units do not send/receive signals to/from the remote controllers.
(Except errors and response to demand of service data)
Header unit (Representative unit) (Master Twin)
: This unit communicates with the indoor unit (follower) which serial-communicates with the
outdoor units and sends/receives signal (Command from compressor) to/from the outdoor
units as the representative of the cycle control in the indoor units of the identical line address
within the minimum unit which configures one of the refrigerating cycles of Twin.
Follower unit (Subordinate unit) (Sub Twin)
: Indoor units excluding the header unit in Twin
This unit communicates with (Header) indoor unit in the identical line address and performs
control synchronized with (Header) indoor unit.
This unit does not perform the signal send/receive operation with the outdoor units. :
No judgment for serial signal error.
13-2-1. System Configuration
1. Single
2. Twin
Outdoor
Indoor
1-1
Individual
1-1
1-2
Sub/Follower
(Master/Header)
Master/Header
Remote
controller
3. Single group operation
2-1
Sub/Header
1-1
Sub/Header
4-1
3-1
Sub/Header
8-1
Sub/Header
Master/Header
– 174 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
13-2-2. Automatic Address Example from Unset Address (No miswiring)
1. Standard (One outdoor unit)
1) Single
1-1
Individual
(Master/Sub)
2) Group operation (Twin, Triple operation)
(Multiple outdoor units = Miltiple indoor units only with serial communication)
2-1
Sub/Header
1-1
Sub/Header
1-2
3-1
3-2
3-3
Sub/Follower
Sub/Follower
Master/Header
Sub/Follower
Only turning on source power supply (Automatic completion)
• Header unit: The header unit receives the indoor unit data (thermo status) of the follower (Without identical line
address & indoor/outdoor serial) and then finally controls the outdoor compressor matching with
its own thermo status.
The header unit sends this command information to the follower unit.
• Follower unit: The follower unit receives the indoor unit data from the header (With identical line address &
indoor/outdoor serial) and then performs the thermo operation synchronized with the header unit.
The follower unit sends own thermo ON/OFF demand to the header unit.
(Example)
No. 1-1 header unit sends/receives signal to/from No. 1-2 and No. 1-3 follower units.
(It is not influenced by the line 2 or 3 address indoor unit.)
– 175 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
13-2-3. Automatic Address Example from Unset Address (No miswiring)
1. Standard (One outdoor unit)
1) Single
2) Twin
3) Triple
(1-1)
(1-2)
(1-1)
1-2
(1-2)
1-3
(1-3)
1-1
1-1
Individual
1-2
Master/Header
1-1
Sub/Follower
Sub/Header
Master/Follower
Sub/Follower
(Master/Header)
Only turning on source power supply (Automatic completion)
2. Group operation
(Multiple outdoor units = Multiple indoor units with serial communication only, without twin)
2-1
Sub/Header
1-1
Sub/Header
3-1
8-1
Sub/Header
Master/Header
(Max. : 8 units)
Only turning on source power supply (Automatic completion)
3. Multiple groups operation
Single
Twin
Triple
2-1
Sub/Header
1-1
Sub/Header
2-3
3-1
Sub/Header
3-3
1-2
Sub/Follower
Master/Follower
Sub/Follower
2-1
1-1
1-2
3-1
3-2
3-3
Change is necessary
Manually change addresses of the multiple follower units simultaneously from the remote controller.
– 176 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
<Single system>
13-3. Remote Controller Wiring
• Strip off approx. 9 mm the wire to be connected.
Remote controller
• For single system, use non polarity, 2 core wire is
used for wiring of the remote controller.
(0.5 mm² to 2.0 mm² wires)
Remote controller
wiring
A
1
B
2
Indoor side
3
3
• For the synchronous twin, triple system, use
2-conre shield wire (Vinyl cord for microphone 0.5
to 2.0 mm²) to conform to the EMC standard.
Indoor/Outdoor
connecting wires
1
L
2
Outdoor side
N
Wiring diagram
220-240V~
Terminal block for remote controller
wiring of indoor unit
Terminal block
n RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1404AT-E
A
B
A
B
Remote controller
unit
<Synchronous twin system>
Remote controller wire
(Procured locally)
Remote controller
inter-unit wiring
Remote controller
Remote controller
∗ For details of wiring/installation of the remote
controller, refer to the Installation Manual enclosed
with the remote controller.
wiring
A
1
B
2
A
1
B
2
Indoor side
Indoor side
3
3
3
Indoor/Outdoor
connecting wires
Indoor power
inter-unit wiring
1
L
2
Outdoor side
N
220-240V~
n RAV-SM1603AT-E
WARNING
For synchronous twin and synchronous triple systems, perform the following to confom to EMC standards.
<Synchronous twin system>
Remote controller
inter-unit wiring
Remote controller
Remote controller
wiring
A
1
B
2
A
1
B
2
Indoor side
Indoor side
3
3
3
∗ Use 2-core shield wire (Vinyl cord for microphone
0.5 to 2.0 mm² or more) for the remote controller
wiring in the synchronous triple system to prevent
noise problems. Be sure to connect both ends of
the shield wire to the earth.
Indoor/Outdoor
connecting wires
Indoor power
inter-unit wiring
1
L
2
Outdoor side
N
220-240V~
∗ Connect earth wire for each indoor unit in the
synchronous triple system.
<Synchronous triple system>
Remote controller
inter-unit wiring
Remote controller
Remote controller
inter-unit wiring
Indoor side
Remote controller
wiring
A
1
B
2
A
1
B
2
A
B
2
Indoor side
Indoor side
3
3
3
1
3
Indoor/Outdoor
connecting wires
Indoor power
inter-unit wiring
Indoor power
inter-unit wiring
1
L
2
Outdoor side
N
220-240V~
– 177 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
13-4. Address Setup (Manual setting from remote controller)
In case that addresses of the indoor units will be
determined prior to piping work after cabling work
(Example of 2-lines cabling)
(Real line: Cabling, Broken line: Refrigerant pipe)
Outdoor Outdoor
• Set an indoor unit per a remote controller.
• Turn on power supply.
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Indoor
A B
Indoor
A B
Indoor
A B
Indoor
A B
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
Line address → 1
Indoor unit address → 1
Group address → 1
A B
SET
CL
TEST
1
2
Push
+
+
buttons simultaneously
Remote controller
for 4 seconds or more.
For the above example, perform setting by
connecting singly the wired remote controller
without remote controller inter-unit cable.
(← Line address)
Using the temperature setup
set 12 to the item code.
/
buttons,
Group address
Individual : 0000
Master unit : 0001
In case of group control
Sub unit
: 0002
3
4
5
Using timer time
/
buttons, set the line address.
SET
Push
button. (OK when display goes on.)
(← Indoor unit address)
Using the temperature setup
/
buttons, set 13 to the item code.
6
7
8
Using timer time
/
buttons, set 1 to the line address.
SET
Push
button. (OK when display goes on.)
(← Group address)
Using the temperature setup
/
buttons, set 14 to the item code.
9
Using timer time
/
buttons, set 0000 to Individual, 0001 to Master unit, and 0002 to sub unit.
SET
10
11
Push
Push
button. (OK when display goes on.)
TEST
button.
Setup completes. (The status returns to the usual stop status.)
TEMP.
ON / OFF
TIMER SET
TIME
FAN
SAVE
MODE
VENT
2, 5, 8
3, 6, 9
END 11
FILTER
RESET TEST
SET
CL
SWING/FIX
UNIT LOUVER
4, 7, 10
1
<Operation procedure>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 END
– 178 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
13-5. Confirmation of Indoor Unit No. Position
1. To know the indoor unit addresses though position of the indoor unit body is recognized
• In case of individual operation (Wired remote controller : indoor unit = 1 : 1)
(Follow to the procedure during operation)
<Procedure>
ON / OFF
1
2
Push
Push
button if the unit stops.
button.
UNIT LOUVER
Unit No. 1-1 is displayed on LCD.
TEMP.
ON / OFF
(It disappears after several seconds.)
1
TIMER SET
TIME
FAN
SAVE
MODE
VENT
The displayed unit No. indicate line address and
indoor unit address.
Operation
FILTER
RESET TEST
SET
CL
SWING/FIX
UNIT LOUVER
(When other indoor units are connected to the
identical remote controller (Group control unit), other
unit numbers are also displayed every pushing
UNIT LOUVER
button.
2
<Operation procedure>
END
1 2
2. To know the position of indoor unit body by address
• To confirm the unit No. in the group control
(Follow to the procedure during operation) (in this procedure, the indoor units in group control stop.)
<Procedure>
The indoor unit numbers in the group control are
successively displayed, and fan, louver, and drain pump
of the corresponding indoor unit are turned on.
(Follow to the procedure during operation)
VENT
TEST
1
Push
4 seconds or more.
and
buttons simultaneously for
TEMP.
ON / OFF
TIMER SET
TIME
FAN
SAVE
MODE
VENT
• Unit No.
is displayed.
1
3
• Fans and louvers of all the indoor units in the
group control operate.
FILTER
RESET TEST
SET
CL
SWING/FIX
UNIT LOUVER
UNIT LOUVER
2
Every pushing
in the group control are successively displayed.
button, the unit numbers
2
• The unit No. displayed at the first time indicates the
master unit address.
<Operation procedure>
• Fan and louver of the selected indoor unit only
operate.
END
1 2 3
TEST
3
Push
button to finish the procedure.
All the indoor units in the group control stop.
– 179 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<Maintenance/Check list>
Aiming in environmental preservation, it is strictly recommended to clean and maintain the indoor/outdoor units
of the operating air conditioning system regularly to secure effective operation of the air conditioner.
It is also recommended to maintain the units once a year regularly when operating the air conditioner for a long
time.
Check periodically signs of rust or scratches, etc. on coating of the outdoor units.
Repair the defective position or apply the rust resisting paint if necessary.
If an indoor unit operates for approx. 8 hours or more per day, usually it is necessary to clean the indoor/outdoor
units once three months at least.
These cleaning and maintenance should be carried out by a qualified dealer.
Although the customer has to pay the charge for the maintenance, the life of the unit can be prolonged.
Failure to clean the indoor/outdoor units regularly will cause shortage of capacity, freezing, water leakage or
trouble on the compressor.
Object
Part name
Contents of check
Contents of maintenance
Indoor
¡
Outdoor
¡
Heat exchanger
Fan motor
• Blocking with dust, damage check
• Audibility for sound
• Clean it when blocking is found.
• When abnormal sound is heard
¡
¡
• Clean with water if dirty
• Replace if any breakage
—
Filter
• Visual check for dirt and breakage
¡
¡
¡
• Visual check for swing and balance
• Replace fan when swinging or
balance is remarkably poor.
• Check adhesion of dust and external
appearance.
Fan
¡
• If a large dust adheres, clean it with
brush or water.
Suction/
Discharge grille
• Repair or replace it if deformation or
damage is found.
—
• Visual check for dirt and scratch
• Check blocking by dust and dirt of drain
water.
—
—
Drain pan
• Clean drain pan, Inclination check
• Cleaning/Coating with repair painting
¡
¡
—
Face panel, Louver
• Check dirt and scratch.
• Check rust and pealing of insulator
External appearance
• Coating with repair painting
¡
• Check pealing and floating of coating film
– 180 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
14. DETACHMENTS
14-1. Indoor Unit
14-1-1. 4-Way Air Discharge CassetteType
RAV-SM564UT-E, RAV-SM804UT-E, RAV-SM1104UT-E, RAV-SM1404UT-E, RAV-SM1604UT-E
No. Part name
Suction grille
Procedure
Remarks
1
Suction grille
Knobs of the
suction grille hook
XCAUTIONX
Be sure to put on the gloves at
disassembling work; otherwise an injury
will be caused by a part, etc.
Adjust
corner cap
Ceiling panel
Hook for
1. Detachment
1) Stop operation of the air conditioner and
then turn off switch of the breaker.
falling-preventive strap
2) Slide the 2 knobs of the suction grille
inward and then hang down the suction
grille.
3) Remove a strap connecting the panel
and the suction grille and then remove
the suction grille.
Hole for
ceiling panel hook
2. Attachment
1) Hook the suction grille to the panel.
2) Attach strap of the suction grille to the
panel as before.
3) Close the suction grille, slide the knobs
outward and then fix the panel.
Hinge
Electric parts 1. Detachment
2
Bell mouth pin
Claw of
electric parts box
cover
1
1) Carry out work of item 1. of
.
2) Remove the fixing screw A which fixes
the electric parts cover and loosen the
fixing screw B.
3) Pull down the electric parts cover,
remove pin of the bell mouth and then
slide it to the arrow direction in order to
open the claws and the electric parts box
cover.
Potbelly hole
(Dharma ddoll hole)
Fixing screw B
Sliding direction
Claw of electric
parts boox cover
2. Attachment
Fixing screw BA
1) Close the electric parts cover and slide it,
hook claw of the electric parts box, claw
of the electric parts box cover and the
Dharma doll hole, and then insert pin of
the bell mouth into hole of the electric
parts box cover.
Electricc partss box cover
2) Tighten the fixing screws A and B and
then fix the electric parts box cover.
1
3) Following to work of item 2 of , mount
the suction grille as before.
– 181 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Electric parts cover
(Continued)
2
Adjust corner cap
1. Detachment
3
Adjust corner cap
1) Pull knob of the adjust corner cap to
the arrow direction, remove strap of
the adjust corner cap from pin of
the panel and then remove all the
4 corners of the cap.
Knob
NOTE :
The knob is provided to only one side.
Be sure to remove the cap of the
knob side at first.
Pulling direction
2. Attachment
1) Hook strap of the adjust corner cap
securely to pin of the ceiling panel.
2) Insert claw of the adjust corner cap
into the square hole of the panel.
(2 positions)
Pin
3) Push claws of the adjust corner cap
into the positions indicated with
arrow marks so that they fit in
3 positions.
Strap of
adjust corner cap
Claws
(3 positions)
Claw
Square hole
Push into positions with arrow marks
– 182 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Ceiling panel 1. Detachment
Procedure
Remarks
4
Clamp
2
1) Carry out works of item 1 of
and item 1
3
of
.
Louver motor wiring
2) Remove the flap connector
(CN510, White, 20P) connected to the
control P.C. board and then remove the
lead wire from the clamp.
CN510
NOTE :
Unlock the lock of the housing part and
then remove the connector.
Square hole of indoor unit
3) Loosen the panel fixing 4 screws.
4) Slide the panel fixing brackets
(4 positions) outward.
5) Push the tentative bracket outward and
then remove the ceiling panel.
Electric parts box
Panel fixing screw
2. Attachment
Louver motor wiring
1) Insert the tentative brackets (2 positions)
of the ceiling panel into square holes of
the indoor unit and then hook the panel
tentatively.
Tentative bracket
Ceiling panel
NOTE :
The ceiling panel has the directional
properties against the indoor unit.
Square hole of indoor unit
Direct the louver motor wire to the electric
parts box side of the indoor unit.
2) Pass the head of the panel fixing screw
through hole of the panel fixing bracket
and then slide the panel fixing bracket
inward.
Push in case
of removing
3) Tighten in the panel fixing screw to fix the
ceiling panel.
Tentative bracket
3
4) Following to work of item 2 of , attach
the adjust corner cap as before.
Square hole of indoor unit
5) Connect the louver connector
(CN510, White, 20P) as before and then
fix the lead wire with clamp.
Panel fixing screw
2
6) Following to work of item 2 of , mount
the electric parts box cover and the
suction grille as before.
Innerr side
Panel fixing bracket
Outerr side
Sliding direction
– 183 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Control
P.C. board
1. Detachment
5
Clamp
2
1) Carry out work of item 1 of
.
2) Remove connectors which are connected
from the control P.C. board to the other
parts and then remove wiring from the
clamp.
CN510 : Louver motor (20P, White)
CN34 : Float switch (3P, Red)
CN504 : Drain pump (2P, White)
CN101 : TC sensor (2P, Black)
CN102 : TCJ sensor (2P, Red)
CN104 : Room temp. Sensor (2P, Orange)
CN333 : Fan motor power supply
(5P, White)
Card edge spacer
CN334 : Fan motor position detection
(3P, White)
NOTE :
Unlock the lock of the housing part and then
remove the connector.
3) Unlock the locks of the card edge spacer
(6 positions) and then remove the control
P.C. board.
2. Attachment
1) Fix the control P.C. board to the card edge
spacer (6 positions)
2) Connect the connector removed in item 1
as before and then fix the wiring with the
clamp.
2
3) Following to work of item 2 of , mount
the electric parts box cover and the
suction grille as before.
– 184 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Drain cap
Procedure
Remarks
1. Detachment
6
Drain cap (outside)
1
1) Carry out work of item 1 of
.
2) Loosen screws (3 positions) fixing the drain
cap (outside) and then turn the drain cap to
the arrow mark direction to remove it.
CLOSE
OPEN
NOTE :
The drain cap is hung down because a strap
is attached to it (outside).
3) Loosen the cap by turn the drain cap
(inside) for approx. 1 turn to OPEN →
direction and then drain the drain water
accumulated in the drain pan.
Strap
Drain cap fixing screws
NOTE :
Be sure to catch drain water using a bucket,
etc. when loosening the drain cap.
Drain cap (inside)
The insulating materials are adhered to the
drain cap (outside) and opening part of the
drain pan; be careful that they are not come off.
If they are come off, stick them as before
using double-faces tape, etc.
CLOSE
4) Turn the drain cap once again to OPEN
OPEN
→ direction to remove it.
Drain pan
mark
Drain cap
mark
2. Attachment
1) Insert the drain cap (inside), turn it to
CLOSE → direction until the position
where “Clashed sound” is heard and it
cannot be turned more over
(Position where
matches with
mark of the drain pan
mark of the drain cap
(inside)) and then fix it.
NOTE :
When attaching the drain cap (inside),
remove dirt attached to the packing.
And tighten in it noting so that the cap is not
slantingly set.
If attaching the drain cap as dust or dirt is
attached or the cap is set slantingly, water
leakage is caused.
2) Turn the drain cap (outside) to → direction
and then attach it using the fixing screw as
original.
1
3) Following to work of item 2 of
the suction grille as before.
, mount
– 185 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Fan motor
Procedure
Remarks
1. Detachment
7
Fixing screw A
2
1) Carry out work of item 1 of
.
2) Remove connectors which are connected
from the control P.C. board to the other
parts and then remove each wiring from
the clamp.
CN510 : Louver motor (20P, White)
CN34 : Float switch (3P, Red)
CN504 : Drain pump (2P, White)
CN101 : TC sensor (2P, Black)
CN102 : TCJ sensor (2P, Red)
Fixing screw B
Electric parts box
Clamp
CN104 : Room temp. Sensor (2P, Orange)
CN333 : Fan motor power supply
(5P, White)
CN334 : Fan motor position detection
(3P, White)
NOTE :
Unlock the lock of the housing part and then
remove the connector.
Fan motor lead
Bell mouth
TC sensor
Nut cap
TCJ sensor
3) Remove the fixing screws A and B, and
then remove the electric parts box.
(Fixing screw A: Ø4 × 10, 3 pcs,
Fixing screw B: Ø4 × 8, 1 pc.)
4) Remove the fan motor lead, TC sensor
and TCJ sensor from clamp of the bell
mouth.
5) Remove the fixing screws and then
remove the bell mouth. (Ø4 × 10, 8 pcs.)
6) Remove the fixing screws and then
remove the nut cap. (Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)
7) Remove the fixing nut and then remove
the turbo fan. (M8 nut with flange, 1 pc.)
8) Remove the fixing screws and then
remove the motor lead holding bracket.
(Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)
9) Cut the bundling band and then remove it
from the clamp.
Fixing screw
Turbo fan
10) Remove the fixing nut and then remove
the fan motor. (Ø6 nut, 3 pcs.)
2. Attachment
1) Fix the parts as before in order of fan
motor → motor lead holding bracket →
turbo fan → nut cap → bell mouth.
NOTE :
Fix the motor lead to the clamp without
slack as before using bundling band.
When fixing the turbo fan, be sure to match
the D-cut of the fan boss with D-cut of the
motor shaft.
M8 nut with flange
Using a torque wrench, fix the turbo fan and
+0.5
tighten it to 5.4
Nm.
–0.2
– 186 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Fan motor
(Continued)
2. Attachment
7
M6 nut
2) Fix the fan motor lead, TC sensor and TCJ
sensor with the clamp of the bell mouth.
3) Mount the electric parts box with the fixing
screws A and B.
(Ø4 × 10, 3 pcs. Ø4 × 8, 1 pc.)
4) Connect the connector removed in item 1
as before and then fix wiring with the
clamp.
Fan motor
Motor lead
holding bracket
2
5) Following to work of item 2 of , mount
the electric parts box cover and the
suction grille as before.
Fixing screws (Ø4 × 8)
Clamp
Fan motor lead
– 187 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Drain pump 1. Detachment
Procedure
Remarks
8
Fixing screw A
2
1) Carry out works of item 1 of
and item
6
1 of
.
2) Remove the drain pump connector
(CN504, White, 2P) connected to the
control P.C. board and then remove the
lead wire from the clamp.
Drain port
3) Remove the fixing screws and then
remove the drain pump. (Ø4 × 10, 3 pcs.)
4) As shown in the right figure, first pull out
the connecting part of the drain pump and
the drain hose from the drain port and
then take out the drain pump.
5) Set direction of the knob of the hose band
downward, slide it from the pump connecting
part to the hose side and then remove the
drain hose from the drain pump.
Drain pump
6) Pass the connector of the drain pump lead
wire through the wiring taking-out port and
then take out the drain pump.
CN504
Drain pump
lead wire
2. Attachment
1) Enter your hand into the drain port and
pass the connector of the drain pump lead
wire through the wiring taking-out port.
2) Connect the drain hose to the drain pump
as before.
NOTE :
Wiring taking-out port
Drain pump
Insert the drain hose up to the end of the
drain pump connecting part, apply band to
the white mark position of the hose and then
set the band knob upward.
Clamp
Drain hose
3) Return the drain pump to the indoor unit
and then mount it as before using the
fixing screws. (Ø4 × 10, 3 pcs.)
4) Connect the drain pump connector
(CN504, White, 2P) to the control P.C.
board and then fix it as before with the
clamp.
Pump connecting part
6
5) Following to words of item 2 of
and
2
item 2 of , mount the drain cap, the
electric parts box cover and the suction
grille as before.
Slide to drain hose side.
Hose band
– 188 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Float switch 1. Detachment
9
assembly
7
1) Carry out works of item 1 of
from 1) to 5).
and works
Float switch assembly
2) Remove the fixing screw and then remove
the float switch assembly. (Ø4 × 25, 1 pc.)
2. Attachment
1) Mount the float switch assembly as before
with the fixing screw.
Fixing sscrew (Ø4 × 25)
NOTE :
Hole of float switch assembly
When mounting, match hole of the float switch
assembly with projection of the drain pan.
2) Mount the bell mouth as before.
(Ø4 × 10, 8 pcs.)
7
3) Following to works of item 2 of
and
works from 2) to 5), attach the parts as
before.
Projection of drain pan
Drain pan
1. Detachment
10
4
1) Carry out works of item 1 of , item 1 of
6
7
, item 1 of
and works from 2) to 5).
2) Remove the fixing screws to remove the
drain pan. (Ø4 ×10, 4 pcs.)
2. Attachment
1) Fix parts as before in order of drain cap
→ drain pan → bell mouth.
7
2) Following to works of item 2 of
and
works from 2) to 5), attach parts as before.
Fixing screws (Ø4 ×10)
Fixing screws (Ø4 ×10)
– 189 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Heat
exchanger
1. Detachment
11
1) Recover the refrigerant gas.
10
2) Carry out work of item 1 of
.
3) Remove refrigerant pipe at indoor unit side.
4) Remove the fixing screws and then
remove the piping cover. (Ø4 ×10, 3 pcs.)
5) Remove the drain hose from the drain
pump and remove the fixing screws to
remove the drain pump stand.
(Ø4 ×8, 3 pcs.)
Fixing sccrewss (Ø4 ×10)
6) While pushing the heat exchanger, remove
the fixing band, fixing screws and the heat
exchanger. (Ø4 ×8, 3 pcs.)
Piping cover
2. Attachment
Fixingg screws
(Ø4 ×10)
1) Mount the heat exchanger with the fixing
band and the fixing screws. (Ø4 ×8, 3 pcs.)
2) Fix the parts as before in order of drain
pump stand → piping cover.
3) Connect the refrigerant pipe as before and
then apply vacuuming.
Drain puump stand
10
4) Following to work of item 2 of , attach
the parts as before.
Fixing screws
(Ø4 ×10)
Fixing band
Fixingg screw
Fixinng band
Heat exchanger
– 190 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-1-2. Slim DuctType
RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E, RAV-SM564SDT-E
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
XREQUIREMENTX
Be sure to put on gloves at working; other-
wise an injury may be caused by parts, etc.
• Before replacement of the parts, be sure to stop
operation of the air conditioner and turn off
switch of the breaker.
Air Filter
1. Detachment
1
[In case of sucking system from rear side]
1) Push knobs (3 positions) of the air filter
hooks toward the arrow direction to remove
the air filter.
Air filter
Push
2. Attachment
1) Insert the air filter surely into the hooking
grooves (4 positions) at the opposite side of
the hooks, and then fix it to the original
position.
Hook
[In case of sucking system from bottom side]
NOTE)
In case of sucking system from bottom side,
installation direction is determined. Install the
air filter so that hooks are aligned at discharge
side.
Air filter
Push
Hook
Plate inlet-A 1. Detachment
2
[In case of sucking system from rear side]
Plate inlet-B
1) Take off fixing screws while holding the plate
Plate inlet-B: 6 screws
inlet-A with hands to remove it.
(Sucking system from rear side: Ø4 × 10, 8 pcs)
(Sucking system from bottom side:
Ø4 × 10, 11 pcs)
2) Take off fixing screws while holding the plate
inlet-B with hands to remove it.
(Ø4 × 10, 6 pcs)
Plate inlet-A: 8 screws
NOTE)
Be careful that sheeting metal does not fall
when removing the plate inlet.
[In case of sucking system from bottom side]
Plate inlet-A: 11 screws
2. Attachment
1) Using the screws taken off in procedure 1.
2
2) of
, attach the plate inlets in order of B
→ A while holding them not to fall down.
Plate inlet-B: 6 screws
– 191 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
E-cover
Procedure
Remarks
1. Detachment
3
2
1) Perform work 1. of
.
2) Take off screws fixing E-cover, and then
remove hooks of the hooking part by lifting
up. (Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs)
2. Attachment
E-cover
1) Hang on E-cover to hooks of the hooking
part so that it does not fall down.
NOTE)
Be sure not to catch TA sensor in the E-cover;
otherwise the equipment cannot operate
correctly.
2) Using the screws taken off in procedure 1. 2)
2 screws
Hooking part
3
of
, attach E-cover while holding it with
hands without clearance.
TA sensor
NOTE)
If there is clearance, dust may enter in the
electric parts box.
E-cover
E-box
1. Detachment
4
Clamp
Clamp
2
3
1) Perform works 1. of
and 1. of
.
2) Remove clamps and tie wrap at upper part
of the photo. (Drain pump incorporated
model: 3 positions)
Tie wrap
(Natural drain model: 2 positions)
3) Take off screws fixing E-box. (Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs)
E-box does not fall down under condition
that screws are taken off.
4) Remove the E-box over sheeting metal
which was fixed with screws.
2. Attachment
1) Insert hooks of E-box into the hooking part
of the main body.
Drain pump
Lead wire:
2 screws
2) Store E-box as before, and then attach it by
using screws taken off in procedure 1. 3) of
For only drain pump incorporated model
4
.
NOTE)
Be sure to fix surely as before the lead wires of
which clamps and tie wrap were taken off.
NOTE)
Check that lead wires of the drain pump do not
reach the fan so that they are not caught in the
fan, and then fix them.
(In case of drain pump incorporated model)
– 192 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Part name
Procedure
Remarks
P.C. board
assembly
1. Detachment
5
P.C. board assembly
2
3
4
1) Perform works 1. of , 1. of
, and 1. of
.
2) Disconnect connectors which are connected
from P.C. board assembly to other parts.
NOTE)
Unlock the lock of the housing to disconnect the
connectors.
CN41 : Remote controller terminal (2P: Blue)
Remote controller terminal block: 2P
CN67 : Power supply terminal (3P: Black)
CN101 : TC sensor (2P: Black)
Terminal block
CN102 : TCJ sensor (2P: Red)
CN333 : Fan motor power supply (5P: White)
CN334 : Detection of fan motor position (3P: White)
(In case of drain pump incorporated model)
CN34 : Float SW (3P: Red)
CN504 : Drain pump lead (2P: White)
3) Unlock the lock of the card edge spacer, and then remove P.C. board assembly.
2. Attachment
1) Attach P.C. board assembly to the card edge spacer.
2) Using wires connect connectors as before, which were disconnected in
5
procedure 1. 2) of
NOTE)
Check there is no missing or poor contact of the connectors.
.
Multi blade fan case, 1. Detachment
6
Hanging hook
fan lower case,
2
1) Perform work 1. of
.
fan upper case
2) Take off hanging hooks at both sides of the
lower fan case to remove fan lower case.
3) Remove the upper fan case while taking off
hooks of fan upper case which are hooked to
the partition board.
4) Loosen hexagonal hole screw of the multi
blade fan to remove multi blade fan from the
shaft. If necessary, remove multi blade fan
and then remove fan upper case.
Fan lower case
2. Attachment
1) Determine the position so that multi blade fan
positions at the center of the fan upper case,
and then fix it with hexagonal hole screw.
Multi blade fan
NOTE)
Arrange the multi blade fan so that screws
position at the right side against the drain pan
assembly.
NOTE)
Fix multi blade fan with torque wrench 4.9 N•m
or more.
Drain pan
assembly side
2) Hook the lower fan case as before and attach
it with hooks.
NOTE)
Arrange the multi blade fan so that
screws position at the right side
against the drain pan assembly.
Finally check whether the multi blade fan turns
surely and smoothly or not.
– 193 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Fan motor
Procedure
Remarks
1. Detachment
7
2
3
6
1) Perform works 1. of , 1. of
, and 1. of
.
2) Remove lead wires which are connected to the
following connectors of P.C. board assembly.
NOTE)
Unlock locks of the housing, and then remove the
connectors.
CN333 : Fan motor power supply (5P: White)
CN334 : Detection of fan motor (3P: White)
Remove tie wrap which fixes lead wires.
3) Remove the noise filter from lead wire to detect fan
motor position.
4) Take off screws of fan motor fixing bracket.
Earth wires of the motor are tightened together.
(Ø5 × 10, 2 pcs)
Remove tie wrap which fixes the lead wires.
5) Remove fixing bracket of the fan motor by holding it
with hands so that the fan motor does not fall down.
2. Attachment
Earth lead
1) Mount the fan motor as before in order, Fan motor
→ Fixing bracket of fan motor → Noise filter → Lead wire process → E-cover.
NOTE)
Check there is no missing or poor contact of the connectors. Check also that the multi blade
fan turns surely and smoothly, and check together-tightening of motor earth.
Under panel 1. Detachment
8
Drain cap or drain hose
Drain pan
assembly
1) Take off the drain cap and drain the drain water
accumulated in the drain pan assembly.
In case of natural drain model, drain the drain water
by taking off hose band and drain hose.
NOTE)
When taking off drain cap and drain hose, be sure
receive drain water in a bucket, etc.
Underr panel
2) Take off screws fixing the under panel while holding
it to remove. (Ø4 × 10, 8 pcs)
NOTE)
Be careful that sheeting metal does not fall when
removing the under panel.
3) Pull out the drain pan assy. by holding handle at
lower part.
NOTE)
When pulling out the drain pan assy, never pull out the
drain socket by drawing it with hands. If doing so, water
leak may be caused.
Drain pann asseembly
4) Pull out it to some extent, lay hand on the bump at
suction side, and then remove the drain pan assembly.
NO GOOD
2. Attachment
Never hold and pull
the drain socket.
1) Hook and attach the drain pan assy. to the flange at
discharge side, and then push in.
8
2) Using screws taken off in procedure 1. 2) of
attach under panel by holding with hands.
,
3) Attach drain cap, hose band, and drain hose as before,
8
which were taken off in procedure 1. 1) of
.
NOTE)
Finally, be sure to check there is no water leakage from
each attached part.
– 194 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Drain pump, 1. Detachment
9
Float switch,
Drain hose
2
Drain hose
1) Perform works in procedures 1. of , 1. of
3
8
, 1. of
.
Hose band
Drain pump
2) Disconnect lead wires which are connected
to the following connectors of P.C. board
assembly.
NOTE)
Unlock locks of the housing to remove the
connectors.
CN34 : float SW (3P: Red)
CN504 : Drain pump lead (2P: White)
3) Loosen hose band, remove cap of the drain
hose, and take off screws while holding drain
pump. Remove them with care that pipes are
not damaged. (Ø4 × 10, 3 pcs)
4) Take off screws while holding metal on float
switch. Remove them with care so that
pipes are not damaged. (Ø4 × 10, 1 pc)
Float switch
NOTE)
If the pipes are damaged, refrigerant leak may be caused. Take out them with great care.
2. Attachment
9
1) Attach ASSY sheeting metal which was removed in procedure 1. 3) of
pipes are not damaged, and then fix it with screws.
with care that
2) Insert the drain hose into the inlet of drain pump, and then fix it with hose band. Arrange
handle of the hose band at contrary side of heat exchanger side and at direction remote
from drain pan assembly.
8
3) Carry out wiring as before, and then perform work of procedure 2. of
.
NOTE)
Finally check whether they correctly operate or not.
Evaporator
assembly
1. Detachment
10
1) Recover refrigerant, and then remove
refrigerant pipes at indoor unit side.
2
2) Perform works of procedures 1. of
, 1. of
3
8
, 1. of
. Remove sensors.
3) Take off screws of the pipe holder, and
remove the pipe holder. (Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs)
4) Take off screws of the heat exchanger
support board (Pipe side), and remove the
heat exchanger support board
(Pipe side). (Ø4 × 10, 4 pcs)
5) Take off screws of the heat exchanger
support board (Opposite side) which fixes
terminal block of the evaporator assembly.
(Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs)
Pipe holder
Heat exchanger support board
(Pipe side)
6) Remove the evaporator assembly.
2. Attachment
1) Fasten the parts as before in order, Evapora-
tor assembly → Pipe holder → Set sensors
→ Drain pan assembly → Under panel.
2) Connect the refrigerant pipe as before, and
then perform vacuuming.
– 195 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14-2. Outdoor Unit
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, RAV-SP1104ATZG-E
RAV-SP1404AT-E, RAV-SP1404ATZ-E, RAV-SP1404ATZG-E
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Common
procedure
1
Front panel
XCAUTIONX
Never forget to put on the gloves at working
time; otherwise an injury will be caused by
the parts, etc.
1. Detachment
1) Stop operation of the air conditioner and
then turn off switch of the breaker.
2) Remove the front panel.
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)
• Remove the screws and then remove the
front panel by pulling it downward.
3) Remove the power supply cable and the
indoor/outdoor connecting wire from the
cord clamp and the terminal.
4) Remove the top plate.
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 5 pcs.)
2. Attachment
Top plate
1) Attach the top plate.
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 5 pcs.)
2) Connect the power supply cable and the
indoor/outdoor connecting wire to the
terminal and then fix them with the cord
clamp.
XREQUIREMENTX
For the power supply cable and the indoor/
outdoor connecting wire, be sure fix them
using the bundling band on the market along
the crossover pipe so that they do not come to
contact with the compressor, valve at gas side,
pipe at gas side and discharge pipe.
3) Attach the front panel.
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)
– 196 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Discharge
port cabinet
1. Detachment
2
Motor base Discharge port cabinet
1
1) Carry out work of 1 of
.
Heat exchanger
Partition board
2) Remove screws for the discharge port
cabinet and the partition board.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 4 pcs.)
3) Remove screws for the discharge port
cabinet and the bottom plate.
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)
4) Remove screws for the discharge cabinet
and the motor base.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)
5) Remove screw for the discharge cabinet
and the heat exchanger.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 1 pc.)
6) Remove screws for the discharge port
cabinet and the fin guard.
Fin guard
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)
1
Side cabinet
1) Carry out work of 1 of
.
3
Inverter assembly
Side cabinet
2) Remove the screws which fix the inverter
assembly and the side cabinet.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)
3) Remove the screws for the side cabinet
and the valve fixing plate.
(ST1T Ø4 × 8, 2 pcs.)
4) Remove screws for the side cabinet and
the piping panel (Rear).
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)
5) Remove screw for the side cabinet and the
bottom plate.
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 1 pc.)
6) Remove screws for the side cabinet and
the fin guard (Heat exchanger).
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 5 pcs.)
Valve fixing plate
– 197 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Replacement of 1. Control P.C. board
4
Control P.C. board Upper fan motor
electric parts
1
1) Carry out work of 1 of
.
Compressor
case thermo.
Reactor lead
X
WARNINGX
Never disassemble the inverter for
1 minute after power supply has been
turned off because an electric shock may
be caused.
Lower
fan motor
2) Remove the connectors connected to
the control P.C. board. (Indoor power
supply, Temperature sensor, PMV coil,
4-way valve coil, Compressor case
thermo, Fan motor)
Compressor lead
Temperature
sensor
Earth wire
• Unlock the lock of the housing part
and then remove the connectors.
4-way valvee ccooiill
3) Remove the lead wires connected to
the control P.C. board.
PMV coil
Indoor power supply
Element fixing screws
Compressor lead U: CN200 Red
V: CN201 White
P.C. board
fixing screw (9 positions)
W: CN202 Black
Reactor cord
CN05 White
CN06 White
4) Remove the earth wire from the control
P.C. board.
(Trust B tight screw Ø4 × 6, 1 pc.)
5) Remove the fixing screws of the control
P.C. board. (Screw with collar for fixing
element Ø3 × 16, 9 pcs. Pan S tight
screw for fixing board Ø3 × 20, 1 pc.)
6) Remove the control P.C. board.
(Supporter: 5 positions)
NOTE :
Be careful to take out because there is
sealing material for the heat sink.
Insulating sheet
Sealing material
Control P.C. board
7) Replace the control P.C. board with a
new one.
NOTE :
• Be sure not to confuse for Compressor
lead V (CN201 White), Reactor lead
CN05 and CN06.
• Be sure not to come-off of the
insulating sheet.
– 198 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Replacement of 2. Reactor
4
Bundling band
(Compressor lead, Reactor lead)
electric parts
1
1) Carry out work of 1 of
.
(Continued)
2) Remove the reactor lead connected to
the control P.C. board.
Control P.C. board
Reactor lead
CN05 White, CN06 White
3) Cut the bundling band which bundled
the compressor lead and fan motor
lead.
4) Remove the reactor.
(Trust B tight screw, Ø4 × 6, 2 pcs.)
5) Replace the reactor with a new one.
NOTE :
Be sure to bundle the removed bundling
band with the bundling band on the
market.
Be careful so that the fan motor lead
does not come to contact with the
reactor body.
Reactor lead
Reactor body
Bundling band
(Compressor lead, Reactor lead)
Fan motor lead
Bundling band
(Fan motor lead, Reactor lead)
– 199 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Fan motor
Procedure
Remarks
1
2
1) Carry out works of item 1 of
and work of
.
5
2) Remove the flange nut fixing the fan motor
and the propeller fan.
Propelller fan
Looseened by
turning clockwise
• The flange nut is loosened by turning it
clockwise. (When tightening it, turn it
counterclockwise.)
3) Remove the propeller fan.
4) Remove the connector for the fan motor from
the inverter. (Remove the ferrite core of the
lower fan motor because it is used.)
Flange nut
5) Remove the fan motor lead from the fan
motor lead fixed rubber of the penetrated part
of the partition board.
Propeller fan
6) Remove the fixing screws (4 pieces each)
while supporting the fan motor so that it does
not fall down.
∗ Cautions for assembling of fan motor
• Tighten the flange nut with 4.95N•m
(50kgf•cm).
• Adjust length of the fan motor lead wire at
the fan motor lead fixed rubber so that the
fan motor lead is not slackened; otherwise
the fan motor lead may come to contact
with the propeller fan.
Fan motor
Connector of
upper fan motor
Attach the fan motor lead fixed rubber to
the partition board so that the projection is
set at the refrigerating cycle side.
Connector of
lower fan motor
• Be sure so that the rector body does not
contact with the fan motor lead.
• Be sure to bundle the removed bundling
band with the bundling band on the
market.
Ferrite core of
lower fan motor
• Necessarily attach the ferrite core of the
lower fan motor again.
(Fix it with bundling band on the market.)
XREQUIREMENTX
Fan motor lead
fixed rubber
Be sure to fix the fan motor lead to the
motor base using the metal band of the
motor base so that the fan motor lead does
not come to contact with the propeller fan.
Projection/Refrigerating
cycle side
Fan motor lead
fixed rubber
Projection/Refrigerating
cycle side
Fan motor
– 200 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Compressor 1. Removal of defective compressor
6
Piping panel (Front)
Compressor
lead
1) Recover the refrigerant gas.
2) Carry out work of item 1 of
1
and work of
3
.
3) Remove the piping panel (Front).
Remove the piping panel (Front) and
screws of the bottom plate.
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)
Piping panel (Rear)
Pipe cover
Bundling band
(For tthermmal proof)
Remove screw of the piping panel (Front)
and the piping panel (Rear).
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 1 pc.)
Compresssor lead
TD sensor
4) Remove the piping panel (Rear).
Remove the piping panel (Rear) and
screws of the bottom plate.
(Hexagonal screw Ø4 × 10, 2 pcs.)
Compressor case thermo.
5) Remove the sound-insulation plate.
(Upper, rolling in, rolling out)
Control PP.C. bboard
6) Remove the terminal cover of the com-
pressor and then remove the compressor
lead and the compressor case thermo.
7) Remove TD sensor which is fixed to the
discharge pipe.
8) Remove the compressor lead.
(Leave the ferrite core as it is attached to
the electric parts box.)
Compresssor lead
Control P.C. board U : CN200 Red
V : CN201 White
Compresssor lead
W: CN202 Black
9) Using a burner, remove the discharge pipe
and the suction pipe which are connected
to the compressor.
X
WARNINGX
In case of removing the piping by broiling the
welded part with a burner, if there is oil in the
pipe, it may burst into flames at the moment
that wax melted, so take sufficient care.
Ferritte core
Remove
(Discharrge pipe)
CAUTION :
Note so that the flame does not catch the
4-way valve and PMV.
(A malfunction may be caused.)
Remove
(Suctioon pipe)
10) Pull off the discharge pipe and the suction
pipe of the refrigerating cycle upward.
11) Remove the compressor nuts which fix the
compressor to the bottom plate. (3 pcs.)
12) Pull out the compressor toward you.
CAUTION :
As weight of the compressor is 20kg or
more, handle it by 2 workers.
Compresssor nuts
(3 pcs.)
– 201 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Compressor 2. Mounting of compressor
6
Wrap the ferrite core with the compressor lead wire
for 4 times.
Compressor
lead
1) Mount the compressor in the reverse
procedure for removal.
Compressor lead
(Continued)
NOTE :
• After replacement of the compressor, be
sure to replace the compressor lead.
(Repair part code of compressor lead:
43160591)
0 to 50
In this time, wrap the ferrite core with the
compressor lead wire by 4 times.
Ferrite core
0 to 50
• As shown in the right figure, mount the
sound-insulation plate (rolling in, rolling
out) by passing through it between the
compressor and the piping, and between
the piping and the partition board.
(Compressor lead positioning standard)
Put the end of sound-
insulation plate
(rolling out) on the other
end at this position.
Pass through sound-
insulation plate
(rolling out) between
suction pipe and
header pipe.
• Fix TD sensor by the bundling band for
heat-proof on the market via the pipe
cover so that TD sensor does not directly
come to contact with the discharge pipe.
Header pipe
Suction pipe
3. Vacuuming
1) Connect the vacuum pump to the charge
port and the check joint of the gas pipe
valve and then drive the vacuum pump.
Discharge pipe
2) Carry out vacuuming until the vacuum low
pressure gauge indicates 1 (mmHg).
Pass through sound-insulation plate (rolling in)
between compressor and discharge pipe,
suction pipe and then put the end of sound-
insulation plate on the other end at this position.
NOTE :
There should be no clearance between sound-
insulation plate (upper) and sound-insulation plate
(rolling out).
Before vacuuming, open PMV fully.
If PMV is closed, vacuum may be impossible
between liquid pipe valve and PMV of the
outdoor unit.
Sound-insulation plate
(upper)
Cultural rivet
Forced full-opening method of PMV
• Turn on the leakage breaker.
• Turn on 1 and 3 of Dip switch SW804 on the
control P.C. board of the outdoor unit.
• Keep pushing SW801 on the control P.C. board
of the outdoor unit for 1 second or more.
Insert oone side
under cultural rivet.
• After pushing SW801 for 1 second or more,
turn off the leakage breaker within 2 minutes.
Sound-insulation plate
(rolling out)
SW801
SW804
4. Refrigerant charge
1) Add the refrigerant amount determined by
the pipe length from the charge port of the
valve.
– 202 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
PMV coil
1. Detachment
7
Concave part
PMV main unit
1
1) Carry out work of item 1 of
.
2) Turn the coil while pulling upward and then
remove the coil from the PMV main unit.
2. Attachment
1) Surely match the positioning projection of
the coil with the concave part of PMV main
unit and then fix it.
Positioning projection
PMV coil
Fan guard
1. Detachment
8
Fan guard
Bell mouth
Discharge
port cabinet
1
1) Carry out works of item 1 of
and work
2
of
.
XREQUIREMENTX
To prevent scratch on the product, carry out
the work on cardboard, cloth, etc.
2) Remove the discharge port cabinet and
then put on it so that the fan guard side
directs downward.
3) Remove the hooking claws (8 positions) of
the fan guard.
Hooking claw
2. Attachment
1) Push the hooking claws (8 positions) with
hands from the front side to fix the claws.
XREQUIREMENTX
Check that all the hooking claws are fixed at
the specified positions.
– 203 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RAV-SP404AT-E, RAV-SP404ATZ-E, RAV-SP404ATZG-E
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Common
1
procedure
XCAUTIONX
Valve
cover
Never forget to put on the gloves at working
time, otherwise an injury will be caused by
the parts, etc.
1. Detachment
1) Stop operation of the air conditioner, and
turn off the main switch of the breaker for
air conditioner.
2) Remove the valve cover.
(ST1T Ø4 × 10L, 1 pc.)
Wiring
cover
• After removing screw, remove the valve
cover pulling it downward.
3) Remove wiring cover
(ST1T Ø4 × 10L, 2 pcs.), and then
remove connecting cable.
4) Remove the upper cabinet.
(ST1T Ø4 × 10L, 2 pcs.)
• After taking off screws, remove the
upper cabinet pulling it upward.
Upper cabinet
2. Attachment
1) Attach the waterproof cover.
XCAUTIONX
Water-proof
cover
Be sure to attach a waterproof cover.
If it is not attached, there is a possibility that
water enters inside of the outdoor unit.
Cord clamp
2) Attach the upper cabinet.
(ST1T Ø4 × 10L, 2 pcs.)
Rear cabinet
• Hook the rear side of the upper cabinet
to claw of the rear cabinet, and then put
it on the front cabinet.
3) Perform cabling of connecting cables, and
fix with cord clamp.
(ST1T Ø4 × 10L 3 pcs.)
Claw
4) Attach the wiring cover.
(ST1T Ø4 × 10L, 2 pcs.)
5) Attach the valve cover.
(ST1T Ø4 × 10L, 1 pc.)
• Insert the upper part of the upper
cabinet, set hooking claw of the valve
cover to the slit (at three positions) of
the main body, and then attach it
pushing upward.
– 204 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Front cabinet 1. Detachment
Procedure
Remarks
2
Motor support
1
1) Perform work of item 1 of
.
2) Remove screws (ST1T Ø4 × 10L, 2 pcs.)
of the front cabinet and the inverter cover.
3) Take off screws of the front cabinet and
the bottom plate. (ST1T Ø4 × 10L 3 pcs.)
4) Take off screws of the front cabinet and
the motor support.
(ST1T Ø4 × 10L, 2 pcs.)
• The left side of the front side if made to
insert to the rear cabinet, so remove it
pulling upward.
For single-phase type models,
also take off this screw
Front cabinet
Front cabinet (Left side)
3. Attachment
1) Insert hook at the left side of the front side
into the rear cabinet.
2) Hook the lower part at the right side of the
front to concavity of the bottom plate.
Insert the hook of the rear cabinet into the
slit of the front cabinet.
Slit
Claw
3) Attach the removed screws to the original
positions.
Slit
Hook
Cord clamp
Front cabinet
Concavity at
bottom plate
Lower
slit
– 205 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Inverter
assembly
1. Detachment
3
Screws
1
1) Perform work of item 1 of
.
2) Take off screws of the upper part of the
front cabinet.
• If removing the inverter cover under this
condition, P.C. board can be checked.
Front cabinet
• If there is no space in the upper part of
2
the upper cabinet, perform work of
.
Inverter cover
XCAUTIONX
Be careful to check the inverter because
high-voltage circuit is incorporated in it.
3) Perform discharging by connecting
,
–
+
polarities by discharging resistance
(approx. 100Ω, 40W) or plug of soldering
–
iron to
+
,
terminals of the C14 (printed
as “CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE”) electrolytic
capacitor (500µF) of P.C. board.
Cord clamp
X WARNINGX
The electrolytic capacitor may not normally
discharge according to error contents and
the voltage may remain. Therefore, be sure
to discharge the capacitor.
Screws
Plug of
soldering iron
X WARNINGX
Discharging
position
For discharging, never use a screwdriver and
(Discharging
period
others for short-circuiting between
and
+
10 seconds
or more)
electrodes. As the electrolytic capacitor is
–
one with a large capacity, it is very danger-
ous because a large electric spark will occur.
Inverter
assembly
4) Take off screws (ST1T Ø4 × 10L, 2 pcs.)
fixing the main body and the inverter box.
5) Remove various lead wires from the holder
at upper part of the inverter box and wiring
holder at right side of the terminal block.
6) Remove the lead wire from the bundled
part at left side of the terminal block.
7) Pull the inverter box upward.
8) Disconnect connectors of various lead
wires.
Remove the connectors
with locking function by
pushing the part indicated
by the arrow mark.
XREQUIREMENTX
As each connector has a lock mechanism,
avoid to remove the connector by holding the
lead wire, but by holding the connector.
– 206 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Control P.C.
board assembly
1) Disconnect lead wires and connectors
connected from the control P.C. board
assembly to other parts.
4
1. Lead wires
Take off
earth screws.
• Connection with the power terminal
block: 3 wires (Black, White, Orange)
• Earth wire: 1 wire (Black)
2. Connectors
Power line
• Connection with compressor:
Remove 3P connector.
• Connection with reactor:
Inverter box
(Metal sheet)
Remove the relay connectors from
P07, 08 (2P, White) and P12, 13
(2P, Yellow)
Control P.C.
board assembly
P.C. board base
CN300 : Outdoor fan (3P, White)
CN301 : Position detection (5P, White)
CN701 : 4-way valve (3P, Yellow)
CN600 : TE sensor (2P, White)
CN601 : TD sensor (3P, White)
CN603 : TS sensor (3P, White)
CN602 : TO sensor (3P, White)
CN500 : Case thermo. (2P, White)
CN703 : PMV (6P, White)
Hooking claws
(4 positions)
2) Remove the inverter box (Metal plate).
3) Remove the control board assembly
from P.C. board base.
Control P.C.
board assembly
(Remove the heat sink and the control
board assembly as they are screwed.)
NOTES:
1. CN300, CN301 and CN701, etc. at the
control board assembly side are connectors
with locking function.
P.C. board base
Therefore, remove the connector while
pushing the part indicated by an arrow mark.
2. Remove 4 hooking claws of P.C. board
base, and remove upward the heat sink
with hands.
4) Take off 3 screws fixing the heat sink
and main control board assembly side,
and replace the board with a new one.
Heat sink
Inverter box
(Metal sheet)
NOTE:
When mounting a new board, check that the
board is correctly set in the groove of the base
holder of P.C. board base.
Attach the P.C. board so that the heat sink
comes securely contact with the metal sheet.
– 207 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
1
2
3
Rear cabinet 1) Perform works of items 1 of
and
,
.
5
2) Take off fixed screws for the bottom plate.
(ST1T Ø4 × 10L, 3 pcs.)
3) Take off fixed screws for the heat exchanger.
(ST1T Ø4 × 10L, 2 pcs.)
Rear cabinet
4) Take off fixed screw for the valve mounting
plate. (ST1T Ø4 × 10L, 1 pc.)
1
2
Fan motor
1) Perform works of items 1 of
and
.
6
2) Take off the flange nut fixing the fan motor and
the propeller.
Flange nut
• Turning it clockwise, the flange nut can be
loosened. (To tighten the flange nut, turn
counterclockwise.)
3) Remove the propeller fan.
4) Disconnect the connector for fan motor from
the inverter.
5) Take off the fixing screws (3 pcs.) holding by
hands so that the fan motor does not fall.
Loosen the nut by
turning clockwise
NOTE:
Tighten the flange nut with torque 4.9Nm
(50kgf/cm).
Propeller fan
Fan
motor
– 208 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. Part name
Procedure
Remarks
1
2
Compressor 1) Perform works of items 1 of
and
,
7
3
4
5
,
,
.
Partition plate
2) Discharge refrigerant gas.
3) Remove the partition plate.
(ST1T Ø4 × 10L, 2 pcs.)
4) Remove the noise-insulator.
5) Remove the terminal covers of the
compressor, and disconnect lead wires
of the compressor and the compressor
thermo assembly from the terminal.
6) Remove pipes connected to the com-
pressor with a burner.
Compressor
lead
XCAUTIONX
Pay attention to that flame does not
involve 4-way valve or PMV. (If doing
so, a malfunction may be caused.)
Case thermo
7) Take off the fixing screws of the bottom
plate and heat exchanger.
Heat exchanger
(ST1T Ø4 × 10L, 2 pcs.)
Remove
(Discharge pipe)
8) Take off the fixing screws of the valve
clamping plate to the bottom plate.
9) Pull upward he refrigerating cycle.
Remove
(Suction pipe)
Screw
10)Take off nut fixing the compressor to the
bottom place.
Valve
support board
Screws (2 pcs.)
XCAUTIONX
Compressor bolt (3 pcs.)
When reconnecting the lead wires to
the compressor terminals after
replacement of the compressor, be
sure to caulk the Faston terminal
without loosening.
1
3
Reactor
1) Perform works of item 1 of
2) First take off two screws
and
.
8
Partition
plate
Reactor
support board
Reactor
(ST1T Ø4 × 10L) of the reactor fixed to
the reactor support.
3) Remove the reactor support from the
partition plate. (ST1T Ø4 × 10L, 4 pcs.)
4) Take off two screws (ST1T Ø4 × 10L)
directly attached to the partition plate.
– 209 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No.
Part name
Procedure
Remarks
Pulse Motor Valve 1. Detachment
9
(PMV) coil
Positioning extrusion
PMV body
1
2
1) Perform works of items
and
.
2) Release the coil from the concavity by
turning it, and remove coil from the PMV.
2. Attachment
1) Put the coil deep into the bottom position.
2) Fix the coil firmly by turning it to the
concavity.
Concavity
PMV coil
Fan guard
1. Detachment
10
Minus screwdriver
1
2
1) Perform works of items 1 of
and
.
2) Remove the front cabinet, and put it down
so that fan guard side directs downward.
XCAUTIONX
Perform works on a corrugated cardboard,
cloth, etc. to prevent flaw on the product.
3) Remove the hooking claws by pushing
with minus screwdriver along with the
arrow mark in the right figure, and remove
the fan guard.
Front cabinet
Hooking claw
Front cabinet
2. Attachment
1) Insert claws of the fan guard in the hole of
the front cabinet. Push the hooking claws
(10 positions) with hands and then fix the
claws.
XCAUTIONX
All the attaching works have completed.
Check that all the hooking claws are fixed
to the specified positions.
Fan guard
– 210 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
15. EXPLODED VIEWS AND PARTS LIST
15-1. Indoor Unit
15-1-1. 4-Way Air Discharge CassetteType
RAV-SM564UT-E, RAV-SM804UT-E, RAV-SM1104UT-E, RAV-SM1404UT-E, RAV-SM1604UT-E
223, 238 226
246
227
230
225
212
228
201
202
229
239
231
234
204, 205
243
237
215
206
214, 235
242
224
219, 220, 221,
222, 240, 241
208
244
247
232
207 233 245 236 218
216, 217
211
213
203
248
210
209
– 211 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
Model Name RAV-SM
564UT-E 804UT-E 1104UT-E 1404UT-E 1604UT-E
Location
No.
Part No.
Description
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
43120248 Fan Ass’y, Turbo, ABS
43120247 Fan Ass’y, Turbo, ABS
43166011 Remote Controller, SX-A4EE
4314J399 Refrigeration Cycle Ass’y
4314J400 Refrigeration Cycle Ass’y
4314J401 Refrigeration Cycle Ass’y
43122110 Bell Mouth, ABS
43172202 Pan Ass’y, Drain
43166004 Remote Controller, SX-A11JE2
43166005 Remote Controller, EX-W2JE2
43166006 Remote Controller, WH-H1JE2
43170244 Hose, Drain, 25A
43179144 LID, Inside
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
43151290 Switch, Float, FS-0218-102
43079249 Band, Hose
1
1
1
3
43163057 Clamp, Down, ABS
43163058 Clamp, Up, ABS
43089147 Clamp, Wire, NYLON6
43047688 Nut, Flare, 1/2 IN, RoHs
43149352 Nut, Flare, 5/8 IN
43149353 Socket, 1/2”
1
1
1
1
3
4
43149354 Socket, 5/8”
1
3
43139137 Rubber, Cushion
43122117 Plate, Wind
4
4
3
1
1
4
4
3
1
1
4
4
3
1
1
43197197 Screw, Fix Panel
43139165 Rubber, Cushion
43197199 Washer
4
4312C038 Motor, Fan
4312C039 Motor, Fan
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
43119497 Cover Ass’y
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43139166 Cap, Nut
43179147 Gasket, VMQ
43119498 Cover, Sensor, ABS
43177010 Pump Ass’y, MDP-1401
43151299 Switch Ass’y, Float, FS-0218-102
43179145 LID Ass’y, Outside
43170254 Socket Ass’y, Drain
43197155 Washer, 25X6, 5X2T
43097212 Nut
1
1
1
43147195 Bonnet, 1/2, IN
43194029 Bonnet
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
43019904 Holder, Sensor, SUS
43179135 Band, Hose, 37-40
43179146 Cover, Glass
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43182010 String
431S8083 Owner’s Manual
43179148 Glass
43166012 Remote Controller, SX-A5EE
– 212 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
RAV-SM564UT-E, RAV-SM804UT-E, RAV-SM1104UT-E, RAV-SM1404UT-E, RAV-SM1604UT-E
403
404
405
401
402
Model Name RAV-SM
Location
No.
Part No.
Description
564UT-E / 804UT-E / 1104UT-E / 1404UT-E / 1604UT-E
401
402
403
404
43050425 Sensor Ass’y, TC (F6), Service
43050426 Sensor, TA, Service
2
1
1
1
43160565 Terminal, Block, 3P, AC250V, 20A
43160568 Terminal, 2P, AC30V/DC42V, 1A
P.C. Board Ass’y, 220–240V,
405
4316V355
MCC-1570
1
– 213 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
RBC-U31PG (W,WS)-E, RBC-U31PGS (W,WS)-E
316
320
303
317
319
318
305
312
308, 309
315
322
304
306, 307, 323, 324
313
314
302
310, 311
321
301
Model Name RBC-
U31PG (W)-E U31PG (WS)-E U31PGS (W)-E U31PGS (WS)-E
Location
Part No.
Description
Grille, Air Inlet
No.
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
43409207
43480017
4302D003
43407145
43407146
43409212
43409216
43401037
43401041
43401043
43401047
43407148
43407149
43407150
43407154
43403010
43403011
43403012
43407155
43407156
43460125
43400077
43109423
43109424
1
1
4
2
2
4
1
1
4
2
2
1
1
4
2
2
1
1
4
2
2
Air Filter, ABS + PPNET
Motor, Louver, MP24Z3N
Outlet, Air Form, PS-F
Outlet, Air Form, PS-F
Louver, ABS
Louver, ABS
4
3
Cover, Panel Ass’y
Cover, Panel Ass’y
Cover, Panel Ass’y
Cover, Panel Ass’y
Plate, Fix, Panel
Plate, Fix, Panel
Hook, ABS
3
1
3
1
3
1
2
2
2
4
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
4
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
4
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
4
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
4
Cap, AXIS, POM
Cover Ass’y, Motor
Cover Ass’y
Cover Ass’y
Fix, Motor, ABS
Fix, Motor, ABS
Lead, Motor
Panel, Front, PS (W)
Louver, ABS
Louver, ABS
4
– 214 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RBC-AX31U (W)-E, RBC-AX31U (WS)-E
354
358
353
355
356, 357
Model Name RBC-
Location
Part No.
Description
No.
353
354
355
356
357
358
AX31U (W)-E
AX31U (WS)-E
43459011 P.C. Board Ass’y, Remote Receiver
43462010 Cover, WRS, ABS
43461006 Sheet, PC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43108018 Cover, Panel, WRS
43108019 Cover, Panel, WRS
43460126 Lead
1
1
1
– 215 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
RAV-SM404SDT-E, RAV-SM454SDT-E, RAV-SM564SDT-EE
220
206, 209
208
217
208
204
232
222
216
219
205
201
228
230
204
229
227
212
207
214
207
213
213, 218, 224
225, 226, 231
236
235
234
237
233
TEST
SETTING
C
ADR
– 216 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revised 2: Jun., 2008
Model Name RAV-SM
Location
No.
Part No.
Description
404SDT-E
454SDT-E
564SDT-E
201
203
205
206
207
208
211
212
213
214
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
4312C040
43120227
43170244
Motor, Fan
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
Fan, Multi blade
Hose, Drain
4314J402 Refrigeration Cycle Ass’y
43122084 Case, Fan, Lower
43122085 Case, Fan, Upper
43100319 Plate, Inlet-B
43172183 Pan Ass’y, Drain
43149351 Socket
43179129 Cap, Drain
43170240 Hose, Drain
43100321 Flange
43049697 Bonnet
43179135 Band, Hose
43180327 Air Filter, ABS PP
43079249 Band, Hose
43196109 Bushing
43047685 Nut, Flare, 1/4 IN
43047688 Nut, Flare, 1/2 IN
43149353 Socket, 1/2 IN
43060029 Filter, Noise
43151287 Switch, Float
43100320 Plate, Inlet-A
43177012 Pump, Drain, MDP-1401
43147195 Bonnet, 1/2 IN
43019904 Holder, Sensor SUS
431S8088 Owner’s Manual
43166011 Remote controller, SX-A4EE
43166004 Remote controller, SX-A11JE2
43166006 Remote controller, WH-H1JE2
43166012 Remote controller, SX-A5EE
– 217 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
404
403
405
401
402
Model Name RAV-SM
Location
No.
Part No.
Description
404SDT-E
454SDT-E
564SDT-E
401
402
403
404
43050425 Sensor Ass’y, Service TC (F6)
43050426 Sensor, Service
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
43160565 Terminal, Block, 3P, AC250V, 20A
43160568 Terminal, 2P, AC30V/DC42V, 1A
P.C. Board Ass’y, 220–240V,
405
4316V368
MCC-1570
1
1
1
– 218 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15-2. Outdoor Unit
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, RAV-SP1104ATZG-E
RAV-SP1404AT-E, RAV-SP1404ATZ-E, RAV-SP1404ATZG-E
13
2
1
17
30
18
28
29
22
15
20
26, 32
14
31, 33
24
34
35
19
27, 37
4, 25
11
3
16
6, 9
21 5
23
7, 8, 36
12
10
– 219 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model Name RAV-SP
Location
No.
Part No.
Description
1104AT-E 1404AT-E 1104ATZ-E 1404ATZ-E 1104ATZG-E 1404ATZG-E
1
43019904 Holder, Sensor, SUS
43032441 Nipple, Drain
3
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
2
3
43041794 Compressor, DA422A3F-25M
43047246 Bonnet, 3/8 IN
4
5
43047669 Nut, Flange
5
43197164 Nut, Flange, SUS304-WSB
43049739 Cushion, Rubber
43050407 Thermostat, Bimetal
43063317 Holder, Thermostat
43097212 Nut
2
3
1
1
2
3
1
1
2
3
1
1
2
3
1
1
6
3
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
7
8
9
9
43197174 Nut, Comp., SWCH10R
43100437 Panel, Front, Piping
43100438 Panel, Back, Piping
43100439 Panel, Front
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
28
29
29
29
30
30
30
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
43100440 Plate, Roof
43100441 Panel, Side
43100442 Panel, Air Outlet
43100443 Base Ass’y
43107274 Guard, Fin, Side
43107275 Guard, Fin, Back
43107276 Hanger, PP
43109422 Guard, Fan, PP
43120244 Fan, Propeller, PB521, SAN-GF20
43122113 Bell, Mouth, PP
4312C037 Motor, Fan, ICF-280-A100-1
43146676 Joint, Check
43146686 Valve, Packed, 9.52
43146687 Valve, 4-Way, STF-0401G
43146724 Valve, Ball, SBV-JA5GTC-1, Rohs
43148170 Accumulator Ass’y, 2.5L
43148188 Accumulator, 2.5L
4314G266 Condenser Ass’y, Down
4314G267 Condenser Ass’y, Down
4314G268 Condenser Ass’y, Down
4314G269 Condenser Ass’y, Up
4314G270 Condenser Ass’y, Up
4314G271 Condenser Ass’y, Up
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Valve, Pulse, Modulaing,
4314N023
31
32
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
UKV-25D100
Coil, Valve, 4-Way,
4314N024
1
1
VHV-01AP552B1
33
34
35
36
37
4314N025 Coil, PMV, UKV-A038
4314Q031 Strainer, DIA 9.52, C1220T-H
4314Q032 Strainer
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43160591 Lead Ass’y, Compressor
43194029 Bonnet
– 220 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RAV-SP1104AT-E, RAV-SP1104ATZ-E, RAV-SP1104ATZG-E
RAV-SP1404AT-E, RAV-SP1404ATZ-E, RAV-SP1404ATZG-E
709, 710
711
704
707
706
708
702
705
703
701
Model Name RAV-SP
Location
Part No.
Description
No.
1104AT-E 1404AT-E 1104ATZ-E 1404ATZ-E 1104ATZG-E 1404ATZG-E
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
43050425 Sensor Ass’y, TC (F6), Service
43063325 Holder, Sensor, 6 - 6.35, 8
43150319 Sensor Ass’y, TD (F4), Service
43158190 Reactor, CH-62-ZT
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43160565 Terminal Block, 3P, AC250V, 20A
43160581 Terminal, 3P, 60A
43160589 Fuse, AC250V, 10A
43163055 Holder, Sensor
43163059 Spacer (Bush), P.C. Board
43163060 Spacer (Collar), P.C. Board
4316V357 P.C. Board Ass’y, MCC-1571
– 221 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RAV-SP454AT-E, RAV-SP454ATZ-E, RAV-SP454ATZG-E
11
29
2
16, 17
18, 19
4
31
30
12, 14
13, 15
10, 26, 32
28
27
33
6
3
21
9
8
22
25
20
30
24
7
5
1
– 222 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Model Name RAV-SP
Location
No.
Part No.
Description
404AT-E 404ATZ-E 404ATZG-E 454AT-E 454ATZ-E 454ATZG-E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
43105042 Cabinet, Front, RoHs
43105041 Cabinet, Upper
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43005698 Cabinet, Side, Right, RoHs
43005672 Cabinet, Side, Left
4301V035 Guard, Fan
4301V053 Guard, Fin
43100346 Base Ass’y, RoHs
43119471 Caver, Valve, Packed
43162055 Caver, Wiring Ass’y, RoHs
Compressor, DA150A1F-20,
10
43041786
RoHs
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
11
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
4314G246 Condenser Ass’y, RoHs
4314G247 Condenser Ass’y, RoHs
4314G248 Condenser Ass’y, RoHs
37546845 Valve, Packed, 6.35
43146680 Valve, Packed, 12.7
43147196 Bonnet, 1/4 IN
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
43147195 Bonnet, 1/2 IN
43046444 Valve, 4-WAY, STF-0108Z
43146722 Coil, Solenoid, STF-01A J502E1
43146695 Valve, Pulse, Modulating
37546849 Coil, PMV, CAM-MD12TF-6
43055521 Reactor
4302C068 Motor, Fan, ICF-140-43-4R
43020329 Fan, Propeller, PJ421
43047669 Nut, Flange
43197164 Nut, Flange, SUS304-WSB
43032441 Nipple, Drain
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
43089160 Cap, Waterproof
43050407 Thermostat, Bimetal
43063339 Holder, Sensor (TO)
43049749 Rubber, Cushion
3
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
43063321 Holder, Sensor, 4-8, 9.52
43063322 Holder, Sensor, 6-11.4, 12.7
43063325 Holder, Sensor, 6-6.35, 8
43063317 Holder, Thermostat
4314Q064 Muffler, 1/2
– 223 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
705
707
712
711
707
710
706
Model Name RAV-SP
404AT-E 404ARZ-E 404ATZG-E 454AT-E 454ATZ-E 454ATZG-E
Location
No.
Part No.
Description
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
710
711
712
43050422 Sensor, TE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
43050423 Sensor, TS
43050427 Sensor, TO
43050430 Sensor, TD
43062228 Base, P.C.board
43160566 Terminal, Block 6P, 20A
4316V293 P.C. Board Ass’y, SW, MCC-1530
4316V367 P.C.board Ass’y, MCC-5009
43160571 Fuse, Holder, 250V, 15A
43160590 Fuse, AC250V, 6.3A
43158192 Reactor
– 224 –
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNINGS ON REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE
Important
Check of Concentration Limit
The room in which the air conditioner is to be
installed requires a design that in the event of
refrigerant gas leaking out, its concentration will
not exceed a set limit.
NOTE 2 :
The standards for minimum room volume are as follows.
1) No partition (shaded portion)
The refrigerant R410A which is used in the air
conditioner is safe, without the toxicity or combustibility of
ammonia, and is not restricted by laws to be imposed
which protect the ozone layer. However, since it contains
more than air, it poses the risk of suffocation if its
concentration should rise excessively. Suffocation from
leakage of R410A is almost non-existent. With the recent
increase in the number of high concentration buildings,
however, the installation of multi air conditioner systems
is on the increase because of the need for effective use
of floor space, individual control, energy conservation by
curtailing heat and carrying power etc.
Most importantly, the multi air conditioner system is able
to replenish a large amount of refrigerant compared with
conventional individual air conditioners. If a single unit of
the multi conditioner system is to be installed in a small
room, select a suitable model and installation procedure
so that if the refrigerant accidentally leaks out, its
concentration does not reach the limit (and in the event
of an emergency, measures can be made before injury
can occur).
2) When there is an effective opening with the adjacent
room for ventilation of leaking refrigerant gas (opening
without a door, or an opening 0.15% or larger than the
respective floor spaces at the top or bottom of the door).
Outdoor unit
Refrigerant piping
Indoor unit
3) If an indoor unit is installed in each partitioned room
and the refrigerant piping is interconnected, the
smallest room of course becomes the object.
In a room where the concentration may exceed the limit,
create an opening with adjacent rooms, or install
mechanical ventilation combined with a gas leak
detection device.
But when a mechanical ventilation is installed
interlocked with a gas leakage detector in the smallest
room where the density limit is exceeded, the volume
of the next smallest room becomes the object.
The concentration is as given below.
Total amount of refrigerant (kg)
Min. volume of the indoor unit installed room (m³)
≤ Concentration limit (kg/m³)
Refrigerant piping
Outdoor unit
The concentration limit of R410A which is used in multi
air conditioners is 0.3kg/m³.
Very
small
Indoor unit
room
Small
room
Medium
room
Large room
Mechanical ventilation device - Gas leak detector
NOTE 1 :
If there are 2 or more refrigerating systems in a single
refrigerating device, the amounts of refrigerant should be
as charged in each independent device.
NOTE 3 :
The minimum indoor floor area compared with the
amount of refrigerant is roughly as follows:
(When the ceiling is 2.7m high)
Outdoor unit
e.g., charged
e.g.,
amount (10kg)
charged amount (15kg)
40
Range below the
35
m²
density limit
of 0.3 kg/m³
30
25
20
15
10
5
(countermeasures
not needed)
Room A Room B Room C Room D Room E Room F
Indoor unit
Range above
the density limit
of 0.3 kg/m³
(countermeasures
needed)
For the amount of charge in this example:
The possible amount of leaked refrigerant gas in
rooms A, B and C is 10kg.
The possible amount of leaked refrigerant gas in
rooms D, E and F is 15kg.
0
10
20
30
Total amount of refrigerant
kg
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOSHIBA CARRIER CORPORATION
23-17, TAKANAWA 3 CHOME, MINATOKU, TOKYO, 108-8580, JAPAN
Copyright © 1999 to 2007 TOSHIBA CARRIER CORPORATION, ALL Rights Reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|